Clean up some minor white space issues in trans-decl.c and trans-expr.c
[official-gcc.git] / gcc / combine.c
blob2f913dd8ea973acdedfe77d03ab252000c5547a6
1 /* Optimize by combining instructions for GNU compiler.
2 Copyright (C) 1987-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 This file is part of GCC.
6 GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
7 the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
8 Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option) any later
9 version.
11 GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
12 WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
13 FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
14 for more details.
16 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
17 along with GCC; see the file COPYING3. If not see
18 <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. */
20 /* This module is essentially the "combiner" phase of the U. of Arizona
21 Portable Optimizer, but redone to work on our list-structured
22 representation for RTL instead of their string representation.
24 The LOG_LINKS of each insn identify the most recent assignment
25 to each REG used in the insn. It is a list of previous insns,
26 each of which contains a SET for a REG that is used in this insn
27 and not used or set in between. LOG_LINKs never cross basic blocks.
28 They were set up by the preceding pass (lifetime analysis).
30 We try to combine each pair of insns joined by a logical link.
31 We also try to combine triplets of insns A, B and C when C has
32 a link back to B and B has a link back to A. Likewise for a
33 small number of quadruplets of insns A, B, C and D for which
34 there's high likelihood of success.
36 LOG_LINKS does not have links for use of the CC0. They don't
37 need to, because the insn that sets the CC0 is always immediately
38 before the insn that tests it. So we always regard a branch
39 insn as having a logical link to the preceding insn. The same is true
40 for an insn explicitly using CC0.
42 We check (with use_crosses_set_p) to avoid combining in such a way
43 as to move a computation to a place where its value would be different.
45 Combination is done by mathematically substituting the previous
46 insn(s) values for the regs they set into the expressions in
47 the later insns that refer to these regs. If the result is a valid insn
48 for our target machine, according to the machine description,
49 we install it, delete the earlier insns, and update the data flow
50 information (LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES) for what we did.
52 There are a few exceptions where the dataflow information isn't
53 completely updated (however this is only a local issue since it is
54 regenerated before the next pass that uses it):
56 - reg_live_length is not updated
57 - reg_n_refs is not adjusted in the rare case when a register is
58 no longer required in a computation
59 - there are extremely rare cases (see distribute_notes) when a
60 REG_DEAD note is lost
61 - a LOG_LINKS entry that refers to an insn with multiple SETs may be
62 removed because there is no way to know which register it was
63 linking
65 To simplify substitution, we combine only when the earlier insn(s)
66 consist of only a single assignment. To simplify updating afterward,
67 we never combine when a subroutine call appears in the middle.
69 Since we do not represent assignments to CC0 explicitly except when that
70 is all an insn does, there is no LOG_LINKS entry in an insn that uses
71 the condition code for the insn that set the condition code.
72 Fortunately, these two insns must be consecutive.
73 Therefore, every JUMP_INSN is taken to have an implicit logical link
74 to the preceding insn. This is not quite right, since non-jumps can
75 also use the condition code; but in practice such insns would not
76 combine anyway. */
78 #include "config.h"
79 #include "system.h"
80 #include "coretypes.h"
81 #include "backend.h"
82 #include "target.h"
83 #include "rtl.h"
84 #include "tree.h"
85 #include "predict.h"
86 #include "df.h"
87 #include "tm_p.h"
88 #include "optabs.h"
89 #include "regs.h"
90 #include "emit-rtl.h"
91 #include "recog.h"
92 #include "cgraph.h"
93 #include "stor-layout.h"
94 #include "cfgrtl.h"
95 #include "cfgcleanup.h"
96 /* Include expr.h after insn-config.h so we get HAVE_conditional_move. */
97 #include "explow.h"
98 #include "insn-attr.h"
99 #include "rtlhooks-def.h"
100 #include "params.h"
101 #include "tree-pass.h"
102 #include "valtrack.h"
103 #include "rtl-iter.h"
104 #include "print-rtl.h"
106 #ifndef LOAD_EXTEND_OP
107 #define LOAD_EXTEND_OP(M) UNKNOWN
108 #endif
110 /* Number of attempts to combine instructions in this function. */
112 static int combine_attempts;
114 /* Number of attempts that got as far as substitution in this function. */
116 static int combine_merges;
118 /* Number of instructions combined with added SETs in this function. */
120 static int combine_extras;
122 /* Number of instructions combined in this function. */
124 static int combine_successes;
126 /* Totals over entire compilation. */
128 static int total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes;
130 /* combine_instructions may try to replace the right hand side of the
131 second instruction with the value of an associated REG_EQUAL note
132 before throwing it at try_combine. That is problematic when there
133 is a REG_DEAD note for a register used in the old right hand side
134 and can cause distribute_notes to do wrong things. This is the
135 second instruction if it has been so modified, null otherwise. */
137 static rtx_insn *i2mod;
139 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the old right hand side. */
141 static rtx i2mod_old_rhs;
143 /* When I2MOD is nonnull, this is a copy of the new right hand side. */
145 static rtx i2mod_new_rhs;
147 struct reg_stat_type {
148 /* Record last point of death of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
149 rtx_insn *last_death;
151 /* Record last point of modification of (hard or pseudo) register n. */
152 rtx_insn *last_set;
154 /* The next group of fields allows the recording of the last value assigned
155 to (hard or pseudo) register n. We use this information to see if an
156 operation being processed is redundant given a prior operation performed
157 on the register. For example, an `and' with a constant is redundant if
158 all the zero bits are already known to be turned off.
160 We use an approach similar to that used by cse, but change it in the
161 following ways:
163 (1) We do not want to reinitialize at each label.
164 (2) It is useful, but not critical, to know the actual value assigned
165 to a register. Often just its form is helpful.
167 Therefore, we maintain the following fields:
169 last_set_value the last value assigned
170 last_set_label records the value of label_tick when the
171 register was assigned
172 last_set_table_tick records the value of label_tick when a
173 value using the register is assigned
174 last_set_invalid set to nonzero when it is not valid
175 to use the value of this register in some
176 register's value
178 To understand the usage of these tables, it is important to understand
179 the distinction between the value in last_set_value being valid and
180 the register being validly contained in some other expression in the
181 table.
183 (The next two parameters are out of date).
185 reg_stat[i].last_set_value is valid if it is nonzero, and either
186 reg_n_sets[i] is 1 or reg_stat[i].last_set_label == label_tick.
188 Register I may validly appear in any expression returned for the value
189 of another register if reg_n_sets[i] is 1. It may also appear in the
190 value for register J if reg_stat[j].last_set_invalid is zero, or
191 reg_stat[i].last_set_label < reg_stat[j].last_set_label.
193 If an expression is found in the table containing a register which may
194 not validly appear in an expression, the register is replaced by
195 something that won't match, (clobber (const_int 0)). */
197 /* Record last value assigned to (hard or pseudo) register n. */
199 rtx last_set_value;
201 /* Record the value of label_tick when an expression involving register n
202 is placed in last_set_value. */
204 int last_set_table_tick;
206 /* Record the value of label_tick when the value for register n is placed in
207 last_set_value. */
209 int last_set_label;
211 /* These fields are maintained in parallel with last_set_value and are
212 used to store the mode in which the register was last set, the bits
213 that were known to be zero when it was last set, and the number of
214 sign bits copies it was known to have when it was last set. */
216 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT last_set_nonzero_bits;
217 char last_set_sign_bit_copies;
218 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) last_set_mode : 8;
220 /* Set nonzero if references to register n in expressions should not be
221 used. last_set_invalid is set nonzero when this register is being
222 assigned to and last_set_table_tick == label_tick. */
224 char last_set_invalid;
226 /* Some registers that are set more than once and used in more than one
227 basic block are nevertheless always set in similar ways. For example,
228 a QImode register may be loaded from memory in two places on a machine
229 where byte loads zero extend.
231 We record in the following fields if a register has some leading bits
232 that are always equal to the sign bit, and what we know about the
233 nonzero bits of a register, specifically which bits are known to be
234 zero.
236 If an entry is zero, it means that we don't know anything special. */
238 unsigned char sign_bit_copies;
240 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero_bits;
242 /* Record the value of the label_tick when the last truncation
243 happened. The field truncated_to_mode is only valid if
244 truncation_label == label_tick. */
246 int truncation_label;
248 /* Record the last truncation seen for this register. If truncation
249 is not a nop to this mode we might be able to save an explicit
250 truncation if we know that value already contains a truncated
251 value. */
253 ENUM_BITFIELD(machine_mode) truncated_to_mode : 8;
257 static vec<reg_stat_type> reg_stat;
259 /* One plus the highest pseudo for which we track REG_N_SETS.
260 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs allocates the array for REG_N_SETS just once,
261 but during combine_split_insns new pseudos can be created. As we don't have
262 updated DF information in that case, it is hard to initialize the array
263 after growing. The combiner only cares about REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1,
264 so instead of growing the arrays, just assume all newly created pseudos
265 during combine might be set multiple times. */
267 static unsigned int reg_n_sets_max;
269 /* Record the luid of the last insn that invalidated memory
270 (anything that writes memory, and subroutine calls, but not pushes). */
272 static int mem_last_set;
274 /* Record the luid of the last CALL_INSN
275 so we can tell whether a potential combination crosses any calls. */
277 static int last_call_luid;
279 /* When `subst' is called, this is the insn that is being modified
280 (by combining in a previous insn). The PATTERN of this insn
281 is still the old pattern partially modified and it should not be
282 looked at, but this may be used to examine the successors of the insn
283 to judge whether a simplification is valid. */
285 static rtx_insn *subst_insn;
287 /* This is the lowest LUID that `subst' is currently dealing with.
288 get_last_value will not return a value if the register was set at or
289 after this LUID. If not for this mechanism, we could get confused if
290 I2 or I1 in try_combine were an insn that used the old value of a register
291 to obtain a new value. In that case, we might erroneously get the
292 new value of the register when we wanted the old one. */
294 static int subst_low_luid;
296 /* This contains any hard registers that are used in newpat; reg_dead_at_p
297 must consider all these registers to be always live. */
299 static HARD_REG_SET newpat_used_regs;
301 /* This is an insn to which a LOG_LINKS entry has been added. If this
302 insn is the earlier than I2 or I3, combine should rescan starting at
303 that location. */
305 static rtx_insn *added_links_insn;
307 /* Basic block in which we are performing combines. */
308 static basic_block this_basic_block;
309 static bool optimize_this_for_speed_p;
312 /* Length of the currently allocated uid_insn_cost array. */
314 static int max_uid_known;
316 /* The following array records the insn_rtx_cost for every insn
317 in the instruction stream. */
319 static int *uid_insn_cost;
321 /* The following array records the LOG_LINKS for every insn in the
322 instruction stream as struct insn_link pointers. */
324 struct insn_link {
325 rtx_insn *insn;
326 unsigned int regno;
327 struct insn_link *next;
330 static struct insn_link **uid_log_links;
332 #define INSN_COST(INSN) (uid_insn_cost[INSN_UID (INSN)])
333 #define LOG_LINKS(INSN) (uid_log_links[INSN_UID (INSN)])
335 #define FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK(L, INSN) \
336 for ((L) = LOG_LINKS (INSN); (L); (L) = (L)->next)
338 /* Links for LOG_LINKS are allocated from this obstack. */
340 static struct obstack insn_link_obstack;
342 /* Allocate a link. */
344 static inline struct insn_link *
345 alloc_insn_link (rtx_insn *insn, unsigned int regno, struct insn_link *next)
347 struct insn_link *l
348 = (struct insn_link *) obstack_alloc (&insn_link_obstack,
349 sizeof (struct insn_link));
350 l->insn = insn;
351 l->regno = regno;
352 l->next = next;
353 return l;
356 /* Incremented for each basic block. */
358 static int label_tick;
360 /* Reset to label_tick for each extended basic block in scanning order. */
362 static int label_tick_ebb_start;
364 /* Mode used to compute significance in reg_stat[].nonzero_bits. It is the
365 largest integer mode that can fit in HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT. */
367 static machine_mode nonzero_bits_mode;
369 /* Nonzero when reg_stat[].nonzero_bits and reg_stat[].sign_bit_copies can
370 be safely used. It is zero while computing them and after combine has
371 completed. This former test prevents propagating values based on
372 previously set values, which can be incorrect if a variable is modified
373 in a loop. */
375 static int nonzero_sign_valid;
378 /* Record one modification to rtl structure
379 to be undone by storing old_contents into *where. */
381 enum undo_kind { UNDO_RTX, UNDO_INT, UNDO_MODE, UNDO_LINKS };
383 struct undo
385 struct undo *next;
386 enum undo_kind kind;
387 union { rtx r; int i; machine_mode m; struct insn_link *l; } old_contents;
388 union { rtx *r; int *i; struct insn_link **l; } where;
391 /* Record a bunch of changes to be undone, up to MAX_UNDO of them.
392 num_undo says how many are currently recorded.
394 other_insn is nonzero if we have modified some other insn in the process
395 of working on subst_insn. It must be verified too. */
397 struct undobuf
399 struct undo *undos;
400 struct undo *frees;
401 rtx_insn *other_insn;
404 static struct undobuf undobuf;
406 /* Number of times the pseudo being substituted for
407 was found and replaced. */
409 static int n_occurrences;
411 static rtx reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
412 machine_mode,
413 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
414 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
415 static rtx reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx, machine_mode, const_rtx,
416 machine_mode,
417 unsigned int, unsigned int *);
418 static void do_SUBST (rtx *, rtx);
419 static void do_SUBST_INT (int *, int);
420 static void init_reg_last (void);
421 static void setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *);
422 static void set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
423 static int cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *);
424 static int can_combine_p (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
425 rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx *);
426 static int combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *, rtx *, rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, rtx *);
427 static int contains_muldiv (rtx);
428 static rtx_insn *try_combine (rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *,
429 int *, rtx_insn *);
430 static void undo_all (void);
431 static void undo_commit (void);
432 static rtx *find_split_point (rtx *, rtx_insn *, bool);
433 static rtx subst (rtx, rtx, rtx, int, int, int);
434 static rtx combine_simplify_rtx (rtx, machine_mode, int, int);
435 static rtx simplify_if_then_else (rtx);
436 static rtx simplify_set (rtx);
437 static rtx simplify_logical (rtx);
438 static rtx expand_compound_operation (rtx);
439 static const_rtx expand_field_assignment (const_rtx);
440 static rtx make_extraction (machine_mode, rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT,
441 rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int, int, int);
442 static rtx extract_left_shift (rtx, int);
443 static int get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
444 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *);
445 static rtx canon_reg_for_combine (rtx, rtx);
446 static rtx force_to_mode (rtx, machine_mode,
447 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
448 static rtx if_then_else_cond (rtx, rtx *, rtx *);
449 static rtx known_cond (rtx, enum rtx_code, rtx, rtx);
450 static int rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx, rtx, bool = false);
451 static rtx make_field_assignment (rtx);
452 static rtx apply_distributive_law (rtx);
453 static rtx distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx, int);
454 static rtx simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode, rtx,
455 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
456 static rtx simplify_and_const_int (rtx, machine_mode, rtx,
457 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);
458 static int merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *, HOST_WIDE_INT *, enum rtx_code,
459 HOST_WIDE_INT, machine_mode, int *);
460 static rtx simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx, int);
461 static rtx simplify_shift_const (rtx, enum rtx_code, machine_mode, rtx,
462 int);
463 static int recog_for_combine (rtx *, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
464 static rtx gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode, rtx);
465 static enum rtx_code simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code, machine_mode,
466 rtx, rtx *);
467 static enum rtx_code simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code, rtx *, rtx *);
468 static void update_table_tick (rtx);
469 static void record_value_for_reg (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx);
470 static void check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *, rtx);
471 static void record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
472 static void record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *);
473 static int get_last_value_validate (rtx *, rtx_insn *, int, int);
474 static rtx get_last_value (const_rtx);
475 static int use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx, int);
476 static void reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx, const_rtx, void *);
477 static int reg_dead_at_p (rtx, rtx_insn *);
478 static void move_deaths (rtx, rtx, int, rtx_insn *, rtx *);
479 static int reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx, rtx);
480 static void distribute_notes (rtx, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx_insn *, rtx, rtx, rtx);
481 static void distribute_links (struct insn_link *);
482 static void mark_used_regs_combine (rtx);
483 static void record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *, rtx);
484 static bool unmentioned_reg_p (rtx, rtx);
485 static void record_truncated_values (rtx *, void *);
486 static bool reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode, const_rtx);
487 static rtx gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode, rtx);
490 /* It is not safe to use ordinary gen_lowpart in combine.
491 See comments in gen_lowpart_for_combine. */
492 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART
493 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART gen_lowpart_for_combine
495 /* Our implementation of gen_lowpart never emits a new pseudo. */
496 #undef RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT
497 #define RTL_HOOKS_GEN_LOWPART_NO_EMIT gen_lowpart_for_combine
499 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS
500 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NONZERO_REG_BITS reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine
502 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES
503 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_NUM_SIGN_BIT_COPIES reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine
505 #undef RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE
506 #define RTL_HOOKS_REG_TRUNCATED_TO_MODE reg_truncated_to_mode
508 static const struct rtl_hooks combine_rtl_hooks = RTL_HOOKS_INITIALIZER;
511 /* Convenience wrapper for the canonicalize_comparison target hook.
512 Target hooks cannot use enum rtx_code. */
513 static inline void
514 target_canonicalize_comparison (enum rtx_code *code, rtx *op0, rtx *op1,
515 bool op0_preserve_value)
517 int code_int = (int)*code;
518 targetm.canonicalize_comparison (&code_int, op0, op1, op0_preserve_value);
519 *code = (enum rtx_code)code_int;
522 /* Try to split PATTERN found in INSN. This returns NULL_RTX if
523 PATTERN can not be split. Otherwise, it returns an insn sequence.
524 This is a wrapper around split_insns which ensures that the
525 reg_stat vector is made larger if the splitter creates a new
526 register. */
528 static rtx_insn *
529 combine_split_insns (rtx pattern, rtx_insn *insn)
531 rtx_insn *ret;
532 unsigned int nregs;
534 ret = split_insns (pattern, insn);
535 nregs = max_reg_num ();
536 if (nregs > reg_stat.length ())
537 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
538 return ret;
541 /* This is used by find_single_use to locate an rtx in LOC that
542 contains exactly one use of DEST, which is typically either a REG
543 or CC0. It returns a pointer to the innermost rtx expression
544 containing DEST. Appearances of DEST that are being used to
545 totally replace it are not counted. */
547 static rtx *
548 find_single_use_1 (rtx dest, rtx *loc)
550 rtx x = *loc;
551 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
552 rtx *result = NULL;
553 rtx *this_result;
554 int i;
555 const char *fmt;
557 switch (code)
559 case CONST:
560 case LABEL_REF:
561 case SYMBOL_REF:
562 CASE_CONST_ANY:
563 case CLOBBER:
564 return 0;
566 case SET:
567 /* If the destination is anything other than CC0, PC, a REG or a SUBREG
568 of a REG that occupies all of the REG, the insn uses DEST if
569 it is mentioned in the destination or the source. Otherwise, we
570 need just check the source. */
571 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != CC0
572 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) != PC
573 && !REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
574 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
575 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)))
576 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
577 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
578 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
579 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
580 break;
582 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &SET_SRC (x));
584 case MEM:
585 case SUBREG:
586 return find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, 0));
588 default:
589 break;
592 /* If it wasn't one of the common cases above, check each expression and
593 vector of this code. Look for a unique usage of DEST. */
595 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
596 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
598 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
600 if (dest == XEXP (x, i)
601 || (REG_P (dest) && REG_P (XEXP (x, i))
602 && REGNO (dest) == REGNO (XEXP (x, i))))
603 this_result = loc;
604 else
605 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XEXP (x, i));
607 if (result == NULL)
608 result = this_result;
609 else if (this_result)
610 /* Duplicate usage. */
611 return NULL;
613 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
615 int j;
617 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
619 if (XVECEXP (x, i, j) == dest
620 || (REG_P (dest)
621 && REG_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j))
622 && REGNO (XVECEXP (x, i, j)) == REGNO (dest)))
623 this_result = loc;
624 else
625 this_result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &XVECEXP (x, i, j));
627 if (result == NULL)
628 result = this_result;
629 else if (this_result)
630 return NULL;
635 return result;
639 /* See if DEST, produced in INSN, is used only a single time in the
640 sequel. If so, return a pointer to the innermost rtx expression in which
641 it is used.
643 If PLOC is nonzero, *PLOC is set to the insn containing the single use.
645 If DEST is cc0_rtx, we look only at the next insn. In that case, we don't
646 care about REG_DEAD notes or LOG_LINKS.
648 Otherwise, we find the single use by finding an insn that has a
649 LOG_LINKS pointing at INSN and has a REG_DEAD note for DEST. If DEST is
650 only referenced once in that insn, we know that it must be the first
651 and last insn referencing DEST. */
653 static rtx *
654 find_single_use (rtx dest, rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn **ploc)
656 basic_block bb;
657 rtx_insn *next;
658 rtx *result;
659 struct insn_link *link;
661 if (dest == cc0_rtx)
663 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
664 if (next == 0
665 || (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (next) && !JUMP_P (next)))
666 return 0;
668 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
669 if (result && ploc)
670 *ploc = next;
671 return result;
674 if (!REG_P (dest))
675 return 0;
677 bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
678 for (next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
679 next && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (next) == bb;
680 next = NEXT_INSN (next))
681 if (INSN_P (next) && dead_or_set_p (next, dest))
683 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, next)
684 if (link->insn == insn && link->regno == REGNO (dest))
685 break;
687 if (link)
689 result = find_single_use_1 (dest, &PATTERN (next));
690 if (ploc)
691 *ploc = next;
692 return result;
696 return 0;
699 /* Substitute NEWVAL, an rtx expression, into INTO, a place in some
700 insn. The substitution can be undone by undo_all. If INTO is already
701 set to NEWVAL, do not record this change. Because computing NEWVAL might
702 also call SUBST, we have to compute it before we put anything into
703 the undo table. */
705 static void
706 do_SUBST (rtx *into, rtx newval)
708 struct undo *buf;
709 rtx oldval = *into;
711 if (oldval == newval)
712 return;
714 /* We'd like to catch as many invalid transformations here as
715 possible. Unfortunately, there are way too many mode changes
716 that are perfectly valid, so we'd waste too much effort for
717 little gain doing the checks here. Focus on catching invalid
718 transformations involving integer constants. */
719 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (oldval)) == MODE_INT
720 && CONST_INT_P (newval))
722 /* Sanity check that we're replacing oldval with a CONST_INT
723 that is a valid sign-extension for the original mode. */
724 gcc_assert (INTVAL (newval)
725 == trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (newval), GET_MODE (oldval)));
727 /* Replacing the operand of a SUBREG or a ZERO_EXTEND with a
728 CONST_INT is not valid, because after the replacement, the
729 original mode would be gone. Unfortunately, we can't tell
730 when do_SUBST is called to replace the operand thereof, so we
731 perform this test on oldval instead, checking whether an
732 invalid replacement took place before we got here. */
733 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == SUBREG
734 && CONST_INT_P (SUBREG_REG (oldval))));
735 gcc_assert (!(GET_CODE (oldval) == ZERO_EXTEND
736 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (oldval, 0))));
739 if (undobuf.frees)
740 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
741 else
742 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
744 buf->kind = UNDO_RTX;
745 buf->where.r = into;
746 buf->old_contents.r = oldval;
747 *into = newval;
749 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
752 #define SUBST(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
754 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is an int expression. Note that substitution
755 for the value of a HOST_WIDE_INT value (including CONST_INT) is
756 not safe. */
758 static void
759 do_SUBST_INT (int *into, int newval)
761 struct undo *buf;
762 int oldval = *into;
764 if (oldval == newval)
765 return;
767 if (undobuf.frees)
768 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
769 else
770 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
772 buf->kind = UNDO_INT;
773 buf->where.i = into;
774 buf->old_contents.i = oldval;
775 *into = newval;
777 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
780 #define SUBST_INT(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_INT (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
782 /* Similar to SUBST, but just substitute the mode. This is used when
783 changing the mode of a pseudo-register, so that any other
784 references to the entry in the regno_reg_rtx array will change as
785 well. */
787 static void
788 do_SUBST_MODE (rtx *into, machine_mode newval)
790 struct undo *buf;
791 machine_mode oldval = GET_MODE (*into);
793 if (oldval == newval)
794 return;
796 if (undobuf.frees)
797 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
798 else
799 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
801 buf->kind = UNDO_MODE;
802 buf->where.r = into;
803 buf->old_contents.m = oldval;
804 adjust_reg_mode (*into, newval);
806 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
809 #define SUBST_MODE(INTO, NEWVAL) do_SUBST_MODE (&(INTO), (NEWVAL))
811 /* Similar to SUBST, but NEWVAL is a LOG_LINKS expression. */
813 static void
814 do_SUBST_LINK (struct insn_link **into, struct insn_link *newval)
816 struct undo *buf;
817 struct insn_link * oldval = *into;
819 if (oldval == newval)
820 return;
822 if (undobuf.frees)
823 buf = undobuf.frees, undobuf.frees = buf->next;
824 else
825 buf = XNEW (struct undo);
827 buf->kind = UNDO_LINKS;
828 buf->where.l = into;
829 buf->old_contents.l = oldval;
830 *into = newval;
832 buf->next = undobuf.undos, undobuf.undos = buf;
835 #define SUBST_LINK(oldval, newval) do_SUBST_LINK (&oldval, newval)
837 /* Subroutine of try_combine. Determine whether the replacement patterns
838 NEWPAT, NEWI2PAT and NEWOTHERPAT are cheaper according to insn_rtx_cost
839 than the original sequence I0, I1, I2, I3 and undobuf.other_insn. Note
840 that I0, I1 and/or NEWI2PAT may be NULL_RTX. Similarly, NEWOTHERPAT and
841 undobuf.other_insn may also both be NULL_RTX. Return false if the cost
842 of all the instructions can be estimated and the replacements are more
843 expensive than the original sequence. */
845 static bool
846 combine_validate_cost (rtx_insn *i0, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i3,
847 rtx newpat, rtx newi2pat, rtx newotherpat)
849 int i0_cost, i1_cost, i2_cost, i3_cost;
850 int new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost;
851 int old_cost, new_cost;
853 /* Lookup the original insn_rtx_costs. */
854 i2_cost = INSN_COST (i2);
855 i3_cost = INSN_COST (i3);
857 if (i1)
859 i1_cost = INSN_COST (i1);
860 if (i0)
862 i0_cost = INSN_COST (i0);
863 old_cost = (i0_cost > 0 && i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
864 ? i0_cost + i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
866 else
868 old_cost = (i1_cost > 0 && i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0
869 ? i1_cost + i2_cost + i3_cost : 0);
870 i0_cost = 0;
873 else
875 old_cost = (i2_cost > 0 && i3_cost > 0) ? i2_cost + i3_cost : 0;
876 i1_cost = i0_cost = 0;
879 /* If we have split a PARALLEL I2 to I1,I2, we have counted its cost twice;
880 correct that. */
881 if (old_cost && i1 && INSN_UID (i1) == INSN_UID (i2))
882 old_cost -= i1_cost;
885 /* Calculate the replacement insn_rtx_costs. */
886 new_i3_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
887 if (newi2pat)
889 new_i2_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newi2pat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
890 new_cost = (new_i2_cost > 0 && new_i3_cost > 0)
891 ? new_i2_cost + new_i3_cost : 0;
893 else
895 new_cost = new_i3_cost;
896 new_i2_cost = 0;
899 if (undobuf.other_insn)
901 int old_other_cost, new_other_cost;
903 old_other_cost = INSN_COST (undobuf.other_insn);
904 new_other_cost = insn_rtx_cost (newotherpat, optimize_this_for_speed_p);
905 if (old_other_cost > 0 && new_other_cost > 0)
907 old_cost += old_other_cost;
908 new_cost += new_other_cost;
910 else
911 old_cost = 0;
914 /* Disallow this combination if both new_cost and old_cost are greater than
915 zero, and new_cost is greater than old cost. */
916 int reject = old_cost > 0 && new_cost > old_cost;
918 if (dump_file)
920 fprintf (dump_file, "%s combination of insns ",
921 reject ? "rejecting" : "allowing");
922 if (i0)
923 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i0));
924 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
925 fprintf (dump_file, "%d, ", INSN_UID (i1));
926 fprintf (dump_file, "%d and %d\n", INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
928 fprintf (dump_file, "original costs ");
929 if (i0)
930 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i0_cost);
931 if (i1 && INSN_UID (i1) != INSN_UID (i2))
932 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + ", i1_cost);
933 fprintf (dump_file, "%d + %d = %d\n", i2_cost, i3_cost, old_cost);
935 if (newi2pat)
936 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement costs %d + %d = %d\n",
937 new_i2_cost, new_i3_cost, new_cost);
938 else
939 fprintf (dump_file, "replacement cost %d\n", new_cost);
942 if (reject)
943 return false;
945 /* Update the uid_insn_cost array with the replacement costs. */
946 INSN_COST (i2) = new_i2_cost;
947 INSN_COST (i3) = new_i3_cost;
948 if (i1)
950 INSN_COST (i1) = 0;
951 if (i0)
952 INSN_COST (i0) = 0;
955 return true;
959 /* Delete any insns that copy a register to itself. */
961 static void
962 delete_noop_moves (void)
964 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
965 basic_block bb;
967 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
969 for (insn = BB_HEAD (bb); insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (bb)); insn = next)
971 next = NEXT_INSN (insn);
972 if (INSN_P (insn) && noop_move_p (insn))
974 if (dump_file)
975 fprintf (dump_file, "deleting noop move %d\n", INSN_UID (insn));
977 delete_insn_and_edges (insn);
984 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine DEF. */
985 static bool
986 can_combine_def_p (df_ref def)
988 /* Do not consider if it is pre/post modification in MEM. */
989 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (def) & DF_REF_PRE_POST_MODIFY)
990 return false;
992 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
994 /* Do not combine frame pointer adjustments. */
995 if ((regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
996 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
997 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
998 && regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
999 && (!reload_completed || frame_pointer_needed))
1000 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
1001 && regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno]))
1002 return false;
1004 return true;
1007 /* Return false if we do not want to (or cannot) combine USE. */
1008 static bool
1009 can_combine_use_p (df_ref use)
1011 /* Do not consider the usage of the stack pointer by function call. */
1012 if (DF_REF_FLAGS (use) & DF_REF_CALL_STACK_USAGE)
1013 return false;
1015 return true;
1018 /* Fill in log links field for all insns. */
1020 static void
1021 create_log_links (void)
1023 basic_block bb;
1024 rtx_insn **next_use;
1025 rtx_insn *insn;
1026 df_ref def, use;
1028 next_use = XCNEWVEC (rtx_insn *, max_reg_num ());
1030 /* Pass through each block from the end, recording the uses of each
1031 register and establishing log links when def is encountered.
1032 Note that we do not clear next_use array in order to save time,
1033 so we have to test whether the use is in the same basic block as def.
1035 There are a few cases below when we do not consider the definition or
1036 usage -- these are taken from original flow.c did. Don't ask me why it is
1037 done this way; I don't know and if it works, I don't want to know. */
1039 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (bb, cfun)
1041 FOR_BB_INSNS_REVERSE (bb, insn)
1043 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1044 continue;
1046 /* Log links are created only once. */
1047 gcc_assert (!LOG_LINKS (insn));
1049 FOR_EACH_INSN_DEF (def, insn)
1051 unsigned int regno = DF_REF_REGNO (def);
1052 rtx_insn *use_insn;
1054 if (!next_use[regno])
1055 continue;
1057 if (!can_combine_def_p (def))
1058 continue;
1060 use_insn = next_use[regno];
1061 next_use[regno] = NULL;
1063 if (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (use_insn) != bb)
1064 continue;
1066 /* flow.c claimed:
1068 We don't build a LOG_LINK for hard registers contained
1069 in ASM_OPERANDs. If these registers get replaced,
1070 we might wind up changing the semantics of the insn,
1071 even if reload can make what appear to be valid
1072 assignments later. */
1073 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1074 && asm_noperands (PATTERN (use_insn)) >= 0)
1075 continue;
1077 /* Don't add duplicate links between instructions. */
1078 struct insn_link *links;
1079 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, use_insn)
1080 if (insn == links->insn && regno == links->regno)
1081 break;
1083 if (!links)
1084 LOG_LINKS (use_insn)
1085 = alloc_insn_link (insn, regno, LOG_LINKS (use_insn));
1088 FOR_EACH_INSN_USE (use, insn)
1089 if (can_combine_use_p (use))
1090 next_use[DF_REF_REGNO (use)] = insn;
1094 free (next_use);
1097 /* Walk the LOG_LINKS of insn B to see if we find a reference to A. Return
1098 true if we found a LOG_LINK that proves that A feeds B. This only works
1099 if there are no instructions between A and B which could have a link
1100 depending on A, since in that case we would not record a link for B.
1101 We also check the implicit dependency created by a cc0 setter/user
1102 pair. */
1104 static bool
1105 insn_a_feeds_b (rtx_insn *a, rtx_insn *b)
1107 struct insn_link *links;
1108 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, b)
1109 if (links->insn == a)
1110 return true;
1111 if (HAVE_cc0 && sets_cc0_p (a))
1112 return true;
1113 return false;
1116 /* Main entry point for combiner. F is the first insn of the function.
1117 NREGS is the first unused pseudo-reg number.
1119 Return nonzero if the combiner has turned an indirect jump
1120 instruction into a direct jump. */
1121 static int
1122 combine_instructions (rtx_insn *f, unsigned int nregs)
1124 rtx_insn *insn, *next;
1125 rtx_insn *prev;
1126 struct insn_link *links, *nextlinks;
1127 rtx_insn *first;
1128 basic_block last_bb;
1130 int new_direct_jump_p = 0;
1132 for (first = f; first && !INSN_P (first); )
1133 first = NEXT_INSN (first);
1134 if (!first)
1135 return 0;
1137 combine_attempts = 0;
1138 combine_merges = 0;
1139 combine_extras = 0;
1140 combine_successes = 0;
1142 rtl_hooks = combine_rtl_hooks;
1144 reg_stat.safe_grow_cleared (nregs);
1146 init_recog_no_volatile ();
1148 /* Allocate array for insn info. */
1149 max_uid_known = get_max_uid ();
1150 uid_log_links = XCNEWVEC (struct insn_link *, max_uid_known + 1);
1151 uid_insn_cost = XCNEWVEC (int, max_uid_known + 1);
1152 gcc_obstack_init (&insn_link_obstack);
1154 nonzero_bits_mode = mode_for_size (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT, MODE_INT, 0);
1156 /* Don't use reg_stat[].nonzero_bits when computing it. This can cause
1157 problems when, for example, we have j <<= 1 in a loop. */
1159 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1160 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1162 /* Scan all SETs and see if we can deduce anything about what
1163 bits are known to be zero for some registers and how many copies
1164 of the sign bit are known to exist for those registers.
1166 Also set any known values so that we can use it while searching
1167 for what bits are known to be set. */
1169 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1170 /* Allow the entry block and the first block to fall into the same EBB.
1171 Conceptually the incoming promotions are assigned to the entry block. */
1172 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1174 create_log_links ();
1175 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1177 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1178 last_call_luid = 0;
1179 mem_last_set = -1;
1181 label_tick++;
1182 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1183 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1184 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1185 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1187 FOR_BB_INSNS (this_basic_block, insn)
1188 if (INSN_P (insn) && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn))
1190 rtx links;
1192 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1193 subst_insn = insn;
1195 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies,
1196 insn);
1197 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1199 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
1200 for (links = REG_NOTES (insn); links; links = XEXP (links, 1))
1201 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (links) == REG_INC)
1202 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (XEXP (links, 0), NULL_RTX,
1203 insn);
1205 /* Record the current insn_rtx_cost of this instruction. */
1206 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn))
1207 INSN_COST (insn) = insn_rtx_cost (PATTERN (insn),
1208 optimize_this_for_speed_p);
1209 if (dump_file)
1210 fprintf (dump_file, "insn_cost %d: %d\n",
1211 INSN_UID (insn), INSN_COST (insn));
1215 nonzero_sign_valid = 1;
1217 /* Now scan all the insns in forward order. */
1218 label_tick = label_tick_ebb_start = 1;
1219 init_reg_last ();
1220 setup_incoming_promotions (first);
1221 last_bb = ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun);
1222 int max_combine = PARAM_VALUE (PARAM_MAX_COMBINE_INSNS);
1224 FOR_EACH_BB_FN (this_basic_block, cfun)
1226 rtx_insn *last_combined_insn = NULL;
1227 optimize_this_for_speed_p = optimize_bb_for_speed_p (this_basic_block);
1228 last_call_luid = 0;
1229 mem_last_set = -1;
1231 label_tick++;
1232 if (!single_pred_p (this_basic_block)
1233 || single_pred (this_basic_block) != last_bb)
1234 label_tick_ebb_start = label_tick;
1235 last_bb = this_basic_block;
1237 rtl_profile_for_bb (this_basic_block);
1238 for (insn = BB_HEAD (this_basic_block);
1239 insn != NEXT_INSN (BB_END (this_basic_block));
1240 insn = next ? next : NEXT_INSN (insn))
1242 next = 0;
1243 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
1244 continue;
1246 while (last_combined_insn
1247 && last_combined_insn->deleted ())
1248 last_combined_insn = PREV_INSN (last_combined_insn);
1249 if (last_combined_insn == NULL_RTX
1250 || BARRIER_P (last_combined_insn)
1251 || BLOCK_FOR_INSN (last_combined_insn) != this_basic_block
1252 || DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn) <= DF_INSN_LUID (insn))
1253 last_combined_insn = insn;
1255 /* See if we know about function return values before this
1256 insn based upon SUBREG flags. */
1257 check_promoted_subreg (insn, PATTERN (insn));
1259 /* See if we can find hardregs and subreg of pseudos in
1260 narrower modes. This could help turning TRUNCATEs
1261 into SUBREGs. */
1262 note_uses (&PATTERN (insn), record_truncated_values, NULL);
1264 /* Try this insn with each insn it links back to. */
1266 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1267 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn, NULL,
1268 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1269 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1271 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "two-insn combine", 1);
1272 goto retry;
1275 /* Try each sequence of three linked insns ending with this one. */
1277 if (max_combine >= 3)
1278 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1280 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1282 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1283 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1284 if (NOTE_P (link))
1285 continue;
1287 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1288 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, nextlinks->insn,
1289 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1290 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1292 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1293 goto retry;
1297 /* Try to combine a jump insn that uses CC0
1298 with a preceding insn that sets CC0, and maybe with its
1299 logical predecessor as well.
1300 This is how we make decrement-and-branch insns.
1301 We need this special code because data flow connections
1302 via CC0 do not get entered in LOG_LINKS. */
1304 if (HAVE_cc0
1305 && JUMP_P (insn)
1306 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1307 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1308 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev)))
1310 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1311 &new_direct_jump_p,
1312 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1313 goto retry;
1315 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1316 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1317 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1318 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1319 goto retry;
1322 /* Do the same for an insn that explicitly references CC0. */
1323 if (HAVE_cc0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (insn)
1324 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (insn)) != 0
1325 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1326 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1327 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET
1328 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (insn))))
1330 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, NULL, NULL,
1331 &new_direct_jump_p,
1332 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1333 goto retry;
1335 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, prev)
1336 if ((next = try_combine (insn, prev, nextlinks->insn,
1337 NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1338 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1339 goto retry;
1342 /* Finally, see if any of the insns that this insn links to
1343 explicitly references CC0. If so, try this insn, that insn,
1344 and its predecessor if it sets CC0. */
1345 if (HAVE_cc0)
1347 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1348 if (NONJUMP_INSN_P (links->insn)
1349 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (links->insn)) == SET
1350 && reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (PATTERN (links->insn)))
1351 && (prev = prev_nonnote_insn (links->insn)) != 0
1352 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (prev)
1353 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (prev))
1354 && (next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1355 prev, NULL, &new_direct_jump_p,
1356 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1357 goto retry;
1360 /* Try combining an insn with two different insns whose results it
1361 uses. */
1362 if (max_combine >= 3)
1363 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1364 for (nextlinks = links->next; nextlinks;
1365 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1366 if ((next = try_combine (insn, links->insn,
1367 nextlinks->insn, NULL,
1368 &new_direct_jump_p,
1369 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1372 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "three-insn combine", 1);
1373 goto retry;
1376 /* Try four-instruction combinations. */
1377 if (max_combine >= 4)
1378 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1380 struct insn_link *next1;
1381 rtx_insn *link = links->insn;
1383 /* If the linked insn has been replaced by a note, then there
1384 is no point in pursuing this chain any further. */
1385 if (NOTE_P (link))
1386 continue;
1388 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (next1, link)
1390 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1391 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1392 continue;
1393 /* I0 -> I1 -> I2 -> I3. */
1394 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1395 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1396 nextlinks->insn,
1397 &new_direct_jump_p,
1398 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1400 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1401 goto retry;
1403 /* I0, I1 -> I2, I2 -> I3. */
1404 for (nextlinks = next1->next; nextlinks;
1405 nextlinks = nextlinks->next)
1406 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1407 nextlinks->insn,
1408 &new_direct_jump_p,
1409 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1411 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1412 goto retry;
1416 for (next1 = links->next; next1; next1 = next1->next)
1418 rtx_insn *link1 = next1->insn;
1419 if (NOTE_P (link1))
1420 continue;
1421 /* I0 -> I2; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1422 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link)
1423 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1424 nextlinks->insn,
1425 &new_direct_jump_p,
1426 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1428 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1429 goto retry;
1431 /* I0 -> I1; I1, I2 -> I3. */
1432 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (nextlinks, link1)
1433 if ((next = try_combine (insn, link, link1,
1434 nextlinks->insn,
1435 &new_direct_jump_p,
1436 last_combined_insn)) != 0)
1438 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "four-insn combine", 1);
1439 goto retry;
1444 /* Try this insn with each REG_EQUAL note it links back to. */
1445 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (links, insn)
1447 rtx set, note;
1448 rtx_insn *temp = links->insn;
1449 if ((set = single_set (temp)) != 0
1450 && (note = find_reg_equal_equiv_note (temp)) != 0
1451 && (note = XEXP (note, 0), GET_CODE (note)) != EXPR_LIST
1452 /* Avoid using a register that may already been marked
1453 dead by an earlier instruction. */
1454 && ! unmentioned_reg_p (note, SET_SRC (set))
1455 && (GET_MODE (note) == VOIDmode
1456 ? SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)))
1457 : GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) == GET_MODE (note)))
1459 /* Temporarily replace the set's source with the
1460 contents of the REG_EQUAL note. The insn will
1461 be deleted or recognized by try_combine. */
1462 rtx orig = SET_SRC (set);
1463 SET_SRC (set) = note;
1464 i2mod = temp;
1465 i2mod_old_rhs = copy_rtx (orig);
1466 i2mod_new_rhs = copy_rtx (note);
1467 next = try_combine (insn, i2mod, NULL, NULL,
1468 &new_direct_jump_p,
1469 last_combined_insn);
1470 i2mod = NULL;
1471 if (next)
1473 statistics_counter_event (cfun, "insn-with-note combine", 1);
1474 goto retry;
1476 SET_SRC (set) = orig;
1480 if (!NOTE_P (insn))
1481 record_dead_and_set_regs (insn);
1483 retry:
1488 default_rtl_profile ();
1489 clear_bb_flags ();
1490 new_direct_jump_p |= purge_all_dead_edges ();
1491 delete_noop_moves ();
1493 /* Clean up. */
1494 obstack_free (&insn_link_obstack, NULL);
1495 free (uid_log_links);
1496 free (uid_insn_cost);
1497 reg_stat.release ();
1500 struct undo *undo, *next;
1501 for (undo = undobuf.frees; undo; undo = next)
1503 next = undo->next;
1504 free (undo);
1506 undobuf.frees = 0;
1509 total_attempts += combine_attempts;
1510 total_merges += combine_merges;
1511 total_extras += combine_extras;
1512 total_successes += combine_successes;
1514 nonzero_sign_valid = 0;
1515 rtl_hooks = general_rtl_hooks;
1517 /* Make recognizer allow volatile MEMs again. */
1518 init_recog ();
1520 return new_direct_jump_p;
1523 /* Wipe the last_xxx fields of reg_stat in preparation for another pass. */
1525 static void
1526 init_reg_last (void)
1528 unsigned int i;
1529 reg_stat_type *p;
1531 FOR_EACH_VEC_ELT (reg_stat, i, p)
1532 memset (p, 0, offsetof (reg_stat_type, sign_bit_copies));
1535 /* Set up any promoted values for incoming argument registers. */
1537 static void
1538 setup_incoming_promotions (rtx_insn *first)
1540 tree arg;
1541 bool strictly_local = false;
1543 for (arg = DECL_ARGUMENTS (current_function_decl); arg;
1544 arg = DECL_CHAIN (arg))
1546 rtx x, reg = DECL_INCOMING_RTL (arg);
1547 int uns1, uns3;
1548 machine_mode mode1, mode2, mode3, mode4;
1550 /* Only continue if the incoming argument is in a register. */
1551 if (!REG_P (reg))
1552 continue;
1554 /* Determine, if possible, whether all call sites of the current
1555 function lie within the current compilation unit. (This does
1556 take into account the exporting of a function via taking its
1557 address, and so forth.) */
1558 strictly_local = cgraph_node::local_info (current_function_decl)->local;
1560 /* The mode and signedness of the argument before any promotions happen
1561 (equal to the mode of the pseudo holding it at that stage). */
1562 mode1 = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1563 uns1 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (arg));
1565 /* The mode and signedness of the argument after any source language and
1566 TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES-driven promotions. */
1567 mode2 = TYPE_MODE (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1568 uns3 = TYPE_UNSIGNED (DECL_ARG_TYPE (arg));
1570 /* The mode and signedness of the argument as it is actually passed,
1571 see assign_parm_setup_reg in function.c. */
1572 mode3 = promote_function_mode (TREE_TYPE (arg), mode1, &uns3,
1573 TREE_TYPE (cfun->decl), 0);
1575 /* The mode of the register in which the argument is being passed. */
1576 mode4 = GET_MODE (reg);
1578 /* Eliminate sign extensions in the callee when:
1579 (a) A mode promotion has occurred; */
1580 if (mode1 == mode3)
1581 continue;
1582 /* (b) The mode of the register is the same as the mode of
1583 the argument as it is passed; */
1584 if (mode3 != mode4)
1585 continue;
1586 /* (c) There's no language level extension; */
1587 if (mode1 == mode2)
1589 /* (c.1) All callers are from the current compilation unit. If that's
1590 the case we don't have to rely on an ABI, we only have to know
1591 what we're generating right now, and we know that we will do the
1592 mode1 to mode2 promotion with the given sign. */
1593 else if (!strictly_local)
1594 continue;
1595 /* (c.2) The combination of the two promotions is useful. This is
1596 true when the signs match, or if the first promotion is unsigned.
1597 In the later case, (sign_extend (zero_extend x)) is the same as
1598 (zero_extend (zero_extend x)), so make sure to force UNS3 true. */
1599 else if (uns1)
1600 uns3 = true;
1601 else if (uns3)
1602 continue;
1604 /* Record that the value was promoted from mode1 to mode3,
1605 so that any sign extension at the head of the current
1606 function may be eliminated. */
1607 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode1, const0_rtx);
1608 x = gen_rtx_fmt_e ((uns3 ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND), mode3, x);
1609 record_value_for_reg (reg, first, x);
1613 /* If MODE has a precision lower than PREC and SRC is a non-negative constant
1614 that would appear negative in MODE, sign-extend SRC for use in nonzero_bits
1615 because some machines (maybe most) will actually do the sign-extension and
1616 this is the conservative approach.
1618 ??? For 2.5, try to tighten up the MD files in this regard instead of this
1619 kludge. */
1621 static rtx
1622 sign_extend_short_imm (rtx src, machine_mode mode, unsigned int prec)
1624 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < prec
1625 && CONST_INT_P (src)
1626 && INTVAL (src) > 0
1627 && val_signbit_known_set_p (mode, INTVAL (src)))
1628 src = GEN_INT (INTVAL (src) | ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode));
1630 return src;
1633 /* Update RSP for pseudo-register X from INSN's REG_EQUAL note (if one exists)
1634 and SET. */
1636 static void
1637 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (reg_stat_type *rsp, rtx_insn *insn, const_rtx set,
1638 rtx x)
1640 rtx reg_equal_note = insn ? find_reg_equal_equiv_note (insn) : NULL_RTX;
1641 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT bits = 0;
1642 rtx reg_equal = NULL, src = SET_SRC (set);
1643 unsigned int num = 0;
1645 if (reg_equal_note)
1646 reg_equal = XEXP (reg_equal_note, 0);
1648 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND)
1650 src = sign_extend_short_imm (src, GET_MODE (x), BITS_PER_WORD);
1651 if (reg_equal)
1652 reg_equal = sign_extend_short_imm (reg_equal, GET_MODE (x), BITS_PER_WORD);
1655 /* Don't call nonzero_bits if it cannot change anything. */
1656 if (rsp->nonzero_bits != ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0)
1658 bits = nonzero_bits (src, nonzero_bits_mode);
1659 if (reg_equal && bits)
1660 bits &= nonzero_bits (reg_equal, nonzero_bits_mode);
1661 rsp->nonzero_bits |= bits;
1664 /* Don't call num_sign_bit_copies if it cannot change anything. */
1665 if (rsp->sign_bit_copies != 1)
1667 num = num_sign_bit_copies (SET_SRC (set), GET_MODE (x));
1668 if (reg_equal && num != GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
1670 unsigned int numeq = num_sign_bit_copies (reg_equal, GET_MODE (x));
1671 if (num == 0 || numeq > num)
1672 num = numeq;
1674 if (rsp->sign_bit_copies == 0 || num < rsp->sign_bit_copies)
1675 rsp->sign_bit_copies = num;
1679 /* Called via note_stores. If X is a pseudo that is narrower than
1680 HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT and is being set, record what bits are known zero.
1682 If we are setting only a portion of X and we can't figure out what
1683 portion, assume all bits will be used since we don't know what will
1684 be happening.
1686 Similarly, set how many bits of X are known to be copies of the sign bit
1687 at all locations in the function. This is the smallest number implied
1688 by any set of X. */
1690 static void
1691 set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
1693 rtx_insn *insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
1695 if (REG_P (x)
1696 && REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1697 /* If this register is undefined at the start of the file, we can't
1698 say what its contents were. */
1699 && ! REGNO_REG_SET_P
1700 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), REGNO (x))
1701 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
1703 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
1705 if (set == 0 || GET_CODE (set) == CLOBBER)
1707 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1708 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1709 return;
1712 /* If this register is being initialized using itself, and the
1713 register is uninitialized in this basic block, and there are
1714 no LOG_LINKS which set the register, then part of the
1715 register is uninitialized. In that case we can't assume
1716 anything about the number of nonzero bits.
1718 ??? We could do better if we checked this in
1719 reg_{nonzero_bits,num_sign_bit_copies}_for_combine. Then we
1720 could avoid making assumptions about the insn which initially
1721 sets the register, while still using the information in other
1722 insns. We would have to be careful to check every insn
1723 involved in the combination. */
1725 if (insn
1726 && reg_referenced_p (x, PATTERN (insn))
1727 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P (DF_LR_IN (BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn)),
1728 REGNO (x)))
1730 struct insn_link *link;
1732 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
1733 if (dead_or_set_p (link->insn, x))
1734 break;
1735 if (!link)
1737 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1738 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1739 return;
1743 /* If this is a complex assignment, see if we can convert it into a
1744 simple assignment. */
1745 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1747 /* If this is a simple assignment, or we have a paradoxical SUBREG,
1748 set what we know about X. */
1750 if (SET_DEST (set) == x
1751 || (paradoxical_subreg_p (SET_DEST (set))
1752 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set)) == x))
1753 update_rsp_from_reg_equal (rsp, insn, set, x);
1754 else
1756 rsp->nonzero_bits = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
1757 rsp->sign_bit_copies = 1;
1762 /* See if INSN can be combined into I3. PRED, PRED2, SUCC and SUCC2 are
1763 optionally insns that were previously combined into I3 or that will be
1764 combined into the merger of INSN and I3. The order is PRED, PRED2,
1765 INSN, SUCC, SUCC2, I3.
1767 Return 0 if the combination is not allowed for any reason.
1769 If the combination is allowed, *PDEST will be set to the single
1770 destination of INSN and *PSRC to the single source, and this function
1771 will return 1. */
1773 static int
1774 can_combine_p (rtx_insn *insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *pred ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1775 rtx_insn *pred2 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, rtx_insn *succ, rtx_insn *succ2,
1776 rtx *pdest, rtx *psrc)
1778 int i;
1779 const_rtx set = 0;
1780 rtx src, dest;
1781 rtx_insn *p;
1782 rtx link;
1783 bool all_adjacent = true;
1784 int (*is_volatile_p) (const_rtx);
1786 if (succ)
1788 if (succ2)
1790 if (next_active_insn (succ2) != i3)
1791 all_adjacent = false;
1792 if (next_active_insn (succ) != succ2)
1793 all_adjacent = false;
1795 else if (next_active_insn (succ) != i3)
1796 all_adjacent = false;
1797 if (next_active_insn (insn) != succ)
1798 all_adjacent = false;
1800 else if (next_active_insn (insn) != i3)
1801 all_adjacent = false;
1803 /* Can combine only if previous insn is a SET of a REG, a SUBREG or CC0.
1804 or a PARALLEL consisting of such a SET and CLOBBERs.
1806 If INSN has CLOBBER parallel parts, ignore them for our processing.
1807 By definition, these happen during the execution of the insn. When it
1808 is merged with another insn, all bets are off. If they are, in fact,
1809 needed and aren't also supplied in I3, they may be added by
1810 recog_for_combine. Otherwise, it won't match.
1812 We can also ignore a SET whose SET_DEST is mentioned in a REG_UNUSED
1813 note.
1815 Get the source and destination of INSN. If more than one, can't
1816 combine. */
1818 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == SET)
1819 set = PATTERN (insn);
1820 else if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (insn)) == PARALLEL
1821 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, 0)) == SET)
1823 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (insn), 0); i++)
1825 rtx elt = XVECEXP (PATTERN (insn), 0, i);
1827 switch (GET_CODE (elt))
1829 /* This is important to combine floating point insns
1830 for the SH4 port. */
1831 case USE:
1832 /* Combining an isolated USE doesn't make sense.
1833 We depend here on combinable_i3pat to reject them. */
1834 /* The code below this loop only verifies that the inputs of
1835 the SET in INSN do not change. We call reg_set_between_p
1836 to verify that the REG in the USE does not change between
1837 I3 and INSN.
1838 If the USE in INSN was for a pseudo register, the matching
1839 insn pattern will likely match any register; combining this
1840 with any other USE would only be safe if we knew that the
1841 used registers have identical values, or if there was
1842 something to tell them apart, e.g. different modes. For
1843 now, we forgo such complicated tests and simply disallow
1844 combining of USES of pseudo registers with any other USE. */
1845 if (REG_P (XEXP (elt, 0))
1846 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
1848 rtx i3pat = PATTERN (i3);
1849 int i = XVECLEN (i3pat, 0) - 1;
1850 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (elt, 0));
1854 rtx i3elt = XVECEXP (i3pat, 0, i);
1856 if (GET_CODE (i3elt) == USE
1857 && REG_P (XEXP (i3elt, 0))
1858 && (REGNO (XEXP (i3elt, 0)) == regno
1859 ? reg_set_between_p (XEXP (elt, 0),
1860 PREV_INSN (insn), i3)
1861 : regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
1862 return 0;
1864 while (--i >= 0);
1866 break;
1868 /* We can ignore CLOBBERs. */
1869 case CLOBBER:
1870 break;
1872 case SET:
1873 /* Ignore SETs whose result isn't used but not those that
1874 have side-effects. */
1875 if (find_reg_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (elt))
1876 && insn_nothrow_p (insn)
1877 && !side_effects_p (elt))
1878 break;
1880 /* If we have already found a SET, this is a second one and
1881 so we cannot combine with this insn. */
1882 if (set)
1883 return 0;
1885 set = elt;
1886 break;
1888 default:
1889 /* Anything else means we can't combine. */
1890 return 0;
1894 if (set == 0
1895 /* If SET_SRC is an ASM_OPERANDS we can't throw away these CLOBBERs,
1896 so don't do anything with it. */
1897 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set)) == ASM_OPERANDS)
1898 return 0;
1900 else
1901 return 0;
1903 if (set == 0)
1904 return 0;
1906 /* The simplification in expand_field_assignment may call back to
1907 get_last_value, so set safe guard here. */
1908 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
1910 set = expand_field_assignment (set);
1911 src = SET_SRC (set), dest = SET_DEST (set);
1913 /* Do not eliminate user-specified register if it is in an
1914 asm input because we may break the register asm usage defined
1915 in GCC manual if allow to do so.
1916 Be aware that this may cover more cases than we expect but this
1917 should be harmless. */
1918 if (REG_P (dest) && REG_USERVAR_P (dest) && HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
1919 && extract_asm_operands (PATTERN (i3)))
1920 return 0;
1922 /* Don't eliminate a store in the stack pointer. */
1923 if (dest == stack_pointer_rtx
1924 /* Don't combine with an insn that sets a register to itself if it has
1925 a REG_EQUAL note. This may be part of a LIBCALL sequence. */
1926 || (rtx_equal_p (src, dest) && find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
1927 /* Can't merge an ASM_OPERANDS. */
1928 || GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
1929 /* Can't merge a function call. */
1930 || GET_CODE (src) == CALL
1931 /* Don't eliminate a function call argument. */
1932 || (CALL_P (i3)
1933 && (find_reg_fusage (i3, USE, dest)
1934 || (REG_P (dest)
1935 && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1936 && global_regs[REGNO (dest)])))
1937 /* Don't substitute into an incremented register. */
1938 || FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i3, dest)
1939 || (succ && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ, dest))
1940 || (succ2 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (succ2, dest))
1941 /* Don't substitute into a non-local goto, this confuses CFG. */
1942 || (JUMP_P (i3) && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO, NULL_RTX))
1943 /* Make sure that DEST is not used after SUCC but before I3. */
1944 || (!all_adjacent
1945 && ((succ2
1946 && (reg_used_between_p (dest, succ2, i3)
1947 || reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, succ2)))
1948 || (!succ2 && succ && reg_used_between_p (dest, succ, i3))))
1949 /* Make sure that the value that is to be substituted for the register
1950 does not use any registers whose values alter in between. However,
1951 If the insns are adjacent, a use can't cross a set even though we
1952 think it might (this can happen for a sequence of insns each setting
1953 the same destination; last_set of that register might point to
1954 a NOTE). If INSN has a REG_EQUIV note, the register is always
1955 equivalent to the memory so the substitution is valid even if there
1956 are intervening stores. Also, don't move a volatile asm or
1957 UNSPEC_VOLATILE across any other insns. */
1958 || (! all_adjacent
1959 && (((!MEM_P (src)
1960 || ! find_reg_note (insn, REG_EQUIV, src))
1961 && use_crosses_set_p (src, DF_INSN_LUID (insn)))
1962 || (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS && MEM_VOLATILE_P (src))
1963 || GET_CODE (src) == UNSPEC_VOLATILE))
1964 /* Don't combine across a CALL_INSN, because that would possibly
1965 change whether the life span of some REGs crosses calls or not,
1966 and it is a pain to update that information.
1967 Exception: if source is a constant, moving it later can't hurt.
1968 Accept that as a special case. */
1969 || (DF_INSN_LUID (insn) < last_call_luid && ! CONSTANT_P (src)))
1970 return 0;
1972 /* DEST must either be a REG or CC0. */
1973 if (REG_P (dest))
1975 /* If register alignment is being enforced for multi-word items in all
1976 cases except for parameters, it is possible to have a register copy
1977 insn referencing a hard register that is not allowed to contain the
1978 mode being copied and which would not be valid as an operand of most
1979 insns. Eliminate this problem by not combining with such an insn.
1981 Also, on some machines we don't want to extend the life of a hard
1982 register. */
1984 if (REG_P (src)
1985 && ((REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1986 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (dest), GET_MODE (dest)))
1987 /* Don't extend the life of a hard register unless it is
1988 user variable (if we have few registers) or it can't
1989 fit into the desired register (meaning something special
1990 is going on).
1991 Also avoid substituting a return register into I3, because
1992 reload can't handle a conflict with constraints of other
1993 inputs. */
1994 || (REGNO (src) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1995 && ! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (src), GET_MODE (src)))))
1996 return 0;
1998 else if (GET_CODE (dest) != CC0)
1999 return 0;
2002 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == PARALLEL)
2003 for (i = XVECLEN (PATTERN (i3), 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
2004 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2006 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i3), 0, i), 0);
2008 /* If the clobber represents an earlyclobber operand, we must not
2009 substitute an expression containing the clobbered register.
2010 As we do not analyze the constraint strings here, we have to
2011 make the conservative assumption. However, if the register is
2012 a fixed hard reg, the clobber cannot represent any operand;
2013 we leave it up to the machine description to either accept or
2014 reject use-and-clobber patterns. */
2015 if (!REG_P (reg)
2016 || REGNO (reg) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2017 || !fixed_regs[REGNO (reg)])
2018 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, src))
2019 return 0;
2022 /* If INSN contains anything volatile, or is an `asm' (whether volatile
2023 or not), reject, unless nothing volatile comes between it and I3 */
2025 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS || volatile_refs_p (src))
2027 /* Make sure neither succ nor succ2 contains a volatile reference. */
2028 if (succ2 != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ2)))
2029 return 0;
2030 if (succ != 0 && volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (succ)))
2031 return 0;
2032 /* We'll check insns between INSN and I3 below. */
2035 /* If INSN is an asm, and DEST is a hard register, reject, since it has
2036 to be an explicit register variable, and was chosen for a reason. */
2038 if (GET_CODE (src) == ASM_OPERANDS
2039 && REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2040 return 0;
2042 /* If INSN contains volatile references (specifically volatile MEMs),
2043 we cannot combine across any other volatile references.
2044 Even if INSN doesn't contain volatile references, any intervening
2045 volatile insn might affect machine state. */
2047 is_volatile_p = volatile_refs_p (PATTERN (insn))
2048 ? volatile_refs_p
2049 : volatile_insn_p;
2051 for (p = NEXT_INSN (insn); p != i3; p = NEXT_INSN (p))
2052 if (INSN_P (p) && p != succ && p != succ2 && is_volatile_p (PATTERN (p)))
2053 return 0;
2055 /* If INSN contains an autoincrement or autodecrement, make sure that
2056 register is not used between there and I3, and not already used in
2057 I3 either. Neither must it be used in PRED or SUCC, if they exist.
2058 Also insist that I3 not be a jump; if it were one
2059 and the incremented register were spilled, we would lose. */
2061 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
2062 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
2063 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
2064 && (JUMP_P (i3)
2065 || reg_used_between_p (XEXP (link, 0), insn, i3)
2066 || (pred != NULL_RTX
2067 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred)))
2068 || (pred2 != NULL_RTX
2069 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (pred2)))
2070 || (succ != NULL_RTX
2071 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ)))
2072 || (succ2 != NULL_RTX
2073 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (succ2)))
2074 || reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i3))))
2075 return 0;
2077 /* Don't combine an insn that follows a CC0-setting insn.
2078 An insn that uses CC0 must not be separated from the one that sets it.
2079 We do, however, allow I2 to follow a CC0-setting insn if that insn
2080 is passed as I1; in that case it will be deleted also.
2081 We also allow combining in this case if all the insns are adjacent
2082 because that would leave the two CC0 insns adjacent as well.
2083 It would be more logical to test whether CC0 occurs inside I1 or I2,
2084 but that would be much slower, and this ought to be equivalent. */
2086 if (HAVE_cc0)
2088 p = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
2089 if (p && p != pred && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (p))
2090 && ! all_adjacent)
2091 return 0;
2094 /* If we get here, we have passed all the tests and the combination is
2095 to be allowed. */
2097 *pdest = dest;
2098 *psrc = src;
2100 return 1;
2103 /* LOC is the location within I3 that contains its pattern or the component
2104 of a PARALLEL of the pattern. We validate that it is valid for combining.
2106 One problem is if I3 modifies its output, as opposed to replacing it
2107 entirely, we can't allow the output to contain I2DEST, I1DEST or I0DEST as
2108 doing so would produce an insn that is not equivalent to the original insns.
2110 Consider:
2112 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))
2113 (set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 101) 0) <foo>)
2115 This is NOT equivalent to:
2117 (parallel [(set (subreg:SI (reg:DI 100) 0) <foo>)
2118 (set (reg:DI 101) (reg:DI 100))])
2120 Not only does this modify 100 (in which case it might still be valid
2121 if 100 were dead in I2), it sets 101 to the ORIGINAL value of 100.
2123 We can also run into a problem if I2 sets a register that I1
2124 uses and I1 gets directly substituted into I3 (not via I2). In that
2125 case, we would be getting the wrong value of I2DEST into I3, so we
2126 must reject the combination. This case occurs when I2 and I1 both
2127 feed into I3, rather than when I1 feeds into I2, which feeds into I3.
2128 If I1_NOT_IN_SRC is nonzero, it means that finding I1 in the source
2129 of a SET must prevent combination from occurring. The same situation
2130 can occur for I0, in which case I0_NOT_IN_SRC is set.
2132 Before doing the above check, we first try to expand a field assignment
2133 into a set of logical operations.
2135 If PI3_DEST_KILLED is nonzero, it is a pointer to a location in which
2136 we place a register that is both set and used within I3. If more than one
2137 such register is detected, we fail.
2139 Return 1 if the combination is valid, zero otherwise. */
2141 static int
2142 combinable_i3pat (rtx_insn *i3, rtx *loc, rtx i2dest, rtx i1dest, rtx i0dest,
2143 int i1_not_in_src, int i0_not_in_src, rtx *pi3dest_killed)
2145 rtx x = *loc;
2147 if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
2149 rtx set = x ;
2150 rtx dest = SET_DEST (set);
2151 rtx src = SET_SRC (set);
2152 rtx inner_dest = dest;
2153 rtx subdest;
2155 while (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2156 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
2157 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2158 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0);
2160 /* Check for the case where I3 modifies its output, as discussed
2161 above. We don't want to prevent pseudos from being combined
2162 into the address of a MEM, so only prevent the combination if
2163 i1 or i2 set the same MEM. */
2164 if ((inner_dest != dest &&
2165 (!MEM_P (inner_dest)
2166 || rtx_equal_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2167 || (i1dest && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2168 || (i0dest && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, inner_dest)))
2169 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, inner_dest)
2170 || (i1dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, inner_dest))
2171 || (i0dest && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, inner_dest))))
2173 /* This is the same test done in can_combine_p except we can't test
2174 all_adjacent; we don't have to, since this instruction will stay
2175 in place, thus we are not considering increasing the lifetime of
2176 INNER_DEST.
2178 Also, if this insn sets a function argument, combining it with
2179 something that might need a spill could clobber a previous
2180 function argument; the all_adjacent test in can_combine_p also
2181 checks this; here, we do a more specific test for this case. */
2183 || (REG_P (inner_dest)
2184 && REGNO (inner_dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2185 && (! HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (REGNO (inner_dest),
2186 GET_MODE (inner_dest))))
2187 || (i1_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, src))
2188 || (i0_not_in_src && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, src)))
2189 return 0;
2191 /* If DEST is used in I3, it is being killed in this insn, so
2192 record that for later. We have to consider paradoxical
2193 subregs here, since they kill the whole register, but we
2194 ignore partial subregs, STRICT_LOW_PART, etc.
2195 Never add REG_DEAD notes for the FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM or the
2196 STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, since these are always considered to be
2197 live. Similarly for ARG_POINTER_REGNUM if it is fixed. */
2198 subdest = dest;
2199 if (GET_CODE (subdest) == SUBREG
2200 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (subdest))
2201 >= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subdest)))))
2202 subdest = SUBREG_REG (subdest);
2203 if (pi3dest_killed
2204 && REG_P (subdest)
2205 && reg_referenced_p (subdest, PATTERN (i3))
2206 && REGNO (subdest) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2207 && (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
2208 || REGNO (subdest) != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
2209 && (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2210 || (REGNO (subdest) != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2211 || ! fixed_regs [REGNO (subdest)]))
2212 && REGNO (subdest) != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
2214 if (*pi3dest_killed)
2215 return 0;
2217 *pi3dest_killed = subdest;
2221 else if (GET_CODE (x) == PARALLEL)
2223 int i;
2225 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (x, 0); i++)
2226 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &XVECEXP (x, 0, i), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
2227 i1_not_in_src, i0_not_in_src, pi3dest_killed))
2228 return 0;
2231 return 1;
2234 /* Return 1 if X is an arithmetic expression that contains a multiplication
2235 and division. We don't count multiplications by powers of two here. */
2237 static int
2238 contains_muldiv (rtx x)
2240 switch (GET_CODE (x))
2242 case MOD: case DIV: case UMOD: case UDIV:
2243 return 1;
2245 case MULT:
2246 return ! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
2247 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))) >= 0);
2248 default:
2249 if (BINARY_P (x))
2250 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0))
2251 || contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 1));
2253 if (UNARY_P (x))
2254 return contains_muldiv (XEXP (x, 0));
2256 return 0;
2260 /* Determine whether INSN can be used in a combination. Return nonzero if
2261 not. This is used in try_combine to detect early some cases where we
2262 can't perform combinations. */
2264 static int
2265 cant_combine_insn_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2267 rtx set;
2268 rtx src, dest;
2270 /* If this isn't really an insn, we can't do anything.
2271 This can occur when flow deletes an insn that it has merged into an
2272 auto-increment address. */
2273 if (! INSN_P (insn))
2274 return 1;
2276 /* Never combine loads and stores involving hard regs that are likely
2277 to be spilled. The register allocator can usually handle such
2278 reg-reg moves by tying. If we allow the combiner to make
2279 substitutions of likely-spilled regs, reload might die.
2280 As an exception, we allow combinations involving fixed regs; these are
2281 not available to the register allocator so there's no risk involved. */
2283 set = single_set (insn);
2284 if (! set)
2285 return 0;
2286 src = SET_SRC (set);
2287 dest = SET_DEST (set);
2288 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG)
2289 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
2290 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
2291 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
2292 if (REG_P (src) && REG_P (dest)
2293 && ((HARD_REGISTER_P (src)
2294 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (src))
2295 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (src))))
2296 || (HARD_REGISTER_P (dest)
2297 && ! TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (fixed_reg_set, REGNO (dest))
2298 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (REGNO (dest))))))
2299 return 1;
2301 return 0;
2304 struct likely_spilled_retval_info
2306 unsigned regno, nregs;
2307 unsigned mask;
2310 /* Called via note_stores by likely_spilled_retval_p. Remove from info->mask
2311 hard registers that are known to be written to / clobbered in full. */
2312 static void
2313 likely_spilled_retval_1 (rtx x, const_rtx set, void *data)
2315 struct likely_spilled_retval_info *const info =
2316 (struct likely_spilled_retval_info *) data;
2317 unsigned regno, nregs;
2318 unsigned new_mask;
2320 if (!REG_P (XEXP (set, 0)))
2321 return;
2322 regno = REGNO (x);
2323 if (regno >= info->regno + info->nregs)
2324 return;
2325 nregs = REG_NREGS (x);
2326 if (regno + nregs <= info->regno)
2327 return;
2328 new_mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2329 if (regno < info->regno)
2330 new_mask >>= info->regno - regno;
2331 else
2332 new_mask <<= regno - info->regno;
2333 info->mask &= ~new_mask;
2336 /* Return nonzero iff part of the return value is live during INSN, and
2337 it is likely spilled. This can happen when more than one insn is needed
2338 to copy the return value, e.g. when we consider to combine into the
2339 second copy insn for a complex value. */
2341 static int
2342 likely_spilled_retval_p (rtx_insn *insn)
2344 rtx_insn *use = BB_END (this_basic_block);
2345 rtx reg;
2346 rtx_insn *p;
2347 unsigned regno, nregs;
2348 /* We assume here that no machine mode needs more than
2349 32 hard registers when the value overlaps with a register
2350 for which TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P is true. */
2351 unsigned mask;
2352 struct likely_spilled_retval_info info;
2354 if (!NONJUMP_INSN_P (use) || GET_CODE (PATTERN (use)) != USE || insn == use)
2355 return 0;
2356 reg = XEXP (PATTERN (use), 0);
2357 if (!REG_P (reg) || !targetm.calls.function_value_regno_p (REGNO (reg)))
2358 return 0;
2359 regno = REGNO (reg);
2360 nregs = REG_NREGS (reg);
2361 if (nregs == 1)
2362 return 0;
2363 mask = (2U << (nregs - 1)) - 1;
2365 /* Disregard parts of the return value that are set later. */
2366 info.regno = regno;
2367 info.nregs = nregs;
2368 info.mask = mask;
2369 for (p = PREV_INSN (use); info.mask && p != insn; p = PREV_INSN (p))
2370 if (INSN_P (p))
2371 note_stores (PATTERN (p), likely_spilled_retval_1, &info);
2372 mask = info.mask;
2374 /* Check if any of the (probably) live return value registers is
2375 likely spilled. */
2376 nregs --;
2379 if ((mask & 1 << nregs)
2380 && targetm.class_likely_spilled_p (REGNO_REG_CLASS (regno + nregs)))
2381 return 1;
2382 } while (nregs--);
2383 return 0;
2386 /* Adjust INSN after we made a change to its destination.
2388 Changing the destination can invalidate notes that say something about
2389 the results of the insn and a LOG_LINK pointing to the insn. */
2391 static void
2392 adjust_for_new_dest (rtx_insn *insn)
2394 /* For notes, be conservative and simply remove them. */
2395 remove_reg_equal_equiv_notes (insn);
2397 /* The new insn will have a destination that was previously the destination
2398 of an insn just above it. Call distribute_links to make a LOG_LINK from
2399 the next use of that destination. */
2401 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2402 gcc_assert (set);
2404 rtx reg = SET_DEST (set);
2406 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
2407 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2408 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
2409 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
2410 gcc_assert (REG_P (reg));
2412 distribute_links (alloc_insn_link (insn, REGNO (reg), NULL));
2414 df_insn_rescan (insn);
2417 /* Return TRUE if combine can reuse reg X in mode MODE.
2418 ADDED_SETS is nonzero if the original set is still required. */
2419 static bool
2420 can_change_dest_mode (rtx x, int added_sets, machine_mode mode)
2422 unsigned int regno;
2424 if (!REG_P (x))
2425 return false;
2427 regno = REGNO (x);
2428 /* Allow hard registers if the new mode is legal, and occupies no more
2429 registers than the old mode. */
2430 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
2431 return (HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (regno, mode)
2432 && REG_NREGS (x) >= hard_regno_nregs[regno][mode]);
2434 /* Or a pseudo that is only used once. */
2435 return (regno < reg_n_sets_max
2436 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
2437 && !added_sets
2438 && !REG_USERVAR_P (x));
2442 /* Check whether X, the destination of a set, refers to part of
2443 the register specified by REG. */
2445 static bool
2446 reg_subword_p (rtx x, rtx reg)
2448 /* Check that reg is an integer mode register. */
2449 if (!REG_P (reg) || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (reg)) != MODE_INT)
2450 return false;
2452 if (GET_CODE (x) == STRICT_LOW_PART
2453 || GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2454 x = XEXP (x, 0);
2456 return GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
2457 && SUBREG_REG (x) == reg
2458 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT;
2461 /* Delete the unconditional jump INSN and adjust the CFG correspondingly.
2462 Note that the INSN should be deleted *after* removing dead edges, so
2463 that the kept edge is the fallthrough edge for a (set (pc) (pc))
2464 but not for a (set (pc) (label_ref FOO)). */
2466 static void
2467 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (rtx_insn *insn)
2469 basic_block bb = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
2470 gcc_assert (BB_END (bb) == insn);
2472 purge_dead_edges (bb);
2474 delete_insn (insn);
2475 if (EDGE_COUNT (bb->succs) == 1)
2477 rtx_insn *insn;
2479 single_succ_edge (bb)->flags |= EDGE_FALLTHRU;
2481 /* Remove barriers from the footer if there are any. */
2482 for (insn = BB_FOOTER (bb); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
2483 if (BARRIER_P (insn))
2485 if (PREV_INSN (insn))
2486 SET_NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn)) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2487 else
2488 BB_FOOTER (bb) = NEXT_INSN (insn);
2489 if (NEXT_INSN (insn))
2490 SET_PREV_INSN (NEXT_INSN (insn)) = PREV_INSN (insn);
2492 else if (LABEL_P (insn))
2493 break;
2497 /* Return whether PAT is a PARALLEL of exactly N register SETs followed
2498 by an arbitrary number of CLOBBERs. */
2499 static bool
2500 is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx pat, int n)
2502 if (GET_CODE (pat) != PARALLEL)
2503 return false;
2505 int len = XVECLEN (pat, 0);
2506 if (len < n)
2507 return false;
2509 int i;
2510 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2511 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != SET
2512 || !REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2513 return false;
2514 for ( ; i < len; i++)
2515 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER
2516 || XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0) == const0_rtx)
2517 return false;
2519 return true;
2522 /* Return whether INSN, a PARALLEL of N register SETs (and maybe some
2523 CLOBBERs), can be split into individual SETs in that order, without
2524 changing semantics. */
2525 static bool
2526 can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (rtx_insn *insn, int n)
2528 if (!insn_nothrow_p (insn))
2529 return false;
2531 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
2533 int i, j;
2534 for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
2536 if (side_effects_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i))))
2537 return false;
2539 rtx reg = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
2541 for (j = i + 1; j < n; j++)
2542 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, XVECEXP (pat, 0, j)))
2543 return false;
2546 return true;
2549 /* Try to combine the insns I0, I1 and I2 into I3.
2550 Here I0, I1 and I2 appear earlier than I3.
2551 I0 and I1 can be zero; then we combine just I2 into I3, or I1 and I2 into
2554 If we are combining more than two insns and the resulting insn is not
2555 recognized, try splitting it into two insns. If that happens, I2 and I3
2556 are retained and I1/I0 are pseudo-deleted by turning them into a NOTE.
2557 Otherwise, I0, I1 and I2 are pseudo-deleted.
2559 Return 0 if the combination does not work. Then nothing is changed.
2560 If we did the combination, return the insn at which combine should
2561 resume scanning.
2563 Set NEW_DIRECT_JUMP_P to a nonzero value if try_combine creates a
2564 new direct jump instruction.
2566 LAST_COMBINED_INSN is either I3, or some insn after I3 that has
2567 been I3 passed to an earlier try_combine within the same basic
2568 block. */
2570 static rtx_insn *
2571 try_combine (rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2, rtx_insn *i1, rtx_insn *i0,
2572 int *new_direct_jump_p, rtx_insn *last_combined_insn)
2574 /* New patterns for I3 and I2, respectively. */
2575 rtx newpat, newi2pat = 0;
2576 rtvec newpat_vec_with_clobbers = 0;
2577 int substed_i2 = 0, substed_i1 = 0, substed_i0 = 0;
2578 /* Indicates need to preserve SET in I0, I1 or I2 in I3 if it is not
2579 dead. */
2580 int added_sets_0, added_sets_1, added_sets_2;
2581 /* Total number of SETs to put into I3. */
2582 int total_sets;
2583 /* Nonzero if I2's or I1's body now appears in I3. */
2584 int i2_is_used = 0, i1_is_used = 0;
2585 /* INSN_CODEs for new I3, new I2, and user of condition code. */
2586 int insn_code_number, i2_code_number = 0, other_code_number = 0;
2587 /* Contains I3 if the destination of I3 is used in its source, which means
2588 that the old life of I3 is being killed. If that usage is placed into
2589 I2 and not in I3, a REG_DEAD note must be made. */
2590 rtx i3dest_killed = 0;
2591 /* SET_DEST and SET_SRC of I2, I1 and I0. */
2592 rtx i2dest = 0, i2src = 0, i1dest = 0, i1src = 0, i0dest = 0, i0src = 0;
2593 /* Copy of SET_SRC of I1 and I0, if needed. */
2594 rtx i1src_copy = 0, i0src_copy = 0, i0src_copy2 = 0;
2595 /* Set if I2DEST was reused as a scratch register. */
2596 bool i2scratch = false;
2597 /* The PATTERNs of I0, I1, and I2, or a copy of them in certain cases. */
2598 rtx i0pat = 0, i1pat = 0, i2pat = 0;
2599 /* Indicates if I2DEST or I1DEST is in I2SRC or I1_SRC. */
2600 int i2dest_in_i2src = 0, i1dest_in_i1src = 0, i2dest_in_i1src = 0;
2601 int i0dest_in_i0src = 0, i1dest_in_i0src = 0, i2dest_in_i0src = 0;
2602 int i2dest_killed = 0, i1dest_killed = 0, i0dest_killed = 0;
2603 int i1_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i2_n = 0, i0_feeds_i1_n = 0;
2604 /* Notes that must be added to REG_NOTES in I3 and I2. */
2605 rtx new_i3_notes, new_i2_notes;
2606 /* Notes that we substituted I3 into I2 instead of the normal case. */
2607 int i3_subst_into_i2 = 0;
2608 /* Notes that I1, I2 or I3 is a MULT operation. */
2609 int have_mult = 0;
2610 int swap_i2i3 = 0;
2611 int changed_i3_dest = 0;
2613 int maxreg;
2614 rtx_insn *temp_insn;
2615 rtx temp_expr;
2616 struct insn_link *link;
2617 rtx other_pat = 0;
2618 rtx new_other_notes;
2619 int i;
2621 /* Immediately return if any of I0,I1,I2 are the same insn (I3 can
2622 never be). */
2623 if (i1 == i2 || i0 == i2 || (i0 && i0 == i1))
2624 return 0;
2626 /* Only try four-insn combinations when there's high likelihood of
2627 success. Look for simple insns, such as loads of constants or
2628 binary operations involving a constant. */
2629 if (i0)
2631 int i;
2632 int ngood = 0;
2633 int nshift = 0;
2634 rtx set0, set3;
2636 if (!flag_expensive_optimizations)
2637 return 0;
2639 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
2641 rtx_insn *insn = i == 0 ? i0 : i == 1 ? i1 : i == 2 ? i2 : i3;
2642 rtx set = single_set (insn);
2643 rtx src;
2644 if (!set)
2645 continue;
2646 src = SET_SRC (set);
2647 if (CONSTANT_P (src))
2649 ngood += 2;
2650 break;
2652 else if (BINARY_P (src) && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
2653 ngood++;
2654 else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT || GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFTRT
2655 || GET_CODE (src) == LSHIFTRT)
2656 nshift++;
2659 /* If I0 loads a memory and I3 sets the same memory, then I1 and I2
2660 are likely manipulating its value. Ideally we'll be able to combine
2661 all four insns into a bitfield insertion of some kind.
2663 Note the source in I0 might be inside a sign/zero extension and the
2664 memory modes in I0 and I3 might be different. So extract the address
2665 from the destination of I3 and search for it in the source of I0.
2667 In the event that there's a match but the source/dest do not actually
2668 refer to the same memory, the worst that happens is we try some
2669 combinations that we wouldn't have otherwise. */
2670 if ((set0 = single_set (i0))
2671 /* Ensure the source of SET0 is a MEM, possibly buried inside
2672 an extension. */
2673 && (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == MEM
2674 || ((GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
2675 || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (set0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
2676 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (set0), 0)) == MEM))
2677 && (set3 = single_set (i3))
2678 /* Ensure the destination of SET3 is a MEM. */
2679 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set3)) == MEM
2680 /* Would it be better to extract the base address for the MEM
2681 in SET3 and look for that? I don't have cases where it matters
2682 but I could envision such cases. */
2683 && rtx_referenced_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (set3), 0), SET_SRC (set0)))
2684 ngood += 2;
2686 if (ngood < 2 && nshift < 2)
2687 return 0;
2690 /* Exit early if one of the insns involved can't be used for
2691 combinations. */
2692 if (CALL_P (i2)
2693 || (i1 && CALL_P (i1))
2694 || (i0 && CALL_P (i0))
2695 || cant_combine_insn_p (i3)
2696 || cant_combine_insn_p (i2)
2697 || (i1 && cant_combine_insn_p (i1))
2698 || (i0 && cant_combine_insn_p (i0))
2699 || likely_spilled_retval_p (i3))
2700 return 0;
2702 combine_attempts++;
2703 undobuf.other_insn = 0;
2705 /* Reset the hard register usage information. */
2706 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
2708 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
2710 if (i0)
2711 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2712 INSN_UID (i0), INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2713 else if (i1)
2714 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d, %d -> %d:\n",
2715 INSN_UID (i1), INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2716 else
2717 fprintf (dump_file, "\nTrying %d -> %d:\n",
2718 INSN_UID (i2), INSN_UID (i3));
2721 /* If multiple insns feed into one of I2 or I3, they can be in any
2722 order. To simplify the code below, reorder them in sequence. */
2723 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2724 std::swap (i0, i2);
2725 if (i0 && DF_INSN_LUID (i0) > DF_INSN_LUID (i1))
2726 std::swap (i0, i1);
2727 if (i1 && DF_INSN_LUID (i1) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
2728 std::swap (i1, i2);
2730 added_links_insn = 0;
2732 /* First check for one important special case that the code below will
2733 not handle. Namely, the case where I1 is zero, I2 is a PARALLEL
2734 and I3 is a SET whose SET_SRC is a SET_DEST in I2. In that case,
2735 we may be able to replace that destination with the destination of I3.
2736 This occurs in the common code where we compute both a quotient and
2737 remainder into a structure, in which case we want to do the computation
2738 directly into the structure to avoid register-register copies.
2740 Note that this case handles both multiple sets in I2 and also cases
2741 where I2 has a number of CLOBBERs inside the PARALLEL.
2743 We make very conservative checks below and only try to handle the
2744 most common cases of this. For example, we only handle the case
2745 where I2 and I3 are adjacent to avoid making difficult register
2746 usage tests. */
2748 if (i1 == 0 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (i3) && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2749 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2750 && REGNO (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
2751 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2752 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL
2753 && ! side_effects_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2754 /* If the dest of I3 is a ZERO_EXTRACT or STRICT_LOW_PART, the code
2755 below would need to check what is inside (and reg_overlap_mentioned_p
2756 doesn't support those codes anyway). Don't allow those destinations;
2757 the resulting insn isn't likely to be recognized anyway. */
2758 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
2759 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
2760 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)),
2761 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
2762 && next_active_insn (i2) == i3)
2764 rtx p2 = PATTERN (i2);
2766 /* Make sure that the destination of I3,
2767 which we are going to substitute into one output of I2,
2768 is not used within another output of I2. We must avoid making this:
2769 (parallel [(set (mem (reg 69)) ...)
2770 (set (reg 69) ...)])
2771 which is not well-defined as to order of actions.
2772 (Besides, reload can't handle output reloads for this.)
2774 The problem can also happen if the dest of I3 is a memory ref,
2775 if another dest in I2 is an indirect memory ref. */
2776 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2777 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2778 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
2779 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)),
2780 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))))
2781 break;
2783 /* Make sure this PARALLEL is not an asm. We do not allow combining
2784 that usually (see can_combine_p), so do not here either. */
2785 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2786 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2787 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
2788 break;
2790 if (i == XVECLEN (p2, 0))
2791 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (p2, 0); i++)
2792 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET
2793 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)) == SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2795 combine_merges++;
2797 subst_insn = i3;
2798 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2800 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2801 i2src = SET_SRC (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2802 i2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i));
2803 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2805 /* Replace the dest in I2 with our dest and make the resulting
2806 insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we validate
2807 the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2808 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (p2, 0, i)), SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)));
2809 newpat = p2;
2810 i3_subst_into_i2 = 1;
2811 goto validate_replacement;
2815 /* If I2 is setting a pseudo to a constant and I3 is setting some
2816 sub-part of it to another constant, merge them by making a new
2817 constant. */
2818 if (i1 == 0
2819 && (temp_expr = single_set (i2)) != 0
2820 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (temp_expr))
2821 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
2822 && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
2823 && reg_subword_p (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2825 rtx dest = SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3));
2826 int offset = -1;
2827 int width = 0;
2829 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
2831 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
2832 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 2)))
2834 width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
2835 offset = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 2));
2836 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2837 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
2838 offset = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) - width - offset;
2841 else
2843 if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
2844 dest = XEXP (dest, 0);
2845 width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2846 offset = 0;
2849 if (offset >= 0)
2851 /* If this is the low part, we're done. */
2852 if (subreg_lowpart_p (dest))
2854 /* Handle the case where inner is twice the size of outer. */
2855 else if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr)))
2856 == 2 * GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)))
2857 offset += GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest));
2858 /* Otherwise give up for now. */
2859 else
2860 offset = -1;
2863 if (offset >= 0)
2865 rtx inner = SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3));
2866 rtx outer = SET_SRC (temp_expr);
2868 wide_int o
2869 = wi::insert (std::make_pair (outer, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))),
2870 std::make_pair (inner, GET_MODE (dest)),
2871 offset, width);
2873 combine_merges++;
2874 subst_insn = i3;
2875 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
2876 added_sets_2 = added_sets_1 = added_sets_0 = 0;
2877 i2dest = SET_DEST (temp_expr);
2878 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2880 /* Replace the source in I2 with the new constant and make the
2881 resulting insn the new pattern for I3. Then skip to where we
2882 validate the pattern. Everything was set up above. */
2883 SUBST (SET_SRC (temp_expr),
2884 immed_wide_int_const (o, GET_MODE (SET_DEST (temp_expr))));
2886 newpat = PATTERN (i2);
2888 /* The dest of I3 has been replaced with the dest of I2. */
2889 changed_i3_dest = 1;
2890 goto validate_replacement;
2894 /* If we have no I1 and I2 looks like:
2895 (parallel [(set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC OP (const_int 0)))
2896 (set Y OP)])
2897 make up a dummy I1 that is
2898 (set Y OP)
2899 and change I2 to be
2900 (set (reg:CC X) (compare:CC Y (const_int 0)))
2902 (We can ignore any trailing CLOBBERs.)
2904 This undoes a previous combination and allows us to match a branch-and-
2905 decrement insn. */
2907 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i1 == 0
2908 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2909 && (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))))
2910 == MODE_CC)
2911 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0))) == COMPARE
2912 && XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 1) == const0_rtx
2913 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), 0),
2914 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)))
2915 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2916 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2918 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2919 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2920 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2921 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2923 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2924 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2925 -1, NULL_RTX);
2926 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2928 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0));
2929 SUBST (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i2)), 0),
2930 SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2931 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i1)));
2932 SUBST_LINK (LOG_LINKS (i2),
2933 alloc_insn_link (i1, regno, LOG_LINKS (i2)));
2936 /* If I2 is a PARALLEL of two SETs of REGs (and perhaps some CLOBBERs),
2937 make those two SETs separate I1 and I2 insns, and make an I0 that is
2938 the original I1. */
2939 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i0 == 0
2940 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (PATTERN (i2), 2)
2941 && can_split_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (i2, 2)
2942 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0)), i2, i3)
2943 && !reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1)), i2, i3))
2945 /* If there is no I1, there is no I0 either. */
2946 i0 = i1;
2948 /* We make I1 with the same INSN_UID as I2. This gives it
2949 the same DF_INSN_LUID for value tracking. Our fake I1 will
2950 never appear in the insn stream so giving it the same INSN_UID
2951 as I2 will not cause a problem. */
2953 i1 = gen_rtx_INSN (VOIDmode, NULL, i2, BLOCK_FOR_INSN (i2),
2954 XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 0), INSN_LOCATION (i2),
2955 -1, NULL_RTX);
2956 INSN_UID (i1) = INSN_UID (i2);
2958 SUBST (PATTERN (i2), XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, 1));
2961 /* Verify that I2 and I1 are valid for combining. */
2962 if (! can_combine_p (i2, i3, i0, i1, NULL, NULL, &i2dest, &i2src)
2963 || (i1 && ! can_combine_p (i1, i3, i0, NULL, i2, NULL,
2964 &i1dest, &i1src))
2965 || (i0 && ! can_combine_p (i0, i3, NULL, NULL, i1, i2,
2966 &i0dest, &i0src)))
2968 undo_all ();
2969 return 0;
2972 /* Record whether I2DEST is used in I2SRC and similarly for the other
2973 cases. Knowing this will help in register status updating below. */
2974 i2dest_in_i2src = reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i2src);
2975 i1dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i1src);
2976 i2dest_in_i1src = i1 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i1src);
2977 i0dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i0src);
2978 i1dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0src);
2979 i2dest_in_i0src = i0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, i0src);
2980 i2dest_killed = dead_or_set_p (i2, i2dest);
2981 i1dest_killed = i1 && dead_or_set_p (i1, i1dest);
2982 i0dest_killed = i0 && dead_or_set_p (i0, i0dest);
2984 /* For the earlier insns, determine which of the subsequent ones they
2985 feed. */
2986 i1_feeds_i2_n = i1 && insn_a_feeds_b (i1, i2);
2987 i0_feeds_i1_n = i0 && insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i1);
2988 i0_feeds_i2_n = (i0 && (!i0_feeds_i1_n ? insn_a_feeds_b (i0, i2)
2989 : (!reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, i0dest)
2990 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, i2src))));
2992 /* Ensure that I3's pattern can be the destination of combines. */
2993 if (! combinable_i3pat (i3, &PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i1dest, i0dest,
2994 i1 && i2dest_in_i1src && !i1_feeds_i2_n,
2995 i0 && ((i2dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i2_n)
2996 || (i1dest_in_i0src && !i0_feeds_i1_n)),
2997 &i3dest_killed))
2999 undo_all ();
3000 return 0;
3003 /* See if any of the insns is a MULT operation. Unless one is, we will
3004 reject a combination that is, since it must be slower. Be conservative
3005 here. */
3006 if (GET_CODE (i2src) == MULT
3007 || (i1 != 0 && GET_CODE (i1src) == MULT)
3008 || (i0 != 0 && GET_CODE (i0src) == MULT)
3009 || (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3010 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == MULT))
3011 have_mult = 1;
3013 /* If I3 has an inc, then give up if I1 or I2 uses the reg that is inc'd.
3014 We used to do this EXCEPT in one case: I3 has a post-inc in an
3015 output operand. However, that exception can give rise to insns like
3016 mov r3,(r3)+
3017 which is a famous insn on the PDP-11 where the value of r3 used as the
3018 source was model-dependent. Avoid this sort of thing. */
3020 #if 0
3021 if (!(GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3022 && REG_P (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)))
3023 && MEM_P (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)))
3024 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_INC
3025 || GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (PATTERN (i3)), 0)) == POST_DEC)))
3026 /* It's not the exception. */
3027 #endif
3028 if (AUTO_INC_DEC)
3030 rtx link;
3031 for (link = REG_NOTES (i3); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
3032 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC
3033 && (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i2))
3034 || (i1 != 0
3035 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (link, 0), PATTERN (i1)))))
3037 undo_all ();
3038 return 0;
3042 /* See if the SETs in I1 or I2 need to be kept around in the merged
3043 instruction: whenever the value set there is still needed past I3.
3044 For the SET in I2, this is easy: we see if I2DEST dies or is set in I3.
3046 For the SET in I1, we have two cases: if I1 and I2 independently feed
3047 into I3, the set in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies
3048 or is set in I3. Otherwise (if I1 feeds I2 which feeds I3), the set
3049 in I1 needs to be kept around unless I1DEST dies or is set in either
3050 I2 or I3. The same considerations apply to I0. */
3052 added_sets_2 = !dead_or_set_p (i3, i2dest);
3054 if (i1)
3055 added_sets_1 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i1dest)
3056 || (i1_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)));
3057 else
3058 added_sets_1 = 0;
3060 if (i0)
3061 added_sets_0 = !(dead_or_set_p (i3, i0dest)
3062 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest))
3063 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3064 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest)));
3065 else
3066 added_sets_0 = 0;
3068 /* We are about to copy insns for the case where they need to be kept
3069 around. Check that they can be copied in the merged instruction. */
3071 if (targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p
3072 && ((added_sets_2 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i2))
3073 || (i1 && added_sets_1 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i1))
3074 || (i0 && added_sets_0 && targetm.cannot_copy_insn_p (i0))))
3076 undo_all ();
3077 return 0;
3080 /* If the set in I2 needs to be kept around, we must make a copy of
3081 PATTERN (I2), so that when we substitute I1SRC for I1DEST in
3082 PATTERN (I2), we are only substituting for the original I1DEST, not into
3083 an already-substituted copy. This also prevents making self-referential
3084 rtx. If I2 is a PARALLEL, we just need the piece that assigns I2SRC to
3085 I2DEST. */
3087 if (added_sets_2)
3089 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i2)) == PARALLEL)
3090 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (i2dest, copy_rtx (i2src));
3091 else
3092 i2pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i2));
3095 if (added_sets_1)
3097 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i1)) == PARALLEL)
3098 i1pat = gen_rtx_SET (i1dest, copy_rtx (i1src));
3099 else
3100 i1pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i1));
3103 if (added_sets_0)
3105 if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (i0)) == PARALLEL)
3106 i0pat = gen_rtx_SET (i0dest, copy_rtx (i0src));
3107 else
3108 i0pat = copy_rtx (PATTERN (i0));
3111 combine_merges++;
3113 /* Substitute in the latest insn for the regs set by the earlier ones. */
3115 maxreg = max_reg_num ();
3117 subst_insn = i3;
3119 /* Many machines that don't use CC0 have insns that can both perform an
3120 arithmetic operation and set the condition code. These operations will
3121 be represented as a PARALLEL with the first element of the vector
3122 being a COMPARE of an arithmetic operation with the constant zero.
3123 The second element of the vector will set some pseudo to the result
3124 of the same arithmetic operation. If we simplify the COMPARE, we won't
3125 match such a pattern and so will generate an extra insn. Here we test
3126 for this case, where both the comparison and the operation result are
3127 needed, and make the PARALLEL by just replacing I2DEST in I3SRC with
3128 I2SRC. Later we will make the PARALLEL that contains I2. */
3130 if (!HAVE_cc0 && i1 == 0 && added_sets_2 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (i3)) == SET
3131 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3))) == COMPARE
3132 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1))
3133 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 0), i2dest))
3135 rtx newpat_dest;
3136 rtx *cc_use_loc = NULL;
3137 rtx_insn *cc_use_insn = NULL;
3138 rtx op0 = i2src, op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (PATTERN (i3)), 1);
3139 machine_mode compare_mode, orig_compare_mode;
3140 enum rtx_code compare_code = UNKNOWN, orig_compare_code = UNKNOWN;
3142 newpat = PATTERN (i3);
3143 newpat_dest = SET_DEST (newpat);
3144 compare_mode = orig_compare_mode = GET_MODE (newpat_dest);
3146 if (undobuf.other_insn == 0
3147 && (cc_use_loc = find_single_use (SET_DEST (newpat), i3,
3148 &cc_use_insn)))
3150 compare_code = orig_compare_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use_loc);
3151 compare_code = simplify_compare_const (compare_code,
3152 GET_MODE (i2dest), op0, &op1);
3153 target_canonicalize_comparison (&compare_code, &op0, &op1, 1);
3156 /* Do the rest only if op1 is const0_rtx, which may be the
3157 result of simplification. */
3158 if (op1 == const0_rtx)
3160 /* If a single use of the CC is found, prepare to modify it
3161 when SELECT_CC_MODE returns a new CC-class mode, or when
3162 the above simplify_compare_const() returned a new comparison
3163 operator. undobuf.other_insn is assigned the CC use insn
3164 when modifying it. */
3165 if (cc_use_loc)
3167 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
3168 machine_mode new_mode
3169 = SELECT_CC_MODE (compare_code, op0, op1);
3170 if (new_mode != orig_compare_mode
3171 && can_change_dest_mode (SET_DEST (newpat),
3172 added_sets_2, new_mode))
3174 unsigned int regno = REGNO (newpat_dest);
3175 compare_mode = new_mode;
3176 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3177 newpat_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
3178 else
3180 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
3181 newpat_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
3184 #endif
3185 /* Cases for modifying the CC-using comparison. */
3186 if (compare_code != orig_compare_code
3187 /* ??? Do we need to verify the zero rtx? */
3188 && XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 1) == const0_rtx)
3190 /* Replace cc_use_loc with entire new RTX. */
3191 SUBST (*cc_use_loc,
3192 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, compare_mode,
3193 newpat_dest, const0_rtx));
3194 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3196 else if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3198 /* Just replace the CC reg with a new mode. */
3199 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use_loc, 0), newpat_dest);
3200 undobuf.other_insn = cc_use_insn;
3204 /* Now we modify the current newpat:
3205 First, SET_DEST(newpat) is updated if the CC mode has been
3206 altered. For targets without SELECT_CC_MODE, this should be
3207 optimized away. */
3208 if (compare_mode != orig_compare_mode)
3209 SUBST (SET_DEST (newpat), newpat_dest);
3210 /* This is always done to propagate i2src into newpat. */
3211 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3212 gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
3213 /* Create new version of i2pat if needed; the below PARALLEL
3214 creation needs this to work correctly. */
3215 if (! rtx_equal_p (i2src, op0))
3216 i2pat = gen_rtx_SET (i2dest, op0);
3217 i2_is_used = 1;
3221 if (i2_is_used == 0)
3223 /* It is possible that the source of I2 or I1 may be performing
3224 an unneeded operation, such as a ZERO_EXTEND of something
3225 that is known to have the high part zero. Handle that case
3226 by letting subst look at the inner insns.
3228 Another way to do this would be to have a function that tries
3229 to simplify a single insn instead of merging two or more
3230 insns. We don't do this because of the potential of infinite
3231 loops and because of the potential extra memory required.
3232 However, doing it the way we are is a bit of a kludge and
3233 doesn't catch all cases.
3235 But only do this if -fexpensive-optimizations since it slows
3236 things down and doesn't usually win.
3238 This is not done in the COMPARE case above because the
3239 unmodified I2PAT is used in the PARALLEL and so a pattern
3240 with a modified I2SRC would not match. */
3242 if (flag_expensive_optimizations)
3244 /* Pass pc_rtx so no substitutions are done, just
3245 simplifications. */
3246 if (i1)
3248 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3249 i1src = subst (i1src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3252 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3253 i2src = subst (i2src, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
3256 n_occurrences = 0; /* `subst' counts here */
3257 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
3259 /* If I1 feeds into I2 and I1DEST is in I1SRC, we need to make a unique
3260 copy of I2SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3261 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I1SRC for I1DEST
3262 later. Likewise if I0 feeds into I2, either directly or indirectly
3263 through I1, and I0DEST is in I0SRC. */
3264 newpat = subst (PATTERN (i3), i2dest, i2src, 0, 0,
3265 (i1_feeds_i2_n && i1dest_in_i1src)
3266 || ((i0_feeds_i2_n || (i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n))
3267 && i0dest_in_i0src));
3268 substed_i2 = 1;
3270 /* Record whether I2's body now appears within I3's body. */
3271 i2_is_used = n_occurrences;
3274 /* If we already got a failure, don't try to do more. Otherwise, try to
3275 substitute I1 if we have it. */
3277 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3279 /* Check that an autoincrement side-effect on I1 has not been lost.
3280 This happens if I1DEST is mentioned in I2 and dies there, and
3281 has disappeared from the new pattern. */
3282 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3283 && i1_feeds_i2_n
3284 && dead_or_set_p (i2, i1dest)
3285 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i1dest, newpat))
3286 /* Before we can do this substitution, we must redo the test done
3287 above (see detailed comments there) that ensures I1DEST isn't
3288 mentioned in any SETs in NEWPAT that are field assignments. */
3289 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i1dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3290 0, 0, 0))
3292 undo_all ();
3293 return 0;
3296 n_occurrences = 0;
3297 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
3299 /* If the following substitution will modify I1SRC, make a copy of it
3300 for the case where it is substituted for I1DEST in I2PAT later. */
3301 if (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3302 i1src_copy = copy_rtx (i1src);
3304 /* If I0 feeds into I1 and I0DEST is in I0SRC, we need to make a unique
3305 copy of I1SRC each time we substitute it, in order to avoid creating
3306 self-referential RTL when we will be substituting I0SRC for I0DEST
3307 later. */
3308 newpat = subst (newpat, i1dest, i1src, 0, 0,
3309 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3310 substed_i1 = 1;
3312 /* Record whether I1's body now appears within I3's body. */
3313 i1_is_used = n_occurrences;
3316 /* Likewise for I0 if we have it. */
3318 if (i0 && GET_CODE (newpat) != CLOBBER)
3320 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3321 && ((i0_feeds_i2_n && dead_or_set_p (i2, i0dest))
3322 || (i0_feeds_i1_n && dead_or_set_p (i1, i0dest)))
3323 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i0dest, newpat))
3324 || !combinable_i3pat (NULL, &newpat, i0dest, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
3325 0, 0, 0))
3327 undo_all ();
3328 return 0;
3331 /* If the following substitution will modify I0SRC, make a copy of it
3332 for the case where it is substituted for I0DEST in I1PAT later. */
3333 if (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3334 i0src_copy = copy_rtx (i0src);
3335 /* And a copy for I0DEST in I2PAT substitution. */
3336 if (added_sets_2 && ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3337 || (i0_feeds_i2_n)))
3338 i0src_copy2 = copy_rtx (i0src);
3340 n_occurrences = 0;
3341 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
3342 newpat = subst (newpat, i0dest, i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3343 substed_i0 = 1;
3346 /* Fail if an autoincrement side-effect has been duplicated. Be careful
3347 to count all the ways that I2SRC and I1SRC can be used. */
3348 if ((FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i2, NULL_RTX) != 0
3349 && i2_is_used + added_sets_2 > 1)
3350 || (i1 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i1, NULL_RTX) != 0
3351 && (i1_is_used + added_sets_1 + (added_sets_2 && i1_feeds_i2_n)
3352 > 1))
3353 || (i0 != 0 && FIND_REG_INC_NOTE (i0, NULL_RTX) != 0
3354 && (n_occurrences + added_sets_0
3355 + (added_sets_1 && i0_feeds_i1_n)
3356 + (added_sets_2 && i0_feeds_i2_n)
3357 > 1))
3358 /* Fail if we tried to make a new register. */
3359 || max_reg_num () != maxreg
3360 /* Fail if we couldn't do something and have a CLOBBER. */
3361 || GET_CODE (newpat) == CLOBBER
3362 /* Fail if this new pattern is a MULT and we didn't have one before
3363 at the outer level. */
3364 || (GET_CODE (newpat) == SET && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (newpat)) == MULT
3365 && ! have_mult))
3367 undo_all ();
3368 return 0;
3371 /* If the actions of the earlier insns must be kept
3372 in addition to substituting them into the latest one,
3373 we must make a new PARALLEL for the latest insn
3374 to hold additional the SETs. */
3376 if (added_sets_0 || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)
3378 int extra_sets = added_sets_0 + added_sets_1 + added_sets_2;
3379 combine_extras++;
3381 if (GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL)
3383 rtvec old = XVEC (newpat, 0);
3384 total_sets = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) + extra_sets;
3385 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3386 memcpy (XVEC (newpat, 0)->elem, &old->elem[0],
3387 sizeof (old->elem[0]) * old->num_elem);
3389 else
3391 rtx old = newpat;
3392 total_sets = 1 + extra_sets;
3393 newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, rtvec_alloc (total_sets));
3394 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = old;
3397 if (added_sets_0)
3398 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = i0pat;
3400 if (added_sets_1)
3402 rtx t = i1pat;
3403 if (i0_feeds_i1_n)
3404 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy ? i0src_copy : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3406 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3408 if (added_sets_2)
3410 rtx t = i2pat;
3411 if (i1_feeds_i2_n)
3412 t = subst (t, i1dest, i1src_copy ? i1src_copy : i1src, 0, 0,
3413 i0_feeds_i1_n && i0dest_in_i0src);
3414 if ((i0_feeds_i1_n && i1_feeds_i2_n) || i0_feeds_i2_n)
3415 t = subst (t, i0dest, i0src_copy2 ? i0src_copy2 : i0src, 0, 0, 0);
3417 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, --total_sets) = t;
3421 validate_replacement:
3423 /* Note which hard regs this insn has as inputs. */
3424 mark_used_regs_combine (newpat);
3426 /* If recog_for_combine fails, it strips existing clobbers. If we'll
3427 consider splitting this pattern, we might need these clobbers. */
3428 if (i1 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3429 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - 1)) == CLOBBER)
3431 int len = XVECLEN (newpat, 0);
3433 newpat_vec_with_clobbers = rtvec_alloc (len);
3434 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
3435 RTVEC_ELT (newpat_vec_with_clobbers, i) = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i);
3438 /* We have recognized nothing yet. */
3439 insn_code_number = -1;
3441 /* See if this is a PARALLEL of two SETs where one SET's destination is
3442 a register that is unused and this isn't marked as an instruction that
3443 might trap in an EH region. In that case, we just need the other SET.
3444 We prefer this over the PARALLEL.
3446 This can occur when simplifying a divmod insn. We *must* test for this
3447 case here because the code below that splits two independent SETs doesn't
3448 handle this case correctly when it updates the register status.
3450 It's pointless doing this if we originally had two sets, one from
3451 i3, and one from i2. Combining then splitting the parallel results
3452 in the original i2 again plus an invalid insn (which we delete).
3453 The net effect is only to move instructions around, which makes
3454 debug info less accurate. */
3456 if (!(added_sets_2 && i1 == 0)
3457 && is_parallel_of_n_reg_sets (newpat, 2)
3458 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3460 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3461 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3462 rtx oldpat = newpat;
3464 if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3465 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set1)))
3466 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3467 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1)))))
3468 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3469 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set1)))
3471 newpat = set0;
3472 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3475 else if (((REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3476 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, SET_DEST (set0)))
3477 || (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3478 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3479 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0)))))
3480 && insn_nothrow_p (i3)
3481 && !side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set0)))
3483 newpat = set1;
3484 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3486 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3487 changed_i3_dest = 1;
3490 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3491 newpat = oldpat;
3494 /* Is the result of combination a valid instruction? */
3495 if (insn_code_number < 0)
3496 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3498 /* If we were combining three insns and the result is a simple SET
3499 with no ASM_OPERANDS that wasn't recognized, try to split it into two
3500 insns. There are two ways to do this. It can be split using a
3501 machine-specific method (like when you have an addition of a large
3502 constant) or by combine in the function find_split_point. */
3504 if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
3505 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0)
3507 rtx parallel, *split;
3508 rtx_insn *m_split_insn;
3510 /* See if the MD file can split NEWPAT. If it can't, see if letting it
3511 use I2DEST as a scratch register will help. In the latter case,
3512 convert I2DEST to the mode of the source of NEWPAT if we can. */
3514 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (newpat, i3);
3516 /* We can only use I2DEST as a scratch reg if it doesn't overlap any
3517 inputs of NEWPAT. */
3519 /* ??? If I2DEST is not safe, and I1DEST exists, then it would be
3520 possible to try that as a scratch reg. This would require adding
3521 more code to make it work though. */
3523 if (m_split_insn == 0 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (i2dest, newpat))
3525 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (SET_DEST (newpat));
3527 /* First try to split using the original register as a
3528 scratch register. */
3529 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
3530 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3531 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3532 i2dest)));
3533 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3535 /* If that didn't work, try changing the mode of I2DEST if
3536 we can. */
3537 if (m_split_insn == 0
3538 && new_mode != GET_MODE (i2dest)
3539 && new_mode != VOIDmode
3540 && can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2, new_mode))
3542 machine_mode old_mode = GET_MODE (i2dest);
3543 rtx ni2dest;
3545 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3546 ni2dest = gen_rtx_REG (new_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3547 else
3549 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], new_mode);
3550 ni2dest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3553 parallel = (gen_rtx_PARALLEL
3554 (VOIDmode,
3555 gen_rtvec (2, newpat,
3556 gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode,
3557 ni2dest))));
3558 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3560 if (m_split_insn == 0
3561 && REGNO (i2dest) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3563 struct undo *buf;
3565 adjust_reg_mode (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], old_mode);
3566 buf = undobuf.undos;
3567 undobuf.undos = buf->next;
3568 buf->next = undobuf.frees;
3569 undobuf.frees = buf;
3573 i2scratch = m_split_insn != 0;
3576 /* If recog_for_combine has discarded clobbers, try to use them
3577 again for the split. */
3578 if (m_split_insn == 0 && newpat_vec_with_clobbers)
3580 parallel = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode, newpat_vec_with_clobbers);
3581 m_split_insn = combine_split_insns (parallel, i3);
3584 if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn) == NULL_RTX)
3586 rtx m_split_pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3587 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&m_split_pat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3588 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3589 newpat = m_split_pat;
3591 else if (m_split_insn && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn)) == NULL_RTX
3592 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3593 || ! use_crosses_set_p (PATTERN (m_split_insn), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))))
3595 rtx i2set, i3set;
3596 rtx newi3pat = PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3597 newi2pat = PATTERN (m_split_insn);
3599 i3set = single_set (NEXT_INSN (m_split_insn));
3600 i2set = single_set (m_split_insn);
3602 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3604 /* If I2 or I3 has multiple SETs, we won't know how to track
3605 register status, so don't use these insns. If I2's destination
3606 is used between I2 and I3, we also can't use these insns. */
3608 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && i2set && i3set
3609 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3610 || ! reg_used_between_p (SET_DEST (i2set), i2, i3)))
3611 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi3pat, i3,
3612 &new_i3_notes);
3613 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3614 newpat = newi3pat;
3616 /* It is possible that both insns now set the destination of I3.
3617 If so, we must show an extra use of it. */
3619 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3621 rtx new_i3_dest = SET_DEST (i3set);
3622 rtx new_i2_dest = SET_DEST (i2set);
3624 while (GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3625 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3626 || GET_CODE (new_i3_dest) == SUBREG)
3627 new_i3_dest = XEXP (new_i3_dest, 0);
3629 while (GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
3630 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
3631 || GET_CODE (new_i2_dest) == SUBREG)
3632 new_i2_dest = XEXP (new_i2_dest, 0);
3634 if (REG_P (new_i3_dest)
3635 && REG_P (new_i2_dest)
3636 && REGNO (new_i3_dest) == REGNO (new_i2_dest)
3637 && REGNO (new_i2_dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
3638 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (new_i2_dest), 1);
3642 /* If we can split it and use I2DEST, go ahead and see if that
3643 helps things be recognized. Verify that none of the registers
3644 are set between I2 and I3. */
3645 if (insn_code_number < 0
3646 && (split = find_split_point (&newpat, i3, false)) != 0
3647 && (!HAVE_cc0 || REG_P (i2dest))
3648 /* We need I2DEST in the proper mode. If it is a hard register
3649 or the only use of a pseudo, we can change its mode.
3650 Make sure we don't change a hard register to have a mode that
3651 isn't valid for it, or change the number of registers. */
3652 && (GET_MODE (*split) == GET_MODE (i2dest)
3653 || GET_MODE (*split) == VOIDmode
3654 || can_change_dest_mode (i2dest, added_sets_2,
3655 GET_MODE (*split)))
3656 && (next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
3657 || ! use_crosses_set_p (*split, DF_INSN_LUID (i2)))
3658 /* We can't overwrite I2DEST if its value is still used by
3659 NEWPAT. */
3660 && ! reg_referenced_p (i2dest, newpat))
3662 rtx newdest = i2dest;
3663 enum rtx_code split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3664 machine_mode split_mode = GET_MODE (*split);
3665 bool subst_done = false;
3666 newi2pat = NULL_RTX;
3668 i2scratch = true;
3670 /* *SPLIT may be part of I2SRC, so make sure we have the
3671 original expression around for later debug processing.
3672 We should not need I2SRC any more in other cases. */
3673 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
3674 i2src = copy_rtx (i2src);
3675 else
3676 i2src = NULL;
3678 /* Get NEWDEST as a register in the proper mode. We have already
3679 validated that we can do this. */
3680 if (GET_MODE (i2dest) != split_mode && split_mode != VOIDmode)
3682 if (REGNO (i2dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
3683 newdest = gen_rtx_REG (split_mode, REGNO (i2dest));
3684 else
3686 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)], split_mode);
3687 newdest = regno_reg_rtx[REGNO (i2dest)];
3691 /* If *SPLIT is a (mult FOO (const_int pow2)), convert it to
3692 an ASHIFT. This can occur if it was inside a PLUS and hence
3693 appeared to be a memory address. This is a kludge. */
3694 if (split_code == MULT
3695 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (*split, 1))
3696 && INTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)) > 0
3697 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (*split, 1)))) >= 0)
3699 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ASHIFT (split_mode,
3700 XEXP (*split, 0), GEN_INT (i)));
3701 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3702 anymore. */
3703 split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3706 /* Similarly for (plus (mult FOO (const_int pow2))). */
3707 if (split_code == PLUS
3708 && GET_CODE (XEXP (*split, 0)) == MULT
3709 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1))
3710 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1)) > 0
3711 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (*split, 0), 1)))) >= 0)
3713 rtx nsplit = XEXP (*split, 0);
3714 SUBST (XEXP (*split, 0), gen_rtx_ASHIFT (GET_MODE (nsplit),
3715 XEXP (nsplit, 0), GEN_INT (i)));
3716 /* Update split_code because we may not have a multiply
3717 anymore. */
3718 split_code = GET_CODE (*split);
3721 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
3722 /* If *SPLIT is a paradoxical SUBREG, when we split it, it should
3723 be written as a ZERO_EXTEND. */
3724 if (split_code == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3726 /* Or as a SIGN_EXTEND if LOAD_EXTEND_OP says that that's
3727 what it really is. */
3728 if (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (*split)))
3729 == SIGN_EXTEND)
3730 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (split_mode,
3731 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3732 else
3733 SUBST (*split, gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (split_mode,
3734 SUBREG_REG (*split)));
3736 #endif
3738 /* Attempt to split binary operators using arithmetic identities. */
3739 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (newpat))
3740 && split_mode == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat))
3741 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (newpat)))
3743 rtx setsrc = SET_SRC (newpat);
3744 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (setsrc);
3745 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (setsrc);
3746 rtx src_op0 = XEXP (setsrc, 0);
3747 rtx src_op1 = XEXP (setsrc, 1);
3749 /* Split "X = Y op Y" as "Z = Y; X = Z op Z". */
3750 if (rtx_equal_p (src_op0, src_op1))
3752 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, src_op0);
3753 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3754 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3755 subst_done = true;
3757 /* Split "((P op Q) op R) op S" where op is PLUS or MULT. */
3758 else if ((code == PLUS || code == MULT)
3759 && GET_CODE (src_op0) == code
3760 && GET_CODE (XEXP (src_op0, 0)) == code
3761 && (INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode)
3762 || (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode)
3763 && flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)))
3765 rtx p = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 0);
3766 rtx q = XEXP (XEXP (src_op0, 0), 1);
3767 rtx r = XEXP (src_op0, 1);
3768 rtx s = src_op1;
3770 /* Split both "((X op Y) op X) op Y" and
3771 "((X op Y) op Y) op X" as "T op T" where T is
3772 "X op Y". */
3773 if ((rtx_equal_p (p,r) && rtx_equal_p (q,s))
3774 || (rtx_equal_p (p,s) && rtx_equal_p (q,r)))
3776 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, XEXP (src_op0, 0));
3777 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3778 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3779 subst_done = true;
3781 /* Split "((X op X) op Y) op Y)" as "T op T" where
3782 T is "X op Y". */
3783 else if (rtx_equal_p (p,q) && rtx_equal_p (r,s))
3785 rtx tmp = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, p, r);
3786 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, tmp);
3787 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 0), newdest);
3788 SUBST (XEXP (setsrc, 1), newdest);
3789 subst_done = true;
3794 if (!subst_done)
3796 newi2pat = gen_rtx_SET (newdest, *split);
3797 SUBST (*split, newdest);
3800 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3802 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3803 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3804 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
3805 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3806 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
3808 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
3809 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
3811 undo_all ();
3812 return 0;
3816 /* If the split point was a MULT and we didn't have one before,
3817 don't use one now. */
3818 if (i2_code_number >= 0 && ! (split_code == MULT && ! have_mult))
3819 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3823 /* Check for a case where we loaded from memory in a narrow mode and
3824 then sign extended it, but we need both registers. In that case,
3825 we have a PARALLEL with both loads from the same memory location.
3826 We can split this into a load from memory followed by a register-register
3827 copy. This saves at least one insn, more if register allocation can
3828 eliminate the copy.
3830 We cannot do this if the destination of the first assignment is a
3831 condition code register or cc0. We eliminate this case by making sure
3832 the SET_DEST and SET_SRC have the same mode.
3834 We cannot do this if the destination of the second assignment is
3835 a register that we have already assumed is zero-extended. Similarly
3836 for a SUBREG of such a register. */
3838 else if (i1 && insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3839 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3840 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3841 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3842 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) == SIGN_EXTEND
3843 && (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3844 == GET_MODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3845 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3846 && rtx_equal_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3847 XEXP (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)), 0))
3848 && ! use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3849 DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3850 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3851 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3852 && ! (temp_expr = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3853 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3854 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3855 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3856 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3857 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3858 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode))))
3859 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) == SUBREG
3860 && (temp_expr = SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))),
3861 (REG_P (temp_expr)
3862 && reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits != 0
3863 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < BITS_PER_WORD
3864 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (temp_expr)) < HOST_BITS_PER_INT
3865 && (reg_stat[REGNO (temp_expr)].nonzero_bits
3866 != GET_MODE_MASK (word_mode)))))
3867 && ! reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3868 SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3869 && ! find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED,
3870 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))))
3872 rtx ni2dest;
3874 newi2pat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3875 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0));
3876 newpat = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3877 SUBST (SET_SRC (newpat),
3878 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (newpat)), ni2dest));
3879 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3881 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3882 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3884 if (insn_code_number >= 0)
3885 swap_i2i3 = 1;
3888 /* Similarly, check for a case where we have a PARALLEL of two independent
3889 SETs but we started with three insns. In this case, we can do the sets
3890 as two separate insns. This case occurs when some SET allows two
3891 other insns to combine, but the destination of that SET is still live.
3893 Also do this if we started with two insns and (at least) one of the
3894 resulting sets is a noop; this noop will be deleted later. */
3896 else if (insn_code_number < 0 && asm_noperands (newpat) < 0
3897 && GET_CODE (newpat) == PARALLEL
3898 && XVECLEN (newpat, 0) == 2
3899 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)) == SET
3900 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)) == SET
3901 && (i1 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3902 || set_noop_p (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))
3903 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3904 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3905 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != ZERO_EXTRACT
3906 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))) != STRICT_LOW_PART
3907 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)),
3908 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0))
3909 && ! reg_referenced_p (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)),
3910 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1))
3911 && ! (contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0)))
3912 && contains_muldiv (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1)))))
3914 rtx set0 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0);
3915 rtx set1 = XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 1);
3917 /* Normally, it doesn't matter which of the two is done first,
3918 but the one that references cc0 can't be the second, and
3919 one which uses any regs/memory set in between i2 and i3 can't
3920 be first. The PARALLEL might also have been pre-existing in i3,
3921 so we need to make sure that we won't wrongly hoist a SET to i2
3922 that would conflict with a death note present in there. */
3923 if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set1), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3924 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set1))
3925 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set1)))
3926 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set1)) == SUBREG
3927 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3928 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set1))))
3929 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set0))
3930 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set0 is a jump so that
3931 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3932 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set0) == pc_rtx)
3935 newi2pat = set1;
3936 newpat = set0;
3938 else if (!use_crosses_set_p (SET_SRC (set0), DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
3939 && !(REG_P (SET_DEST (set0))
3940 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD, SET_DEST (set0)))
3941 && !(GET_CODE (SET_DEST (set0)) == SUBREG
3942 && find_reg_note (i2, REG_DEAD,
3943 SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (set0))))
3944 && (!HAVE_cc0 || !reg_referenced_p (cc0_rtx, set1))
3945 /* If I3 is a jump, ensure that set1 is a jump so that
3946 we do not create invalid RTL. */
3947 && (!JUMP_P (i3) || SET_DEST (set1) == pc_rtx)
3950 newi2pat = set0;
3951 newpat = set1;
3953 else
3955 undo_all ();
3956 return 0;
3959 i2_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newi2pat, i2, &new_i2_notes);
3961 if (i2_code_number >= 0)
3963 /* recog_for_combine might have added CLOBBERs to newi2pat.
3964 Make sure NEWPAT does not depend on the clobbered regs. */
3965 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
3967 for (i = XVECLEN (newi2pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
3968 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
3970 rtx reg = XEXP (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, i), 0);
3971 if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, newpat))
3973 undo_all ();
3974 return 0;
3979 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine (&newpat, i3, &new_i3_notes);
3983 /* If it still isn't recognized, fail and change things back the way they
3984 were. */
3985 if ((insn_code_number < 0
3986 /* Is the result a reasonable ASM_OPERANDS? */
3987 && (! check_asm_operands (newpat) || added_sets_1 || added_sets_2)))
3989 undo_all ();
3990 return 0;
3993 /* If we had to change another insn, make sure it is valid also. */
3994 if (undobuf.other_insn)
3996 CLEAR_HARD_REG_SET (newpat_used_regs);
3998 other_pat = PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn);
3999 other_code_number = recog_for_combine (&other_pat, undobuf.other_insn,
4000 &new_other_notes);
4002 if (other_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (other_pat))
4004 undo_all ();
4005 return 0;
4009 /* If I2 is the CC0 setter and I3 is the CC0 user then check whether
4010 they are adjacent to each other or not. */
4011 if (HAVE_cc0)
4013 rtx_insn *p = prev_nonnote_insn (i3);
4014 if (p && p != i2 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (p) && newi2pat
4015 && sets_cc0_p (newi2pat))
4017 undo_all ();
4018 return 0;
4022 /* Only allow this combination if insn_rtx_costs reports that the
4023 replacement instructions are cheaper than the originals. */
4024 if (!combine_validate_cost (i0, i1, i2, i3, newpat, newi2pat, other_pat))
4026 undo_all ();
4027 return 0;
4030 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4032 struct undo *undo;
4034 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = undo->next)
4035 if (undo->kind == UNDO_MODE)
4037 rtx reg = *undo->where.r;
4038 machine_mode new_mode = GET_MODE (reg);
4039 machine_mode old_mode = undo->old_contents.m;
4041 /* Temporarily revert mode back. */
4042 adjust_reg_mode (reg, old_mode);
4044 if (reg == i2dest && i2scratch)
4046 /* If we used i2dest as a scratch register with a
4047 different mode, substitute it for the original
4048 i2src while its original mode is temporarily
4049 restored, and then clear i2scratch so that we don't
4050 do it again later. */
4051 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, reg, i2src,
4052 this_basic_block);
4053 i2scratch = false;
4054 /* Put back the new mode. */
4055 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4057 else
4059 rtx tempreg = gen_raw_REG (old_mode, REGNO (reg));
4060 rtx_insn *first, *last;
4062 if (reg == i2dest)
4064 first = i2;
4065 last = last_combined_insn;
4067 else
4069 first = i3;
4070 last = undobuf.other_insn;
4071 gcc_assert (last);
4072 if (DF_INSN_LUID (last)
4073 < DF_INSN_LUID (last_combined_insn))
4074 last = last_combined_insn;
4077 /* We're dealing with a reg that changed mode but not
4078 meaning, so we want to turn it into a subreg for
4079 the new mode. However, because of REG sharing and
4080 because its mode had already changed, we have to do
4081 it in two steps. First, replace any debug uses of
4082 reg, with its original mode temporarily restored,
4083 with this copy we have created; then, replace the
4084 copy with the SUBREG of the original shared reg,
4085 once again changed to the new mode. */
4086 propagate_for_debug (first, last, reg, tempreg,
4087 this_basic_block);
4088 adjust_reg_mode (reg, new_mode);
4089 propagate_for_debug (first, last, tempreg,
4090 lowpart_subreg (old_mode, reg, new_mode),
4091 this_basic_block);
4096 /* If we will be able to accept this, we have made a
4097 change to the destination of I3. This requires us to
4098 do a few adjustments. */
4100 if (changed_i3_dest)
4102 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4103 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4106 /* We now know that we can do this combination. Merge the insns and
4107 update the status of registers and LOG_LINKS. */
4109 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4111 rtx note, next;
4113 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn) = other_pat;
4115 /* If any of the notes in OTHER_INSN were REG_DEAD or REG_UNUSED,
4116 ensure that they are still valid. Then add any non-duplicate
4117 notes added by recog_for_combine. */
4118 for (note = REG_NOTES (undobuf.other_insn); note; note = next)
4120 next = XEXP (note, 1);
4122 if ((REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD
4123 && !reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4124 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)))
4125 ||(REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_UNUSED
4126 && !reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0),
4127 PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn))))
4128 remove_note (undobuf.other_insn, note);
4131 distribute_notes (new_other_notes, undobuf.other_insn,
4132 undobuf.other_insn, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4133 NULL_RTX);
4136 if (swap_i2i3)
4138 rtx_insn *insn;
4139 struct insn_link *link;
4140 rtx ni2dest;
4142 /* I3 now uses what used to be its destination and which is now
4143 I2's destination. This requires us to do a few adjustments. */
4144 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4145 adjust_for_new_dest (i3);
4147 /* We need a LOG_LINK from I3 to I2. But we used to have one,
4148 so we still will.
4150 However, some later insn might be using I2's dest and have
4151 a LOG_LINK pointing at I3. We must remove this link.
4152 The simplest way to remove the link is to point it at I1,
4153 which we know will be a NOTE. */
4155 /* newi2pat is usually a SET here; however, recog_for_combine might
4156 have added some clobbers. */
4157 if (GET_CODE (newi2pat) == PARALLEL)
4158 ni2dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (newi2pat, 0, 0));
4159 else
4160 ni2dest = SET_DEST (newi2pat);
4162 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (i3);
4163 insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4164 || insn != BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb));
4165 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
4167 if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_referenced_p (ni2dest, PATTERN (insn)))
4169 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, insn)
4170 if (link->insn == i3)
4171 link->insn = i1;
4173 break;
4179 rtx i3notes, i2notes, i1notes = 0, i0notes = 0;
4180 struct insn_link *i3links, *i2links, *i1links = 0, *i0links = 0;
4181 rtx midnotes = 0;
4182 int from_luid;
4183 /* Compute which registers we expect to eliminate. newi2pat may be setting
4184 either i3dest or i2dest, so we must check it. */
4185 rtx elim_i2 = ((newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4186 || i2dest_in_i2src || i2dest_in_i1src || i2dest_in_i0src
4187 || !i2dest_killed
4188 ? 0 : i2dest);
4189 /* For i1, we need to compute both local elimination and global
4190 elimination information with respect to newi2pat because i1dest
4191 may be the same as i3dest, in which case newi2pat may be setting
4192 i1dest. Global information is used when distributing REG_DEAD
4193 note for i2 and i3, in which case it does matter if newi2pat sets
4194 i1dest or not.
4196 Local information is used when distributing REG_DEAD note for i1,
4197 in which case it doesn't matter if newi2pat sets i1dest or not.
4198 See PR62151, if we have four insns combination:
4199 i0: r0 <- i0src
4200 i1: r1 <- i1src (using r0)
4201 REG_DEAD (r0)
4202 i2: r0 <- i2src (using r1)
4203 i3: r3 <- i3src (using r0)
4204 ix: using r0
4205 From i1's point of view, r0 is eliminated, no matter if it is set
4206 by newi2pat or not. In other words, REG_DEAD info for r0 in i1
4207 should be discarded.
4209 Note local information only affects cases in forms like "I1->I2->I3",
4210 "I0->I1->I2->I3" or "I0&I1->I2, I2->I3". For other cases like
4211 "I0->I1, I1&I2->I3" or "I1&I2->I3", newi2pat won't set i1dest or
4212 i0dest anyway. */
4213 rtx local_elim_i1 = (i1 == 0 || i1dest_in_i1src || i1dest_in_i0src
4214 || !i1dest_killed
4215 ? 0 : i1dest);
4216 rtx elim_i1 = (local_elim_i1 == 0
4217 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4218 ? 0 : i1dest);
4219 /* Same case as i1. */
4220 rtx local_elim_i0 = (i0 == 0 || i0dest_in_i0src || !i0dest_killed
4221 ? 0 : i0dest);
4222 rtx elim_i0 = (local_elim_i0 == 0
4223 || (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4224 ? 0 : i0dest);
4226 /* Get the old REG_NOTES and LOG_LINKS from all our insns and
4227 clear them. */
4228 i3notes = REG_NOTES (i3), i3links = LOG_LINKS (i3);
4229 i2notes = REG_NOTES (i2), i2links = LOG_LINKS (i2);
4230 if (i1)
4231 i1notes = REG_NOTES (i1), i1links = LOG_LINKS (i1);
4232 if (i0)
4233 i0notes = REG_NOTES (i0), i0links = LOG_LINKS (i0);
4235 /* Ensure that we do not have something that should not be shared but
4236 occurs multiple times in the new insns. Check this by first
4237 resetting all the `used' flags and then copying anything is shared. */
4239 reset_used_flags (i3notes);
4240 reset_used_flags (i2notes);
4241 reset_used_flags (i1notes);
4242 reset_used_flags (i0notes);
4243 reset_used_flags (newpat);
4244 reset_used_flags (newi2pat);
4245 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4246 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4248 i3notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i3notes);
4249 i2notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i2notes);
4250 i1notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i1notes);
4251 i0notes = copy_rtx_if_shared (i0notes);
4252 newpat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newpat);
4253 newi2pat = copy_rtx_if_shared (newi2pat);
4254 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4255 reset_used_flags (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn));
4257 INSN_CODE (i3) = insn_code_number;
4258 PATTERN (i3) = newpat;
4260 if (CALL_P (i3) && CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3))
4262 rtx call_usage = CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3);
4264 reset_used_flags (call_usage);
4265 call_usage = copy_rtx (call_usage);
4267 if (substed_i2)
4269 /* I2SRC must still be meaningful at this point. Some splitting
4270 operations can invalidate I2SRC, but those operations do not
4271 apply to calls. */
4272 gcc_assert (i2src);
4273 replace_rtx (call_usage, i2dest, i2src);
4276 if (substed_i1)
4277 replace_rtx (call_usage, i1dest, i1src);
4278 if (substed_i0)
4279 replace_rtx (call_usage, i0dest, i0src);
4281 CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (i3) = call_usage;
4284 if (undobuf.other_insn)
4285 INSN_CODE (undobuf.other_insn) = other_code_number;
4287 /* We had one special case above where I2 had more than one set and
4288 we replaced a destination of one of those sets with the destination
4289 of I3. In that case, we have to update LOG_LINKS of insns later
4290 in this basic block. Note that this (expensive) case is rare.
4292 Also, in this case, we must pretend that all REG_NOTEs for I2
4293 actually came from I3, so that REG_UNUSED notes from I2 will be
4294 properly handled. */
4296 if (i3_subst_into_i2)
4298 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (PATTERN (i2), 0); i++)
4299 if ((GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == SET
4300 || GET_CODE (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) == CLOBBER)
4301 && REG_P (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)))
4302 && SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i)) != i2dest
4303 && ! find_reg_note (i2, REG_UNUSED,
4304 SET_DEST (XVECEXP (PATTERN (i2), 0, i))))
4305 for (temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (i2);
4306 temp_insn
4307 && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
4308 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block) != temp_insn);
4309 temp_insn = NEXT_INSN (temp_insn))
4310 if (temp_insn != i3 && INSN_P (temp_insn))
4311 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, temp_insn)
4312 if (link->insn == i2)
4313 link->insn = i3;
4315 if (i3notes)
4317 rtx link = i3notes;
4318 while (XEXP (link, 1))
4319 link = XEXP (link, 1);
4320 XEXP (link, 1) = i2notes;
4322 else
4323 i3notes = i2notes;
4324 i2notes = 0;
4327 LOG_LINKS (i3) = NULL;
4328 REG_NOTES (i3) = 0;
4329 LOG_LINKS (i2) = NULL;
4330 REG_NOTES (i2) = 0;
4332 if (newi2pat)
4334 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2scratch)
4335 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4336 this_basic_block);
4337 INSN_CODE (i2) = i2_code_number;
4338 PATTERN (i2) = newi2pat;
4340 else
4342 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS && i2src)
4343 propagate_for_debug (i2, last_combined_insn, i2dest, i2src,
4344 this_basic_block);
4345 SET_INSN_DELETED (i2);
4348 if (i1)
4350 LOG_LINKS (i1) = NULL;
4351 REG_NOTES (i1) = 0;
4352 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4353 propagate_for_debug (i1, last_combined_insn, i1dest, i1src,
4354 this_basic_block);
4355 SET_INSN_DELETED (i1);
4358 if (i0)
4360 LOG_LINKS (i0) = NULL;
4361 REG_NOTES (i0) = 0;
4362 if (MAY_HAVE_DEBUG_INSNS)
4363 propagate_for_debug (i0, last_combined_insn, i0dest, i0src,
4364 this_basic_block);
4365 SET_INSN_DELETED (i0);
4368 /* Get death notes for everything that is now used in either I3 or
4369 I2 and used to die in a previous insn. If we built two new
4370 patterns, move from I1 to I2 then I2 to I3 so that we get the
4371 proper movement on registers that I2 modifies. */
4373 if (i0)
4374 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i0);
4375 else if (i1)
4376 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i1);
4377 else
4378 from_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (i2);
4379 if (newi2pat)
4380 move_deaths (newi2pat, NULL_RTX, from_luid, i2, &midnotes);
4381 move_deaths (newpat, newi2pat, from_luid, i3, &midnotes);
4383 /* Distribute all the LOG_LINKS and REG_NOTES from I1, I2, and I3. */
4384 if (i3notes)
4385 distribute_notes (i3notes, i3, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4386 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4387 if (i2notes)
4388 distribute_notes (i2notes, i2, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4389 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4390 if (i1notes)
4391 distribute_notes (i1notes, i1, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4392 elim_i2, local_elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4393 if (i0notes)
4394 distribute_notes (i0notes, i0, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4395 elim_i2, elim_i1, local_elim_i0);
4396 if (midnotes)
4397 distribute_notes (midnotes, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4398 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4400 /* Distribute any notes added to I2 or I3 by recog_for_combine. We
4401 know these are REG_UNUSED and want them to go to the desired insn,
4402 so we always pass it as i3. */
4404 if (newi2pat && new_i2_notes)
4405 distribute_notes (new_i2_notes, i2, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4406 NULL_RTX);
4408 if (new_i3_notes)
4409 distribute_notes (new_i3_notes, i3, i3, NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
4410 NULL_RTX);
4412 /* If I3DEST was used in I3SRC, it really died in I3. We may need to
4413 put a REG_DEAD note for it somewhere. If NEWI2PAT exists and sets
4414 I3DEST, the death must be somewhere before I2, not I3. If we passed I3
4415 in that case, it might delete I2. Similarly for I2 and I1.
4416 Show an additional death due to the REG_DEAD note we make here. If
4417 we discard it in distribute_notes, we will decrement it again. */
4419 if (i3dest_killed)
4421 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i3dest_killed, NULL_RTX);
4422 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i3dest_killed, newi2pat))
4423 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, elim_i2,
4424 elim_i1, elim_i0);
4425 else
4426 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4427 elim_i2, elim_i1, elim_i0);
4430 if (i2dest_in_i2src)
4432 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i2dest, NULL_RTX);
4433 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4434 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4435 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4436 else
4437 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4438 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4441 if (i1dest_in_i1src)
4443 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i1dest, NULL_RTX);
4444 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i1dest, newi2pat))
4445 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4446 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4447 else
4448 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4449 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4452 if (i0dest_in_i0src)
4454 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, i0dest, NULL_RTX);
4455 if (newi2pat && reg_set_p (i0dest, newi2pat))
4456 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i2, NULL, NULL_RTX,
4457 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4458 else
4459 distribute_notes (new_note, NULL, i3, newi2pat ? i2 : NULL,
4460 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
4463 distribute_links (i3links);
4464 distribute_links (i2links);
4465 distribute_links (i1links);
4466 distribute_links (i0links);
4468 if (REG_P (i2dest))
4470 struct insn_link *link;
4471 rtx_insn *i2_insn = 0;
4472 rtx i2_val = 0, set;
4474 /* The insn that used to set this register doesn't exist, and
4475 this life of the register may not exist either. See if one of
4476 I3's links points to an insn that sets I2DEST. If it does,
4477 that is now the last known value for I2DEST. If we don't update
4478 this and I2 set the register to a value that depended on its old
4479 contents, we will get confused. If this insn is used, thing
4480 will be set correctly in combine_instructions. */
4481 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4482 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4483 && rtx_equal_p (i2dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4484 i2_insn = link->insn, i2_val = SET_SRC (set);
4486 record_value_for_reg (i2dest, i2_insn, i2_val);
4488 /* If the reg formerly set in I2 died only once and that was in I3,
4489 zero its use count so it won't make `reload' do any work. */
4490 if (! added_sets_2
4491 && (newi2pat == 0 || ! reg_mentioned_p (i2dest, newi2pat))
4492 && ! i2dest_in_i2src
4493 && REGNO (i2dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4494 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i2dest), -1);
4497 if (i1 && REG_P (i1dest))
4499 struct insn_link *link;
4500 rtx_insn *i1_insn = 0;
4501 rtx i1_val = 0, set;
4503 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4504 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4505 && rtx_equal_p (i1dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4506 i1_insn = link->insn, i1_val = SET_SRC (set);
4508 record_value_for_reg (i1dest, i1_insn, i1_val);
4510 if (! added_sets_1
4511 && ! i1dest_in_i1src
4512 && REGNO (i1dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4513 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i1dest), -1);
4516 if (i0 && REG_P (i0dest))
4518 struct insn_link *link;
4519 rtx_insn *i0_insn = 0;
4520 rtx i0_val = 0, set;
4522 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link, i3)
4523 if ((set = single_set (link->insn)) != 0
4524 && rtx_equal_p (i0dest, SET_DEST (set)))
4525 i0_insn = link->insn, i0_val = SET_SRC (set);
4527 record_value_for_reg (i0dest, i0_insn, i0_val);
4529 if (! added_sets_0
4530 && ! i0dest_in_i0src
4531 && REGNO (i0dest) < reg_n_sets_max)
4532 INC_REG_N_SETS (REGNO (i0dest), -1);
4535 /* Update reg_stat[].nonzero_bits et al for any changes that may have
4536 been made to this insn. The order is important, because newi2pat
4537 can affect nonzero_bits of newpat. */
4538 if (newi2pat)
4539 note_stores (newi2pat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4540 note_stores (newpat, set_nonzero_bits_and_sign_copies, NULL);
4543 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX)
4545 if (dump_file)
4547 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying other_insn ");
4548 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, undobuf.other_insn);
4550 df_insn_rescan (undobuf.other_insn);
4553 if (i0 && !(NOTE_P (i0) && (NOTE_KIND (i0) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4555 if (dump_file)
4557 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i0 ");
4558 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i0);
4560 df_insn_rescan (i0);
4563 if (i1 && !(NOTE_P (i1) && (NOTE_KIND (i1) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4565 if (dump_file)
4567 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i1 ");
4568 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i1);
4570 df_insn_rescan (i1);
4573 if (i2 && !(NOTE_P (i2) && (NOTE_KIND (i2) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4575 if (dump_file)
4577 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i2 ");
4578 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i2);
4580 df_insn_rescan (i2);
4583 if (i3 && !(NOTE_P (i3) && (NOTE_KIND (i3) == NOTE_INSN_DELETED)))
4585 if (dump_file)
4587 fprintf (dump_file, "modifying insn i3 ");
4588 dump_insn_slim (dump_file, i3);
4590 df_insn_rescan (i3);
4593 /* Set new_direct_jump_p if a new return or simple jump instruction
4594 has been created. Adjust the CFG accordingly. */
4595 if (returnjump_p (i3) || any_uncondjump_p (i3))
4597 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4598 mark_jump_label (PATTERN (i3), i3, 0);
4599 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4602 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4603 && (returnjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)
4604 || any_uncondjump_p (undobuf.other_insn)))
4606 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4607 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4610 /* A noop might also need cleaning up of CFG, if it comes from the
4611 simplification of a jump. */
4612 if (JUMP_P (i3)
4613 && GET_CODE (newpat) == SET
4614 && SET_SRC (newpat) == pc_rtx
4615 && SET_DEST (newpat) == pc_rtx)
4617 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4618 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (i3);
4621 if (undobuf.other_insn != NULL_RTX
4622 && JUMP_P (undobuf.other_insn)
4623 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == SET
4624 && SET_SRC (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx
4625 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (undobuf.other_insn)) == pc_rtx)
4627 *new_direct_jump_p = 1;
4628 update_cfg_for_uncondjump (undobuf.other_insn);
4631 combine_successes++;
4632 undo_commit ();
4634 if (added_links_insn
4635 && (newi2pat == 0 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i2))
4636 && DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) < DF_INSN_LUID (i3))
4637 return added_links_insn;
4638 else
4639 return newi2pat ? i2 : i3;
4642 /* Get a marker for undoing to the current state. */
4644 static void *
4645 get_undo_marker (void)
4647 return undobuf.undos;
4650 /* Undo the modifications up to the marker. */
4652 static void
4653 undo_to_marker (void *marker)
4655 struct undo *undo, *next;
4657 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo != marker; undo = next)
4659 gcc_assert (undo);
4661 next = undo->next;
4662 switch (undo->kind)
4664 case UNDO_RTX:
4665 *undo->where.r = undo->old_contents.r;
4666 break;
4667 case UNDO_INT:
4668 *undo->where.i = undo->old_contents.i;
4669 break;
4670 case UNDO_MODE:
4671 adjust_reg_mode (*undo->where.r, undo->old_contents.m);
4672 break;
4673 case UNDO_LINKS:
4674 *undo->where.l = undo->old_contents.l;
4675 break;
4676 default:
4677 gcc_unreachable ();
4680 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4681 undobuf.frees = undo;
4684 undobuf.undos = (struct undo *) marker;
4687 /* Undo all the modifications recorded in undobuf. */
4689 static void
4690 undo_all (void)
4692 undo_to_marker (0);
4695 /* We've committed to accepting the changes we made. Move all
4696 of the undos to the free list. */
4698 static void
4699 undo_commit (void)
4701 struct undo *undo, *next;
4703 for (undo = undobuf.undos; undo; undo = next)
4705 next = undo->next;
4706 undo->next = undobuf.frees;
4707 undobuf.frees = undo;
4709 undobuf.undos = 0;
4712 /* Find the innermost point within the rtx at LOC, possibly LOC itself,
4713 where we have an arithmetic expression and return that point. LOC will
4714 be inside INSN.
4716 try_combine will call this function to see if an insn can be split into
4717 two insns. */
4719 static rtx *
4720 find_split_point (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, bool set_src)
4722 rtx x = *loc;
4723 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
4724 rtx *split;
4725 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = 0;
4726 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0;
4727 int unsignedp = 0;
4728 rtx inner = NULL_RTX;
4730 /* First special-case some codes. */
4731 switch (code)
4733 case SUBREG:
4734 #ifdef INSN_SCHEDULING
4735 /* If we are making a paradoxical SUBREG invalid, it becomes a split
4736 point. */
4737 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
4738 return loc;
4739 #endif
4740 return find_split_point (&SUBREG_REG (x), insn, false);
4742 case MEM:
4743 /* If we have (mem (const ..)) or (mem (symbol_ref ...)), split it
4744 using LO_SUM and HIGH. */
4745 if (HAVE_lo_sum && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST
4746 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF))
4748 machine_mode address_mode = get_address_mode (x);
4750 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
4751 gen_rtx_LO_SUM (address_mode,
4752 gen_rtx_HIGH (address_mode, XEXP (x, 0)),
4753 XEXP (x, 0)));
4754 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4757 /* If we have a PLUS whose second operand is a constant and the
4758 address is not valid, perhaps will can split it up using
4759 the machine-specific way to split large constants. We use
4760 the first pseudo-reg (one of the virtual regs) as a placeholder;
4761 it will not remain in the result. */
4762 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4763 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
4764 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4765 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4767 rtx reg = regno_reg_rtx[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];
4768 rtx_insn *seq = combine_split_insns (gen_rtx_SET (reg, XEXP (x, 0)),
4769 subst_insn);
4771 /* This should have produced two insns, each of which sets our
4772 placeholder. If the source of the second is a valid address,
4773 we can make put both sources together and make a split point
4774 in the middle. */
4776 if (seq
4777 && NEXT_INSN (seq) != NULL_RTX
4778 && NEXT_INSN (NEXT_INSN (seq)) == NULL_RTX
4779 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (seq)
4780 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SET
4781 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (seq)) == reg
4782 && ! reg_mentioned_p (reg,
4783 SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq)))
4784 && NONJUMP_INSN_P (NEXT_INSN (seq))
4785 && GET_CODE (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == SET
4786 && SET_DEST (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))) == reg
4787 && memory_address_addr_space_p
4788 (GET_MODE (x), SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq))),
4789 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
4791 rtx src1 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (seq));
4792 rtx src2 = SET_SRC (PATTERN (NEXT_INSN (seq)));
4794 /* Replace the placeholder in SRC2 with SRC1. If we can
4795 find where in SRC2 it was placed, that can become our
4796 split point and we can replace this address with SRC2.
4797 Just try two obvious places. */
4799 src2 = replace_rtx (src2, reg, src1);
4800 split = 0;
4801 if (XEXP (src2, 0) == src1)
4802 split = &XEXP (src2, 0);
4803 else if (GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (XEXP (src2, 0)))[0] == 'e'
4804 && XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0) == src1)
4805 split = &XEXP (XEXP (src2, 0), 0);
4807 if (split)
4809 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), src2);
4810 return split;
4814 /* If that didn't work, perhaps the first operand is complex and
4815 needs to be computed separately, so make a split point there.
4816 This will occur on machines that just support REG + CONST
4817 and have a constant moved through some previous computation. */
4819 else if (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4820 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4821 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4822 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4825 /* If we have a PLUS whose first operand is complex, try computing it
4826 separately by making a split there. */
4827 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
4828 && ! memory_address_addr_space_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
4829 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x))
4830 && ! OBJECT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
4831 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
4832 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)))))
4833 return &XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
4834 break;
4836 case SET:
4837 /* If SET_DEST is CC0 and SET_SRC is not an operand, a COMPARE, or a
4838 ZERO_EXTRACT, the most likely reason why this doesn't match is that
4839 we need to put the operand into a register. So split at that
4840 point. */
4842 if (SET_DEST (x) == cc0_rtx
4843 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != COMPARE
4844 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) != ZERO_EXTRACT
4845 && !OBJECT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4846 && ! (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x)) == SUBREG
4847 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (SET_SRC (x)))))
4848 return &SET_SRC (x);
4850 /* See if we can split SET_SRC as it stands. */
4851 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4852 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4853 return split;
4855 /* See if we can split SET_DEST as it stands. */
4856 split = find_split_point (&SET_DEST (x), insn, false);
4857 if (split && split != &SET_DEST (x))
4858 return split;
4860 /* See if this is a bitfield assignment with everything constant. If
4861 so, this is an IOR of an AND, so split it into that. */
4862 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
4863 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4864 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4865 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2))
4866 && CONST_INT_P (SET_SRC (x))
4867 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1))
4868 + INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2)))
4869 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0))))
4870 && ! side_effects_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)))
4872 HOST_WIDE_INT pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2));
4873 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
4874 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT src = INTVAL (SET_SRC (x));
4875 rtx dest = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
4876 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (dest);
4877 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
4878 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1;
4879 rtx or_mask;
4881 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4882 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len - pos;
4884 or_mask = gen_int_mode (src << pos, mode);
4885 if (src == mask)
4886 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4887 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, dest, or_mask));
4888 else
4890 rtx negmask = gen_int_mode (~(mask << pos), mode);
4891 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4892 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode,
4893 simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode,
4894 dest, negmask),
4895 or_mask));
4898 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), dest);
4900 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4901 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4902 return split;
4905 /* Otherwise, see if this is an operation that we can split into two.
4906 If so, try to split that. */
4907 code = GET_CODE (SET_SRC (x));
4909 switch (code)
4911 case AND:
4912 /* If we are AND'ing with a large constant that is only a single
4913 bit and the result is only being used in a context where we
4914 need to know if it is zero or nonzero, replace it with a bit
4915 extraction. This will avoid the large constant, which might
4916 have taken more than one insn to make. If the constant were
4917 not a valid argument to the AND but took only one insn to make,
4918 this is no worse, but if it took more than one insn, it will
4919 be better. */
4921 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
4922 && REG_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
4923 && (pos = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1)))) >= 7
4924 && REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
4925 && (split = find_single_use (SET_DEST (x), insn, NULL)) != 0
4926 && (GET_CODE (*split) == EQ || GET_CODE (*split) == NE)
4927 && XEXP (*split, 0) == SET_DEST (x)
4928 && XEXP (*split, 1) == const0_rtx)
4930 rtx extraction = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)),
4931 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4932 pos, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 0);
4933 if (extraction != 0)
4935 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), extraction);
4936 return find_split_point (loc, insn, false);
4939 break;
4941 case NE:
4942 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, this is (NE X 0) and only one bit of X
4943 is known to be on, this can be converted into a NEG of a shift. */
4944 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1 && XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1) == const0_rtx
4945 && GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x)) == GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
4946 && 1 <= (pos = exact_log2
4947 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4948 GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
4950 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0));
4952 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
4953 gen_rtx_NEG (mode,
4954 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode,
4955 XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0),
4956 GEN_INT (pos))));
4958 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
4959 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
4960 return split;
4962 break;
4964 case SIGN_EXTEND:
4965 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
4967 /* We can't optimize if either mode is a partial integer
4968 mode as we don't know how many bits are significant
4969 in those modes. */
4970 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner)) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT
4971 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x))) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
4972 break;
4974 pos = 0;
4975 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
4976 unsignedp = 0;
4977 break;
4979 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
4980 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
4981 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
4982 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2)))
4984 inner = XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
4985 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1));
4986 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 2));
4988 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
4989 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len - pos;
4990 unsignedp = (code == ZERO_EXTRACT);
4992 break;
4994 default:
4995 break;
4998 if (len && pos >= 0
4999 && pos + len <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
5001 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (SET_SRC (x));
5003 /* For unsigned, we have a choice of a shift followed by an
5004 AND or two shifts. Use two shifts for field sizes where the
5005 constant might be too large. We assume here that we can
5006 always at least get 8-bit constants in an AND insn, which is
5007 true for every current RISC. */
5009 if (unsignedp && len <= 8)
5011 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask
5012 = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1;
5013 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5014 gen_rtx_AND (mode,
5015 gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT
5016 (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
5017 GEN_INT (pos)),
5018 gen_int_mode (mask, mode)));
5020 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5021 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5022 return split;
5024 else
5026 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
5027 gen_rtx_fmt_ee
5028 (unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT, mode,
5029 gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode,
5030 gen_lowpart (mode, inner),
5031 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
5032 - len - pos)),
5033 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - len)));
5035 split = find_split_point (&SET_SRC (x), insn, true);
5036 if (split && split != &SET_SRC (x))
5037 return split;
5041 /* See if this is a simple operation with a constant as the second
5042 operand. It might be that this constant is out of range and hence
5043 could be used as a split point. */
5044 if (BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x))
5045 && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1))
5046 && (OBJECT_P (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))
5047 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0)) == SUBREG
5048 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0))))))
5049 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 1);
5051 /* Finally, see if this is a simple operation with its first operand
5052 not in a register. The operation might require this operand in a
5053 register, so return it as a split point. We can always do this
5054 because if the first operand were another operation, we would have
5055 already found it as a split point. */
5056 if ((BINARY_P (SET_SRC (x)) || UNARY_P (SET_SRC (x)))
5057 && ! register_operand (XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0), VOIDmode))
5058 return &XEXP (SET_SRC (x), 0);
5060 return 0;
5062 case AND:
5063 case IOR:
5064 /* We write NOR as (and (not A) (not B)), but if we don't have a NOR,
5065 it is better to write this as (not (ior A B)) so we can split it.
5066 Similarly for IOR. */
5067 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == NOT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5069 SUBST (*loc,
5070 gen_rtx_NOT (GET_MODE (x),
5071 gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code == IOR ? AND : IOR,
5072 GET_MODE (x),
5073 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5074 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0))));
5075 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5078 /* Many RISC machines have a large set of logical insns. If the
5079 second operand is a NOT, put it first so we will try to split the
5080 other operand first. */
5081 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == NOT)
5083 rtx tem = XEXP (x, 0);
5084 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5085 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem);
5087 break;
5089 case PLUS:
5090 case MINUS:
5091 /* Canonicalization can produce (minus A (mult B C)), where C is a
5092 constant. It may be better to try splitting (plus (mult B -C) A)
5093 instead if this isn't a multiply by a power of two. */
5094 if (set_src && code == MINUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT
5095 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) == CONST_INT
5096 && exact_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))) < 0)
5098 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5099 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT this_int = INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1));
5100 HOST_WIDE_INT other_int = trunc_int_for_mode (-this_int, mode);
5101 SUBST (*loc, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode,
5102 gen_rtx_MULT (mode,
5103 XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0),
5104 gen_int_mode (other_int,
5105 mode)),
5106 XEXP (x, 0)));
5107 return find_split_point (loc, insn, set_src);
5110 /* Split at a multiply-accumulate instruction. However if this is
5111 the SET_SRC, we likely do not have such an instruction and it's
5112 worthless to try this split. */
5113 if (!set_src
5114 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT
5115 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
5116 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT)))
5117 return loc;
5119 default:
5120 break;
5123 /* Otherwise, select our actions depending on our rtx class. */
5124 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5126 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS: /* This is ZERO_EXTRACT and SIGN_EXTRACT. */
5127 case RTX_TERNARY:
5128 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 2), insn, false);
5129 if (split)
5130 return split;
5131 /* ... fall through ... */
5132 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5133 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5134 case RTX_COMPARE:
5135 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5136 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 1), insn, false);
5137 if (split)
5138 return split;
5139 /* ... fall through ... */
5140 case RTX_UNARY:
5141 /* Some machines have (and (shift ...) ...) insns. If X is not
5142 an AND, but XEXP (X, 0) is, use it as our split point. */
5143 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == AND)
5144 return &XEXP (x, 0);
5146 split = find_split_point (&XEXP (x, 0), insn, false);
5147 if (split)
5148 return split;
5149 return loc;
5151 default:
5152 /* Otherwise, we don't have a split point. */
5153 return 0;
5157 /* Throughout X, replace FROM with TO, and return the result.
5158 The result is TO if X is FROM;
5159 otherwise the result is X, but its contents may have been modified.
5160 If they were modified, a record was made in undobuf so that
5161 undo_all will (among other things) return X to its original state.
5163 If the number of changes necessary is too much to record to undo,
5164 the excess changes are not made, so the result is invalid.
5165 The changes already made can still be undone.
5166 undobuf.num_undo is incremented for such changes, so by testing that
5167 the caller can tell whether the result is valid.
5169 `n_occurrences' is incremented each time FROM is replaced.
5171 IN_DEST is nonzero if we are processing the SET_DEST of a SET.
5173 IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level of a condition.
5175 UNIQUE_COPY is nonzero if each substitution must be unique. We do this
5176 by copying if `n_occurrences' is nonzero. */
5178 static rtx
5179 subst (rtx x, rtx from, rtx to, int in_dest, int in_cond, int unique_copy)
5181 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5182 machine_mode op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5183 const char *fmt;
5184 int len, i;
5185 rtx new_rtx;
5187 /* Two expressions are equal if they are identical copies of a shared
5188 RTX or if they are both registers with the same register number
5189 and mode. */
5191 #define COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P(X,Y) \
5192 ((X) == (Y) \
5193 || (REG_P (X) && REG_P (Y) \
5194 && REGNO (X) == REGNO (Y) && GET_MODE (X) == GET_MODE (Y)))
5196 /* Do not substitute into clobbers of regs -- this will never result in
5197 valid RTL. */
5198 if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER && REG_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5199 return x;
5201 if (! in_dest && COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, from))
5203 n_occurrences++;
5204 return (unique_copy && n_occurrences > 1 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5207 /* If X and FROM are the same register but different modes, they
5208 will not have been seen as equal above. However, the log links code
5209 will make a LOG_LINKS entry for that case. If we do nothing, we
5210 will try to rerecognize our original insn and, when it succeeds,
5211 we will delete the feeding insn, which is incorrect.
5213 So force this insn not to match in this (rare) case. */
5214 if (! in_dest && code == REG && REG_P (from)
5215 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (x, from))
5216 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
5218 /* If this is an object, we are done unless it is a MEM or LO_SUM, both
5219 of which may contain things that can be combined. */
5220 if (code != MEM && code != LO_SUM && OBJECT_P (x))
5221 return x;
5223 /* It is possible to have a subexpression appear twice in the insn.
5224 Suppose that FROM is a register that appears within TO.
5225 Then, after that subexpression has been scanned once by `subst',
5226 the second time it is scanned, TO may be found. If we were
5227 to scan TO here, we would find FROM within it and create a
5228 self-referent rtl structure which is completely wrong. */
5229 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (x, to))
5230 return to;
5232 /* Parallel asm_operands need special attention because all of the
5233 inputs are shared across the arms. Furthermore, unsharing the
5234 rtl results in recognition failures. Failure to handle this case
5235 specially can result in circular rtl.
5237 Solve this by doing a normal pass across the first entry of the
5238 parallel, and only processing the SET_DESTs of the subsequent
5239 entries. Ug. */
5241 if (code == PARALLEL
5242 && GET_CODE (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0)) == SET
5243 && GET_CODE (SET_SRC (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0))) == ASM_OPERANDS)
5245 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5247 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5248 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5249 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5250 return new_rtx;
5252 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, 0, 0), new_rtx);
5254 for (i = XVECLEN (x, 0) - 1; i >= 1; i--)
5256 rtx dest = SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i));
5258 if (!REG_P (dest)
5259 && GET_CODE (dest) != CC0
5260 && GET_CODE (dest) != PC)
5262 new_rtx = subst (dest, from, to, 0, 0, unique_copy);
5264 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing fails. */
5265 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5266 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5267 return new_rtx;
5269 SUBST (SET_DEST (XVECEXP (x, 0, i)), new_rtx);
5273 else
5275 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
5276 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
5278 /* We don't need to process a SET_DEST that is a register, CC0,
5279 or PC, so set up to skip this common case. All other cases
5280 where we want to suppress replacing something inside a
5281 SET_SRC are handled via the IN_DEST operand. */
5282 if (code == SET
5283 && (REG_P (SET_DEST (x))
5284 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == CC0
5285 || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == PC))
5286 fmt = "ie";
5288 /* Trying to simplify the operands of a widening MULT is not likely
5289 to create RTL matching a machine insn. */
5290 if (code == MULT
5291 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5292 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
5293 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5294 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
5295 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
5296 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0))
5297 && from == to)
5298 return x;
5301 /* Get the mode of operand 0 in case X is now a SIGN_EXTEND of a
5302 constant. */
5303 if (fmt[0] == 'e')
5304 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5306 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
5308 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
5310 int j;
5311 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
5313 if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from))
5315 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences
5316 ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5317 n_occurrences++;
5319 else
5321 new_rtx = subst (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from, to, 0, 0,
5322 unique_copy);
5324 /* If this substitution failed, this whole thing
5325 fails. */
5326 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER
5327 && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5328 return new_rtx;
5331 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
5334 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
5336 /* If this is a register being set, ignore it. */
5337 new_rtx = XEXP (x, i);
5338 if (in_dest
5339 && i == 0
5340 && (((code == SUBREG || code == ZERO_EXTRACT)
5341 && REG_P (new_rtx))
5342 || code == STRICT_LOW_PART))
5345 else if (COMBINE_RTX_EQUAL_P (XEXP (x, i), from))
5347 /* In general, don't install a subreg involving two
5348 modes not tieable. It can worsen register
5349 allocation, and can even make invalid reload
5350 insns, since the reg inside may need to be copied
5351 from in the outside mode, and that may be invalid
5352 if it is an fp reg copied in integer mode.
5354 We allow two exceptions to this: It is valid if
5355 it is inside another SUBREG and the mode of that
5356 SUBREG and the mode of the inside of TO is
5357 tieable and it is valid if X is a SET that copies
5358 FROM to CC0. */
5360 if (GET_CODE (to) == SUBREG
5361 && ! MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (to),
5362 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to)))
5363 && ! (code == SUBREG
5364 && MODES_TIEABLE_P (GET_MODE (x),
5365 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (to))))
5366 && (!HAVE_cc0
5367 || (! (code == SET
5368 && i == 1
5369 && XEXP (x, 0) == cc0_rtx))))
5370 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5372 if (code == SUBREG
5373 && REG_P (to)
5374 && REGNO (to) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
5375 && simplify_subreg_regno (REGNO (to), GET_MODE (to),
5376 SUBREG_BYTE (x),
5377 GET_MODE (x)) < 0)
5378 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (VOIDmode, const0_rtx);
5380 new_rtx = (unique_copy && n_occurrences ? copy_rtx (to) : to);
5381 n_occurrences++;
5383 else
5384 /* If we are in a SET_DEST, suppress most cases unless we
5385 have gone inside a MEM, in which case we want to
5386 simplify the address. We assume here that things that
5387 are actually part of the destination have their inner
5388 parts in the first expression. This is true for SUBREG,
5389 STRICT_LOW_PART, and ZERO_EXTRACT, which are the only
5390 things aside from REG and MEM that should appear in a
5391 SET_DEST. */
5392 new_rtx = subst (XEXP (x, i), from, to,
5393 (((in_dest
5394 && (code == SUBREG || code == STRICT_LOW_PART
5395 || code == ZERO_EXTRACT))
5396 || code == SET)
5397 && i == 0),
5398 code == IF_THEN_ELSE && i == 0,
5399 unique_copy);
5401 /* If we found that we will have to reject this combination,
5402 indicate that by returning the CLOBBER ourselves, rather than
5403 an expression containing it. This will speed things up as
5404 well as prevent accidents where two CLOBBERs are considered
5405 to be equal, thus producing an incorrect simplification. */
5407 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == CLOBBER && XEXP (new_rtx, 0) == const0_rtx)
5408 return new_rtx;
5410 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
5412 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5414 x = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), new_rtx,
5415 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)),
5416 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5417 if (! x)
5418 x = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5420 else if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx)
5421 && GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
5423 x = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
5424 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
5425 gcc_assert (x);
5427 else
5428 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
5433 /* Check if we are loading something from the constant pool via float
5434 extension; in this case we would undo compress_float_constant
5435 optimization and degenerate constant load to an immediate value. */
5436 if (GET_CODE (x) == FLOAT_EXTEND
5437 && MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5438 && MEM_READONLY_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5440 rtx tmp = avoid_constant_pool_reference (x);
5441 if (x != tmp)
5442 return x;
5445 /* Try to simplify X. If the simplification changed the code, it is likely
5446 that further simplification will help, so loop, but limit the number
5447 of repetitions that will be performed. */
5449 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
5451 /* If X is sufficiently simple, don't bother trying to do anything
5452 with it. */
5453 if (code != CONST_INT && code != REG && code != CLOBBER)
5454 x = combine_simplify_rtx (x, op0_mode, in_dest, in_cond);
5456 if (GET_CODE (x) == code)
5457 break;
5459 code = GET_CODE (x);
5461 /* We no longer know the original mode of operand 0 since we
5462 have changed the form of X) */
5463 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5466 return x;
5469 /* Simplify X, a piece of RTL. We just operate on the expression at the
5470 outer level; call `subst' to simplify recursively. Return the new
5471 expression.
5473 OP0_MODE is the original mode of XEXP (x, 0). IN_DEST is nonzero
5474 if we are inside a SET_DEST. IN_COND is nonzero if we are at the top level
5475 of a condition. */
5477 static rtx
5478 combine_simplify_rtx (rtx x, machine_mode op0_mode, int in_dest,
5479 int in_cond)
5481 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
5482 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
5483 rtx temp;
5484 int i;
5486 /* If this is a commutative operation, put a constant last and a complex
5487 expression first. We don't need to do this for comparisons here. */
5488 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x)
5489 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5491 temp = XEXP (x, 0);
5492 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5493 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), temp);
5496 /* Try to fold this expression in case we have constants that weren't
5497 present before. */
5498 temp = 0;
5499 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
5501 case RTX_UNARY:
5502 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5503 op0_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5504 temp = simplify_unary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), op0_mode);
5505 break;
5506 case RTX_COMPARE:
5507 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
5509 machine_mode cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
5510 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5512 cmp_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1));
5513 if (cmp_mode == VOIDmode)
5514 cmp_mode = op0_mode;
5516 temp = simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, cmp_mode,
5517 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5519 break;
5520 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
5521 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
5522 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5523 break;
5524 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
5525 case RTX_TERNARY:
5526 temp = simplify_ternary_operation (code, mode, op0_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5527 XEXP (x, 1), XEXP (x, 2));
5528 break;
5529 default:
5530 break;
5533 if (temp)
5535 x = temp;
5536 code = GET_CODE (temp);
5537 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5538 mode = GET_MODE (temp);
5541 /* If this is a simple operation applied to an IF_THEN_ELSE, try
5542 applying it to the arms of the IF_THEN_ELSE. This often simplifies
5543 things. Check for cases where both arms are testing the same
5544 condition.
5546 Don't do anything if all operands are very simple. */
5548 if ((BINARY_P (x)
5549 && ((!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5550 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5551 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))
5552 || (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5553 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SUBREG
5554 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 1)))))))
5555 || (UNARY_P (x)
5556 && (!OBJECT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5557 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5558 && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))))))
5560 rtx cond, true_rtx, false_rtx;
5562 cond = if_then_else_cond (x, &true_rtx, &false_rtx);
5563 if (cond != 0
5564 /* If everything is a comparison, what we have is highly unlikely
5565 to be simpler, so don't use it. */
5566 && ! (COMPARISON_P (x)
5567 && (COMPARISON_P (true_rtx) || COMPARISON_P (false_rtx))))
5569 rtx cop1 = const0_rtx;
5570 enum rtx_code cond_code = simplify_comparison (NE, &cond, &cop1);
5572 if (cond_code == NE && COMPARISON_P (cond))
5573 return x;
5575 /* Simplify the alternative arms; this may collapse the true and
5576 false arms to store-flag values. Be careful to use copy_rtx
5577 here since true_rtx or false_rtx might share RTL with x as a
5578 result of the if_then_else_cond call above. */
5579 true_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (true_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5580 false_rtx = subst (copy_rtx (false_rtx), pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
5582 /* If true_rtx and false_rtx are not general_operands, an if_then_else
5583 is unlikely to be simpler. */
5584 if (general_operand (true_rtx, VOIDmode)
5585 && general_operand (false_rtx, VOIDmode))
5587 enum rtx_code reversed;
5589 /* Restarting if we generate a store-flag expression will cause
5590 us to loop. Just drop through in this case. */
5592 /* If the result values are STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero, we can
5593 just make the comparison operation. */
5594 if (true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5595 x = simplify_gen_relational (cond_code, mode, VOIDmode,
5596 cond, cop1);
5597 else if (true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
5598 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5599 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5600 != UNKNOWN))
5601 x = simplify_gen_relational (reversed, mode, VOIDmode,
5602 cond, cop1);
5604 /* Likewise, we can make the negate of a comparison operation
5605 if the result values are - STORE_FLAG_VALUE and zero. */
5606 else if (CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
5607 && INTVAL (true_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5608 && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
5609 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5610 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5611 mode, VOIDmode,
5612 cond, cop1),
5613 mode);
5614 else if (CONST_INT_P (false_rtx)
5615 && INTVAL (false_rtx) == - STORE_FLAG_VALUE
5616 && true_rtx == const0_rtx
5617 && ((reversed = reversed_comparison_code_parts
5618 (cond_code, cond, cop1, NULL))
5619 != UNKNOWN))
5620 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
5621 simplify_gen_relational (reversed,
5622 mode, VOIDmode,
5623 cond, cop1),
5624 mode);
5625 else
5626 return gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (mode,
5627 simplify_gen_relational (cond_code,
5628 mode,
5629 VOIDmode,
5630 cond,
5631 cop1),
5632 true_rtx, false_rtx);
5634 code = GET_CODE (x);
5635 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5640 /* First see if we can apply the inverse distributive law. */
5641 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS
5642 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR)
5644 x = apply_distributive_law (x);
5645 code = GET_CODE (x);
5646 op0_mode = VOIDmode;
5649 /* If CODE is an associative operation not otherwise handled, see if we
5650 can associate some operands. This can win if they are constants or
5651 if they are logically related (i.e. (a & b) & a). */
5652 if ((code == PLUS || code == MINUS || code == MULT || code == DIV
5653 || code == AND || code == IOR || code == XOR
5654 || code == SMAX || code == SMIN || code == UMAX || code == UMIN)
5655 && ((INTEGRAL_MODE_P (mode) && code != DIV)
5656 || (flag_associative_math && FLOAT_MODE_P (mode))))
5658 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == code)
5660 rtx other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
5661 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5662 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5663 rtx inner;
5665 /* Make sure we pass the constant operand if any as the second
5666 one if this is a commutative operation. */
5667 if (CONSTANT_P (inner_op0) && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5668 std::swap (inner_op0, inner_op1);
5669 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code == MINUS ? PLUS
5670 : code == DIV ? MULT
5671 : code,
5672 mode, inner_op0, inner_op1);
5674 /* For commutative operations, try the other pair if that one
5675 didn't simplify. */
5676 if (inner == 0 && COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
5678 other = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
5679 inner = simplify_binary_operation (code, mode,
5680 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5681 XEXP (x, 1));
5684 if (inner)
5685 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, other, inner);
5689 /* A little bit of algebraic simplification here. */
5690 switch (code)
5692 case MEM:
5693 /* Ensure that our address has any ASHIFTs converted to MULT in case
5694 address-recognizing predicates are called later. */
5695 temp = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), MEM);
5696 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), temp);
5697 break;
5699 case SUBREG:
5700 if (op0_mode == VOIDmode)
5701 op0_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
5703 /* See if this can be moved to simplify_subreg. */
5704 if (CONSTANT_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5705 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5706 /* Don't call gen_lowpart if the inner mode
5707 is VOIDmode and we cannot simplify it, as SUBREG without
5708 inner mode is invalid. */
5709 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)) != VOIDmode
5710 || gen_lowpart_common (mode, SUBREG_REG (x))))
5711 return gen_lowpart (mode, SUBREG_REG (x));
5713 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))) == MODE_CC)
5714 break;
5716 rtx temp;
5717 temp = simplify_subreg (mode, SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode,
5718 SUBREG_BYTE (x));
5719 if (temp)
5720 return temp;
5722 /* If op is known to have all lower bits zero, the result is zero. */
5723 if (!in_dest
5724 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode)
5725 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5726 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op0_mode)
5727 && subreg_lowpart_offset (mode, op0_mode) == SUBREG_BYTE (x)
5728 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op0_mode)
5729 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (x), op0_mode)
5730 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)
5731 return CONST0_RTX (mode);
5734 /* Don't change the mode of the MEM if that would change the meaning
5735 of the address. */
5736 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5737 && (MEM_VOLATILE_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
5738 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (x), 0),
5739 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))
5740 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (mode, const0_rtx);
5742 /* Note that we cannot do any narrowing for non-constants since
5743 we might have been counting on using the fact that some bits were
5744 zero. We now do this in the SET. */
5746 break;
5748 case NEG:
5749 temp = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0));
5751 /* For C equal to the width of MODE minus 1, (neg (ashiftrt X C)) can be
5752 replaced by (lshiftrt X C). This will convert
5753 (neg (sign_extract X 1 Y)) to (zero_extract X 1 Y). */
5755 if (GET_CODE (temp) == ASHIFTRT
5756 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (temp, 1))
5757 && INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1)
5758 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (temp, 0),
5759 INTVAL (XEXP (temp, 1)));
5761 /* If X has only a single bit that might be nonzero, say, bit I, convert
5762 (neg X) to (ashiftrt (ashift X C-I) C-I) where C is the bitsize of
5763 MODE minus 1. This will convert (neg (zero_extract X 1 Y)) to
5764 (sign_extract X 1 Y). But only do this if TEMP isn't a register
5765 or a SUBREG of one since we'd be making the expression more
5766 complex if it was just a register. */
5768 if (!REG_P (temp)
5769 && ! (GET_CODE (temp) == SUBREG
5770 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (temp)))
5771 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (temp, mode))) >= 0)
5773 rtx temp1 = simplify_shift_const
5774 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5775 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, temp,
5776 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i),
5777 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
5779 /* If all we did was surround TEMP with the two shifts, we
5780 haven't improved anything, so don't use it. Otherwise,
5781 we are better off with TEMP1. */
5782 if (GET_CODE (temp1) != ASHIFTRT
5783 || GET_CODE (XEXP (temp1, 0)) != ASHIFT
5784 || XEXP (XEXP (temp1, 0), 0) != temp)
5785 return temp1;
5787 break;
5789 case TRUNCATE:
5790 /* We can't handle truncation to a partial integer mode here
5791 because we don't know the real bitsize of the partial
5792 integer mode. */
5793 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_PARTIAL_INT)
5794 break;
5796 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
5797 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
5798 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
5799 GET_MODE_MASK (mode), 0));
5801 /* We can truncate a constant value and return it. */
5802 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
5803 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)), mode);
5805 /* Similarly to what we do in simplify-rtx.c, a truncate of a register
5806 whose value is a comparison can be replaced with a subreg if
5807 STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. */
5808 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5809 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
5810 && (temp = get_last_value (XEXP (x, 0)))
5811 && COMPARISON_P (temp))
5812 return gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
5813 break;
5815 case CONST:
5816 /* (const (const X)) can become (const X). Do it this way rather than
5817 returning the inner CONST since CONST can be shared with a
5818 REG_EQUAL note. */
5819 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CONST)
5820 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
5821 break;
5823 case LO_SUM:
5824 /* Convert (lo_sum (high FOO) FOO) to FOO. This is necessary so we
5825 can add in an offset. find_split_point will split this address up
5826 again if it doesn't match. */
5827 if (HAVE_lo_sum && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == HIGH
5828 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
5829 return XEXP (x, 1);
5830 break;
5832 case PLUS:
5833 /* (plus (xor (and <foo> (const_int pow2 - 1)) <c>) <-c>)
5834 when c is (const_int (pow2 + 1) / 2) is a sign extension of a
5835 bit-field and can be replaced by either a sign_extend or a
5836 sign_extract. The `and' may be a zero_extend and the two
5837 <c>, -<c> constants may be reversed. */
5838 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
5839 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5840 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5841 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) == -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
5842 && ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))) >= 0
5843 || (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0)
5844 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5845 && ((GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == AND
5846 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5847 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 1))
5848 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (i + 1)) - 1))
5849 || (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
5850 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0)))
5851 == (unsigned int) i + 1))))
5852 return simplify_shift_const
5853 (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5854 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5855 XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), 0),
5856 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1)),
5857 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - (i + 1));
5859 /* If only the low-order bit of X is possibly nonzero, (plus x -1)
5860 can become (ashiftrt (ashift (xor x 1) C) C) where C is
5861 the bitsize of the mode - 1. This allows simplification of
5862 "a = (b & 8) == 0;" */
5863 if (XEXP (x, 1) == constm1_rtx
5864 && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 0))
5865 && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
5866 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))))
5867 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) == 1)
5868 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFTRT, mode,
5869 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
5870 gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx),
5871 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
5872 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1);
5874 /* If we are adding two things that have no bits in common, convert
5875 the addition into an IOR. This will often be further simplified,
5876 for example in cases like ((a & 1) + (a & 2)), which can
5877 become a & 3. */
5879 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
5880 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
5881 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), mode)) == 0)
5883 /* Try to simplify the expression further. */
5884 rtx tor = simplify_gen_binary (IOR, mode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
5885 temp = combine_simplify_rtx (tor, VOIDmode, in_dest, 0);
5887 /* If we could, great. If not, do not go ahead with the IOR
5888 replacement, since PLUS appears in many special purpose
5889 address arithmetic instructions. */
5890 if (GET_CODE (temp) != CLOBBER
5891 && (GET_CODE (temp) != IOR
5892 || ((XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 0)
5893 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 1))
5894 && (XEXP (temp, 0) != XEXP (x, 1)
5895 || XEXP (temp, 1) != XEXP (x, 0)))))
5896 return temp;
5899 /* Canonicalize x + x into x << 1. */
5900 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
5901 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1))
5902 && !side_effects_p (XEXP (x, 0)))
5903 return simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), const1_rtx);
5905 break;
5907 case MINUS:
5908 /* (minus <foo> (and <foo> (const_int -pow2))) becomes
5909 (and <foo> (const_int pow2-1)) */
5910 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == AND
5911 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))
5912 && exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1))) >= 0
5913 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0), XEXP (x, 0)))
5914 return simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
5915 -INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1)) - 1);
5916 break;
5918 case MULT:
5919 /* If we have (mult (plus A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
5920 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. This
5921 occurs mostly in addresses, often when unrolling loops. */
5923 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS)
5925 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
5926 if (result)
5927 return result;
5930 /* Try simplify a*(b/c) as (a*b)/c. */
5931 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) && flag_associative_math
5932 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == DIV)
5934 rtx tem = simplify_binary_operation (MULT, mode,
5935 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
5936 XEXP (x, 1));
5937 if (tem)
5938 return simplify_gen_binary (DIV, mode, tem, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
5940 break;
5942 case UDIV:
5943 /* If this is a divide by a power of two, treat it as a shift if
5944 its first operand is a shift. */
5945 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
5946 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0
5947 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
5948 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
5949 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
5950 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
5951 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATERT))
5952 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode, XEXP (x, 0), i);
5953 break;
5955 case EQ: case NE:
5956 case GT: case GTU: case GE: case GEU:
5957 case LT: case LTU: case LE: case LEU:
5958 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
5959 case UNGT: case UNGE:
5960 case UNLT: case UNLE:
5961 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
5962 /* If the first operand is a condition code, we can't do anything
5963 with it. */
5964 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == COMPARE
5965 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) != MODE_CC
5966 && ! CC0_P (XEXP (x, 0))))
5968 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
5969 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
5970 enum rtx_code new_code;
5972 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE)
5973 op1 = XEXP (op0, 1), op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
5975 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
5976 new_code = simplify_comparison (code, &op0, &op1);
5978 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1, we can convert (ne x 0) to simply X
5979 if only the low-order bit is possibly nonzero in X (such as when
5980 X is a ZERO_EXTRACT of one bit). Similarly, we can convert EQ to
5981 (xor X 1) or (minus 1 X); we use the former. Finally, if X is
5982 known to be either 0 or -1, NE becomes a NEG and EQ becomes
5983 (plus X 1).
5985 Remove any ZERO_EXTRACT we made when thinking this was a
5986 comparison. It may now be simpler to use, e.g., an AND. If a
5987 ZERO_EXTRACT is indeed appropriate, it will be placed back by
5988 the call to make_compound_operation in the SET case.
5990 Don't apply these optimizations if the caller would
5991 prefer a comparison rather than a value.
5992 E.g., for the condition in an IF_THEN_ELSE most targets need
5993 an explicit comparison. */
5995 if (in_cond)
5998 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
5999 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6000 && op1 == const0_rtx
6001 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6002 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6003 return gen_lowpart (mode,
6004 expand_compound_operation (op0));
6006 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6007 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6008 && op1 == const0_rtx
6009 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6010 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6011 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6013 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6014 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6015 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6016 mode);
6019 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6020 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6021 && op1 == const0_rtx
6022 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6023 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6025 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6026 return simplify_gen_binary (XOR, mode,
6027 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6028 const1_rtx);
6031 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1
6032 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6033 && op1 == const0_rtx
6034 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6035 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6036 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6038 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6039 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), 1);
6042 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1, we have cases similar to
6043 those above. */
6044 if (in_cond)
6047 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6048 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6049 && op1 == const0_rtx
6050 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6051 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6052 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6053 return gen_lowpart (mode,
6054 expand_compound_operation (op0));
6056 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6057 && new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6058 && op1 == const0_rtx
6059 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6060 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6062 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6063 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6064 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6065 mode);
6068 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6069 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6070 && op1 == const0_rtx
6071 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6072 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode)
6073 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
6075 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6076 return simplify_gen_unary (NOT, mode,
6077 gen_lowpart (mode, op0),
6078 mode);
6081 /* If X is 0/1, (eq X 0) is X-1. */
6082 else if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
6083 && new_code == EQ && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6084 && op1 == const0_rtx
6085 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6086 && nonzero_bits (op0, mode) == 1)
6088 op0 = expand_compound_operation (op0);
6089 return plus_constant (mode, gen_lowpart (mode, op0), -1);
6092 /* If STORE_FLAG_VALUE says to just test the sign bit and X has just
6093 one bit that might be nonzero, we can convert (ne x 0) to
6094 (ashift x c) where C puts the bit in the sign bit. Remove any
6095 AND with STORE_FLAG_VALUE when we are done, since we are only
6096 going to test the sign bit. */
6097 if (new_code == NE && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6098 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6099 && val_signbit_p (mode, STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
6100 && op1 == const0_rtx
6101 && mode == GET_MODE (op0)
6102 && (i = exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (op0, mode))) >= 0)
6104 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6105 expand_compound_operation (op0),
6106 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1 - i);
6107 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && XEXP (x, 1) == const_true_rtx)
6108 return XEXP (x, 0);
6109 else
6110 return x;
6113 /* If the code changed, return a whole new comparison.
6114 We also need to avoid using SUBST in cases where
6115 simplify_comparison has widened a comparison with a CONST_INT,
6116 since in that case the wider CONST_INT may fail the sanity
6117 checks in do_SUBST. */
6118 if (new_code != code
6119 || (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6120 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))
6121 && GET_MODE (op0) != GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1))))
6122 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, mode, op0, op1);
6124 /* Otherwise, keep this operation, but maybe change its operands.
6125 This also converts (ne (compare FOO BAR) 0) to (ne FOO BAR). */
6126 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), op0);
6127 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), op1);
6129 break;
6131 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
6132 return simplify_if_then_else (x);
6134 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
6135 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
6136 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6137 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6138 /* If we are processing SET_DEST, we are done. */
6139 if (in_dest)
6140 return x;
6142 return expand_compound_operation (x);
6144 case SET:
6145 return simplify_set (x);
6147 case AND:
6148 case IOR:
6149 return simplify_logical (x);
6151 case ASHIFT:
6152 case LSHIFTRT:
6153 case ASHIFTRT:
6154 case ROTATE:
6155 case ROTATERT:
6156 /* If this is a shift by a constant amount, simplify it. */
6157 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6158 return simplify_shift_const (x, code, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
6159 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
6161 else if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED && !REG_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
6162 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1),
6163 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)),
6164 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
6165 << exact_log2 (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
6166 - 1,
6167 0));
6168 break;
6170 default:
6171 break;
6174 return x;
6177 /* Simplify X, an IF_THEN_ELSE expression. Return the new expression. */
6179 static rtx
6180 simplify_if_then_else (rtx x)
6182 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6183 rtx cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6184 rtx true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6185 rtx false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6186 enum rtx_code true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6187 int comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6188 rtx temp;
6189 int i;
6190 enum rtx_code false_code;
6191 rtx reversed;
6193 /* Simplify storing of the truth value. */
6194 if (comparison_p && true_rtx == const_true_rtx && false_rtx == const0_rtx)
6195 return simplify_gen_relational (true_code, mode, VOIDmode,
6196 XEXP (cond, 0), XEXP (cond, 1));
6198 /* Also when the truth value has to be reversed. */
6199 if (comparison_p
6200 && true_rtx == const0_rtx && false_rtx == const_true_rtx
6201 && (reversed = reversed_comparison (cond, mode)))
6202 return reversed;
6204 /* Sometimes we can simplify the arm of an IF_THEN_ELSE if a register used
6205 in it is being compared against certain values. Get the true and false
6206 comparisons and see if that says anything about the value of each arm. */
6208 if (comparison_p
6209 && ((false_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL))
6210 != UNKNOWN)
6211 && REG_P (XEXP (cond, 0)))
6213 HOST_WIDE_INT nzb;
6214 rtx from = XEXP (cond, 0);
6215 rtx true_val = XEXP (cond, 1);
6216 rtx false_val = true_val;
6217 int swapped = 0;
6219 /* If FALSE_CODE is EQ, swap the codes and arms. */
6221 if (false_code == EQ)
6223 swapped = 1, true_code = EQ, false_code = NE;
6224 std::swap (true_rtx, false_rtx);
6227 /* If we are comparing against zero and the expression being tested has
6228 only a single bit that might be nonzero, that is its value when it is
6229 not equal to zero. Similarly if it is known to be -1 or 0. */
6231 if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6232 && exact_log2 (nzb = nonzero_bits (from, GET_MODE (from))) >= 0)
6234 false_code = EQ;
6235 false_val = gen_int_mode (nzb, GET_MODE (from));
6237 else if (true_code == EQ && true_val == const0_rtx
6238 && (num_sign_bit_copies (from, GET_MODE (from))
6239 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (from))))
6241 false_code = EQ;
6242 false_val = constm1_rtx;
6245 /* Now simplify an arm if we know the value of the register in the
6246 branch and it is used in the arm. Be careful due to the potential
6247 of locally-shared RTL. */
6249 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, true_rtx))
6250 true_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (true_rtx), true_code,
6251 from, true_val),
6252 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6253 if (reg_mentioned_p (from, false_rtx))
6254 false_rtx = subst (known_cond (copy_rtx (false_rtx), false_code,
6255 from, false_val),
6256 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6258 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), swapped ? false_rtx : true_rtx);
6259 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), swapped ? true_rtx : false_rtx);
6261 true_rtx = XEXP (x, 1);
6262 false_rtx = XEXP (x, 2);
6263 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6266 /* If we have (if_then_else FOO (pc) (label_ref BAR)) and FOO can be
6267 reversed, do so to avoid needing two sets of patterns for
6268 subtract-and-branch insns. Similarly if we have a constant in the true
6269 arm, the false arm is the same as the first operand of the comparison, or
6270 the false arm is more complicated than the true arm. */
6272 if (comparison_p
6273 && reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL) != UNKNOWN
6274 && (true_rtx == pc_rtx
6275 || (CONSTANT_P (true_rtx)
6276 && !CONST_INT_P (false_rtx) && false_rtx != pc_rtx)
6277 || true_rtx == const0_rtx
6278 || (OBJECT_P (true_rtx) && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6279 || (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == SUBREG && OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (true_rtx))
6280 && !OBJECT_P (false_rtx))
6281 || reg_mentioned_p (true_rtx, false_rtx)
6282 || rtx_equal_p (false_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))))
6284 true_code = reversed_comparison_code (cond, NULL);
6285 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), reversed_comparison (cond, GET_MODE (cond)));
6286 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), false_rtx);
6287 SUBST (XEXP (x, 2), true_rtx);
6289 std::swap (true_rtx, false_rtx);
6290 cond = XEXP (x, 0);
6292 /* It is possible that the conditional has been simplified out. */
6293 true_code = GET_CODE (cond);
6294 comparison_p = COMPARISON_P (cond);
6297 /* If the two arms are identical, we don't need the comparison. */
6299 if (rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, false_rtx) && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6300 return true_rtx;
6302 /* Convert a == b ? b : a to "a". */
6303 if (true_code == EQ && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6304 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6305 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), false_rtx)
6306 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), true_rtx))
6307 return false_rtx;
6308 else if (true_code == NE && ! side_effects_p (cond)
6309 && !HONOR_NANS (mode)
6310 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6311 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx))
6312 return true_rtx;
6314 /* Look for cases where we have (abs x) or (neg (abs X)). */
6316 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6317 && comparison_p
6318 && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6319 && GET_CODE (false_rtx) == NEG
6320 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (false_rtx, 0))
6321 && rtx_equal_p (true_rtx, XEXP (cond, 0))
6322 && ! side_effects_p (true_rtx))
6323 switch (true_code)
6325 case GT:
6326 case GE:
6327 return simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode);
6328 case LT:
6329 case LE:
6330 return
6331 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
6332 simplify_gen_unary (ABS, mode, true_rtx, mode),
6333 mode);
6334 default:
6335 break;
6338 /* Look for MIN or MAX. */
6340 if ((! FLOAT_MODE_P (mode) || flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
6341 && comparison_p
6342 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 0), true_rtx)
6343 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond, 1), false_rtx)
6344 && ! side_effects_p (cond))
6345 switch (true_code)
6347 case GE:
6348 case GT:
6349 return simplify_gen_binary (SMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6350 case LE:
6351 case LT:
6352 return simplify_gen_binary (SMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6353 case GEU:
6354 case GTU:
6355 return simplify_gen_binary (UMAX, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6356 case LEU:
6357 case LTU:
6358 return simplify_gen_binary (UMIN, mode, true_rtx, false_rtx);
6359 default:
6360 break;
6363 /* If we have (if_then_else COND (OP Z C1) Z) and OP is an identity when its
6364 second operand is zero, this can be done as (OP Z (mult COND C2)) where
6365 C2 = C1 * STORE_FLAG_VALUE. Similarly if OP has an outer ZERO_EXTEND or
6366 SIGN_EXTEND as long as Z is already extended (so we don't destroy it).
6367 We can do this kind of thing in some cases when STORE_FLAG_VALUE is
6368 neither 1 or -1, but it isn't worth checking for. */
6370 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
6371 && comparison_p
6372 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
6373 && ! side_effects_p (x))
6375 rtx t = make_compound_operation (true_rtx, SET);
6376 rtx f = make_compound_operation (false_rtx, SET);
6377 rtx cond_op0 = XEXP (cond, 0);
6378 rtx cond_op1 = XEXP (cond, 1);
6379 enum rtx_code op = UNKNOWN, extend_op = UNKNOWN;
6380 machine_mode m = mode;
6381 rtx z = 0, c1 = NULL_RTX;
6383 if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == MINUS
6384 || GET_CODE (t) == IOR || GET_CODE (t) == XOR
6385 || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFT
6386 || GET_CODE (t) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (t) == ASHIFTRT)
6387 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 0), f))
6388 c1 = XEXP (t, 1), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6390 /* If an identity-zero op is commutative, check whether there
6391 would be a match if we swapped the operands. */
6392 else if ((GET_CODE (t) == PLUS || GET_CODE (t) == IOR
6393 || GET_CODE (t) == XOR)
6394 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (t, 1), f))
6395 c1 = XEXP (t, 0), op = GET_CODE (t), z = f;
6396 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6397 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6398 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6399 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6400 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6401 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6402 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6403 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6404 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6405 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6406 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6407 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6408 > (unsigned int)
6409 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6410 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))))
6412 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6413 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6414 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6416 else if (GET_CODE (t) == SIGN_EXTEND
6417 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6418 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6419 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6420 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6421 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6422 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6423 && (num_sign_bit_copies (f, GET_MODE (f))
6424 > (unsigned int)
6425 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
6426 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))))
6428 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6429 extend_op = SIGN_EXTEND;
6430 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6432 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6433 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6434 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == MINUS
6435 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6436 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR
6437 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFT
6438 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
6439 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == ASHIFTRT)
6440 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
6441 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6442 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))
6443 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0)), f)
6444 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6445 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0))))
6446 == 0))
6448 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6449 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6450 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6452 else if (GET_CODE (t) == ZERO_EXTEND
6453 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == PLUS
6454 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == IOR
6455 || GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0)) == XOR)
6456 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)) == SUBREG
6457 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6458 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))
6459 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1)), f)
6460 && ((nonzero_bits (f, GET_MODE (f))
6461 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 1))))
6462 == 0))
6464 c1 = XEXP (XEXP (t, 0), 0); z = f; op = GET_CODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6465 extend_op = ZERO_EXTEND;
6466 m = GET_MODE (XEXP (t, 0));
6469 if (z)
6471 temp = subst (simplify_gen_relational (true_code, m, VOIDmode,
6472 cond_op0, cond_op1),
6473 pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6474 temp = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, temp,
6475 simplify_gen_binary (MULT, m, c1,
6476 const_true_rtx));
6477 temp = subst (temp, pc_rtx, pc_rtx, 0, 0, 0);
6478 temp = simplify_gen_binary (op, m, gen_lowpart (m, z), temp);
6480 if (extend_op != UNKNOWN)
6481 temp = simplify_gen_unary (extend_op, mode, temp, m);
6483 return temp;
6487 /* If we have (if_then_else (ne A 0) C1 0) and either A is known to be 0 or
6488 1 and C1 is a single bit or A is known to be 0 or -1 and C1 is the
6489 negation of a single bit, we can convert this operation to a shift. We
6490 can actually do this more generally, but it doesn't seem worth it. */
6492 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6493 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6494 && ((1 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6495 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)
6496 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6497 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
6498 && (i = exact_log2 (-UINTVAL (true_rtx))) >= 0)))
6499 return
6500 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
6501 gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (cond, 0)), i);
6503 /* (IF_THEN_ELSE (NE REG 0) (0) (8)) is REG for nonzero_bits (REG) == 8. */
6504 if (true_code == NE && XEXP (cond, 1) == const0_rtx
6505 && false_rtx == const0_rtx && CONST_INT_P (true_rtx)
6506 && GET_MODE (XEXP (cond, 0)) == mode
6507 && (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
6508 == nonzero_bits (XEXP (cond, 0), mode)
6509 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (true_rtx) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))) >= 0)
6510 return XEXP (cond, 0);
6512 return x;
6515 /* Simplify X, a SET expression. Return the new expression. */
6517 static rtx
6518 simplify_set (rtx x)
6520 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
6521 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
6522 machine_mode mode
6523 = GET_MODE (src) != VOIDmode ? GET_MODE (src) : GET_MODE (dest);
6524 rtx_insn *other_insn;
6525 rtx *cc_use;
6527 /* (set (pc) (return)) gets written as (return). */
6528 if (GET_CODE (dest) == PC && ANY_RETURN_P (src))
6529 return src;
6531 /* Now that we know for sure which bits of SRC we are using, see if we can
6532 simplify the expression for the object knowing that we only need the
6533 low-order bits. */
6535 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
6537 src = force_to_mode (src, mode, ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, 0);
6538 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6541 /* If we are setting CC0 or if the source is a COMPARE, look for the use of
6542 the comparison result and try to simplify it unless we already have used
6543 undobuf.other_insn. */
6544 if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_CC
6545 || GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE
6546 || CC0_P (dest))
6547 && (cc_use = find_single_use (dest, subst_insn, &other_insn)) != 0
6548 && (undobuf.other_insn == 0 || other_insn == undobuf.other_insn)
6549 && COMPARISON_P (*cc_use)
6550 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), dest))
6552 enum rtx_code old_code = GET_CODE (*cc_use);
6553 enum rtx_code new_code;
6554 rtx op0, op1, tmp;
6555 int other_changed = 0;
6556 rtx inner_compare = NULL_RTX;
6557 machine_mode compare_mode = GET_MODE (dest);
6559 if (GET_CODE (src) == COMPARE)
6561 op0 = XEXP (src, 0), op1 = XEXP (src, 1);
6562 if (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE && op1 == const0_rtx)
6564 inner_compare = op0;
6565 op0 = XEXP (inner_compare, 0), op1 = XEXP (inner_compare, 1);
6568 else
6569 op0 = src, op1 = CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (src));
6571 tmp = simplify_relational_operation (old_code, compare_mode, VOIDmode,
6572 op0, op1);
6573 if (!tmp)
6574 new_code = old_code;
6575 else if (!CONSTANT_P (tmp))
6577 new_code = GET_CODE (tmp);
6578 op0 = XEXP (tmp, 0);
6579 op1 = XEXP (tmp, 1);
6581 else
6583 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn);
6584 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6585 SUBST (*cc_use, tmp);
6587 /* Attempt to simplify CC user. */
6588 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
6590 rtx new_rtx = simplify_rtx (SET_SRC (pat));
6591 if (new_rtx != NULL_RTX)
6592 SUBST (SET_SRC (pat), new_rtx);
6595 /* Convert X into a no-op move. */
6596 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), pc_rtx);
6597 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), pc_rtx);
6598 return x;
6601 /* Simplify our comparison, if possible. */
6602 new_code = simplify_comparison (new_code, &op0, &op1);
6604 #ifdef SELECT_CC_MODE
6605 /* If this machine has CC modes other than CCmode, check to see if we
6606 need to use a different CC mode here. */
6607 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_CC)
6608 compare_mode = GET_MODE (op0);
6609 else if (inner_compare
6610 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (inner_compare)) == MODE_CC
6611 && new_code == old_code
6612 && op0 == XEXP (inner_compare, 0)
6613 && op1 == XEXP (inner_compare, 1))
6614 compare_mode = GET_MODE (inner_compare);
6615 else
6616 compare_mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (new_code, op0, op1);
6618 /* If the mode changed, we have to change SET_DEST, the mode in the
6619 compare, and the mode in the place SET_DEST is used. If SET_DEST is
6620 a hard register, just build new versions with the proper mode. If it
6621 is a pseudo, we lose unless it is only time we set the pseudo, in
6622 which case we can safely change its mode. */
6623 if (!HAVE_cc0 && compare_mode != GET_MODE (dest))
6625 if (can_change_dest_mode (dest, 0, compare_mode))
6627 unsigned int regno = REGNO (dest);
6628 rtx new_dest;
6630 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
6631 new_dest = gen_rtx_REG (compare_mode, regno);
6632 else
6634 SUBST_MODE (regno_reg_rtx[regno], compare_mode);
6635 new_dest = regno_reg_rtx[regno];
6638 SUBST (SET_DEST (x), new_dest);
6639 SUBST (XEXP (*cc_use, 0), new_dest);
6640 other_changed = 1;
6642 dest = new_dest;
6645 #endif /* SELECT_CC_MODE */
6647 /* If the code changed, we have to build a new comparison in
6648 undobuf.other_insn. */
6649 if (new_code != old_code)
6651 int other_changed_previously = other_changed;
6652 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
6653 rtx old_cc_use = *cc_use;
6655 SUBST (*cc_use, gen_rtx_fmt_ee (new_code, GET_MODE (*cc_use),
6656 dest, const0_rtx));
6657 other_changed = 1;
6659 /* If the only change we made was to change an EQ into an NE or
6660 vice versa, OP0 has only one bit that might be nonzero, and OP1
6661 is zero, check if changing the user of the condition code will
6662 produce a valid insn. If it won't, we can keep the original code
6663 in that insn by surrounding our operation with an XOR. */
6665 if (((old_code == NE && new_code == EQ)
6666 || (old_code == EQ && new_code == NE))
6667 && ! other_changed_previously && op1 == const0_rtx
6668 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
6669 && exact_log2 (mask = nonzero_bits (op0, GET_MODE (op0))) >= 0)
6671 rtx pat = PATTERN (other_insn), note = 0;
6673 if ((recog_for_combine (&pat, other_insn, &note) < 0
6674 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)))
6676 *cc_use = old_cc_use;
6677 other_changed = 0;
6679 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
6680 gen_int_mode (mask,
6681 GET_MODE (op0)));
6686 if (other_changed)
6687 undobuf.other_insn = other_insn;
6689 /* Don't generate a compare of a CC with 0, just use that CC. */
6690 if (GET_MODE (op0) == compare_mode && op1 == const0_rtx)
6692 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), op0);
6693 src = SET_SRC (x);
6695 /* Otherwise, if we didn't previously have the same COMPARE we
6696 want, create it from scratch. */
6697 else if (GET_CODE (src) != COMPARE || GET_MODE (src) != compare_mode
6698 || XEXP (src, 0) != op0 || XEXP (src, 1) != op1)
6700 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), gen_rtx_COMPARE (compare_mode, op0, op1));
6701 src = SET_SRC (x);
6704 else
6706 /* Get SET_SRC in a form where we have placed back any
6707 compound expressions. Then do the checks below. */
6708 src = make_compound_operation (src, SET);
6709 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), src);
6712 /* If we have (set x (subreg:m1 (op:m2 ...) 0)) with OP being some operation,
6713 and X being a REG or (subreg (reg)), we may be able to convert this to
6714 (set (subreg:m2 x) (op)).
6716 We can always do this if M1 is narrower than M2 because that means that
6717 we only care about the low bits of the result.
6719 However, on machines without WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS defined, we cannot
6720 perform a narrower operation than requested since the high-order bits will
6721 be undefined. On machine where it is defined, this transformation is safe
6722 as long as M1 and M2 have the same number of words. */
6724 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6725 && !OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (src))
6726 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1))
6727 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
6728 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6729 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD))
6730 && (WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
6731 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src))
6732 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6733 #ifdef CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS
6734 && ! (REG_P (dest) && REGNO (dest) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
6735 && REG_CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_P (REGNO (dest),
6736 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6737 GET_MODE (src)))
6738 #endif
6739 && (REG_P (dest)
6740 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
6741 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (dest)))))
6743 SUBST (SET_DEST (x),
6744 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)),
6745 dest));
6746 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), SUBREG_REG (src));
6748 src = SET_SRC (x), dest = SET_DEST (x);
6751 /* If we have (set (cc0) (subreg ...)), we try to remove the subreg
6752 in SRC. */
6753 if (dest == cc0_rtx
6754 && GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG
6755 && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6756 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (src))
6757 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))))
6759 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (src);
6760 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
6762 /* Here we make sure that we don't have a sign bit on. */
6763 if (val_signbit_known_clear_p (GET_MODE (src),
6764 nonzero_bits (inner, inner_mode)))
6766 SUBST (SET_SRC (x), inner);
6767 src = SET_SRC (x);
6771 /* If we have (set FOO (subreg:M (mem:N BAR) 0)) with M wider than N, this
6772 would require a paradoxical subreg. Replace the subreg with a
6773 zero_extend to avoid the reload that would otherwise be required. */
6775 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src)
6776 && INTEGRAL_MODE_P (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6777 && LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))) != UNKNOWN
6778 && SUBREG_BYTE (src) == 0
6779 && paradoxical_subreg_p (src)
6780 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (src)))
6782 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6783 gen_rtx_fmt_e (LOAD_EXTEND_OP (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (src))),
6784 GET_MODE (src), SUBREG_REG (src)));
6786 src = SET_SRC (x);
6789 /* If we don't have a conditional move, SET_SRC is an IF_THEN_ELSE, and we
6790 are comparing an item known to be 0 or -1 against 0, use a logical
6791 operation instead. Check for one of the arms being an IOR of the other
6792 arm with some value. We compute three terms to be IOR'ed together. In
6793 practice, at most two will be nonzero. Then we do the IOR's. */
6795 if (GET_CODE (dest) != PC
6796 && GET_CODE (src) == IF_THEN_ELSE
6797 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) == MODE_INT
6798 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == EQ || GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE)
6799 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1) == const0_rtx
6800 && GET_MODE (src) == GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
6801 && (!HAVE_conditional_move
6802 || ! can_conditionally_move_p (GET_MODE (src)))
6803 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6804 GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)))
6805 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))))
6806 && ! side_effects_p (src))
6808 rtx true_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6809 ? XEXP (src, 1) : XEXP (src, 2));
6810 rtx false_rtx = (GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == NE
6811 ? XEXP (src, 2) : XEXP (src, 1));
6812 rtx term1 = const0_rtx, term2, term3;
6814 if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6815 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx))
6816 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6817 else if (GET_CODE (true_rtx) == IOR
6818 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (true_rtx, 1), false_rtx))
6819 term1 = false_rtx, true_rtx = XEXP (true_rtx, 0), false_rtx = const0_rtx;
6820 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6821 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx))
6822 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6823 else if (GET_CODE (false_rtx) == IOR
6824 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (false_rtx, 1), true_rtx))
6825 term1 = true_rtx, false_rtx = XEXP (false_rtx, 0), true_rtx = const0_rtx;
6827 term2 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6828 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0), true_rtx);
6829 term3 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (src),
6830 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (src),
6831 XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0),
6832 GET_MODE (src)),
6833 false_rtx);
6835 SUBST (SET_SRC (x),
6836 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6837 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, GET_MODE (src),
6838 term1, term2),
6839 term3));
6841 src = SET_SRC (x);
6844 /* If either SRC or DEST is a CLOBBER of (const_int 0), make this
6845 whole thing fail. */
6846 if (GET_CODE (src) == CLOBBER && XEXP (src, 0) == const0_rtx)
6847 return src;
6848 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == CLOBBER && XEXP (dest, 0) == const0_rtx)
6849 return dest;
6850 else
6851 /* Convert this into a field assignment operation, if possible. */
6852 return make_field_assignment (x);
6855 /* Simplify, X, and AND, IOR, or XOR operation, and return the simplified
6856 result. */
6858 static rtx
6859 simplify_logical (rtx x)
6861 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
6862 rtx op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6863 rtx op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6865 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6867 case AND:
6868 /* We can call simplify_and_const_int only if we don't lose
6869 any (sign) bits when converting INTVAL (op1) to
6870 "unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT". */
6871 if (CONST_INT_P (op1)
6872 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
6873 || INTVAL (op1) > 0))
6875 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, mode, op0, INTVAL (op1));
6876 if (GET_CODE (x) != AND)
6877 return x;
6879 op0 = XEXP (x, 0);
6880 op1 = XEXP (x, 1);
6883 /* If we have any of (and (ior A B) C) or (and (xor A B) C),
6884 apply the distributive law and then the inverse distributive
6885 law to see if things simplify. */
6886 if (GET_CODE (op0) == IOR || GET_CODE (op0) == XOR)
6888 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6889 if (result)
6890 return result;
6892 if (GET_CODE (op1) == IOR || GET_CODE (op1) == XOR)
6894 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6895 if (result)
6896 return result;
6898 break;
6900 case IOR:
6901 /* If we have (ior (and A B) C), apply the distributive law and then
6902 the inverse distributive law to see if things simplify. */
6904 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND)
6906 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 0);
6907 if (result)
6908 return result;
6911 if (GET_CODE (op1) == AND)
6913 rtx result = distribute_and_simplify_rtx (x, 1);
6914 if (result)
6915 return result;
6917 break;
6919 default:
6920 gcc_unreachable ();
6923 return x;
6926 /* We consider ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, and SIGN_EXTEND as "compound
6927 operations" because they can be replaced with two more basic operations.
6928 ZERO_EXTEND is also considered "compound" because it can be replaced with
6929 an AND operation, which is simpler, though only one operation.
6931 The function expand_compound_operation is called with an rtx expression
6932 and will convert it to the appropriate shifts and AND operations,
6933 simplifying at each stage.
6935 The function make_compound_operation is called to convert an expression
6936 consisting of shifts and ANDs into the equivalent compound expression.
6937 It is the inverse of this function, loosely speaking. */
6939 static rtx
6940 expand_compound_operation (rtx x)
6942 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT pos = 0, len;
6943 int unsignedp = 0;
6944 unsigned int modewidth;
6945 rtx tem;
6947 switch (GET_CODE (x))
6949 case ZERO_EXTEND:
6950 unsignedp = 1;
6951 case SIGN_EXTEND:
6952 /* We can't necessarily use a const_int for a multiword mode;
6953 it depends on implicitly extending the value.
6954 Since we don't know the right way to extend it,
6955 we can't tell whether the implicit way is right.
6957 Even for a mode that is no wider than a const_int,
6958 we can't win, because we need to sign extend one of its bits through
6959 the rest of it, and we don't know which bit. */
6960 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
6961 return x;
6963 /* Return if (subreg:MODE FROM 0) is not a safe replacement for
6964 (zero_extend:MODE FROM) or (sign_extend:MODE FROM). It is for any MEM
6965 because (SUBREG (MEM...)) is guaranteed to cause the MEM to be
6966 reloaded. If not for that, MEM's would very rarely be safe.
6968 Reject MODEs bigger than a word, because we might not be able
6969 to reference a two-register group starting with an arbitrary register
6970 (and currently gen_lowpart might crash for a SUBREG). */
6972 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
6973 return x;
6975 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
6976 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
6978 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
6979 return x;
6981 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
6982 /* If the inner object has VOIDmode (the only way this can happen
6983 is if it is an ASM_OPERANDS), we can't do anything since we don't
6984 know how much masking to do. */
6985 if (len == 0)
6986 return x;
6988 break;
6990 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
6991 unsignedp = 1;
6993 /* ... fall through ... */
6995 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
6996 /* If the operand is a CLOBBER, just return it. */
6997 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == CLOBBER)
6998 return XEXP (x, 0);
7000 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7001 || !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 2))
7002 || GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == VOIDmode)
7003 return x;
7005 /* Reject MODEs that aren't scalar integers because turning vector
7006 or complex modes into shifts causes problems. */
7008 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7009 return x;
7011 len = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
7012 pos = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2));
7014 /* This should stay within the object being extracted, fail otherwise. */
7015 if (len + pos > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7016 return x;
7018 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7019 pos = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))) - len - pos;
7021 break;
7023 default:
7024 return x;
7026 /* Convert sign extension to zero extension, if we know that the high
7027 bit is not set, as this is easier to optimize. It will be converted
7028 back to cheaper alternative in make_extraction. */
7029 if (GET_CODE (x) == SIGN_EXTEND
7030 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7031 && ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7032 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7033 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
7034 >> 1))
7035 == 0)))
7037 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7038 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
7039 rtx temp2 = expand_compound_operation (temp);
7041 /* Make sure this is a profitable operation. */
7042 if (set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7043 > set_src_cost (temp2, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7044 return temp2;
7045 else if (set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7046 > set_src_cost (temp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7047 return temp;
7048 else
7049 return x;
7052 /* We can optimize some special cases of ZERO_EXTEND. */
7053 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
7055 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI if we
7056 know that the last value didn't have any inappropriate bits
7057 set. */
7058 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7059 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7060 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7061 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), GET_MODE (x))
7062 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7063 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7065 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7066 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7067 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7068 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7069 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
7070 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), GET_MODE (x))
7071 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7072 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7074 /* (zero_extend:DI (truncate:SI foo:DI)) is just foo:DI when foo
7075 is a comparison and STORE_FLAG_VALUE permits. This is like
7076 the first case, but it works even when GET_MODE (x) is larger
7077 than HOST_WIDE_INT. */
7078 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == TRUNCATE
7079 && GET_MODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == GET_MODE (x)
7080 && COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
7081 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7082 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7083 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7084 return XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
7086 /* Likewise for (zero_extend:DI (subreg:SI foo:DI 0)). */
7087 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7088 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == GET_MODE (x)
7089 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7090 && COMPARISON_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)))
7091 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
7092 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7093 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))) == 0)
7094 return SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
7098 /* If we reach here, we want to return a pair of shifts. The inner
7099 shift is a left shift of BITSIZE - POS - LEN bits. The outer
7100 shift is a right shift of BITSIZE - LEN bits. It is arithmetic or
7101 logical depending on the value of UNSIGNEDP.
7103 If this was a ZERO_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTRACT, this pair of shifts will be
7104 converted into an AND of a shift.
7106 We must check for the case where the left shift would have a negative
7107 count. This can happen in a case like (x >> 31) & 255 on machines
7108 that can't shift by a constant. On those machines, we would first
7109 combine the shift with the AND to produce a variable-position
7110 extraction. Then the constant of 31 would be substituted in
7111 to produce such a position. */
7113 modewidth = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x));
7114 if (modewidth >= pos + len)
7116 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7117 tem = gen_lowpart (mode, XEXP (x, 0));
7118 if (!tem || GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7119 return x;
7120 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode,
7121 tem, modewidth - pos - len);
7122 tem = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, unsignedp ? LSHIFTRT : ASHIFTRT,
7123 mode, tem, modewidth - len);
7125 else if (unsignedp && len < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7126 tem = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, GET_MODE (x),
7127 simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
7128 GET_MODE (x),
7129 XEXP (x, 0), pos),
7130 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1);
7131 else
7132 /* Any other cases we can't handle. */
7133 return x;
7135 /* If we couldn't do this for some reason, return the original
7136 expression. */
7137 if (GET_CODE (tem) == CLOBBER)
7138 return x;
7140 return tem;
7143 /* X is a SET which contains an assignment of one object into
7144 a part of another (such as a bit-field assignment, STRICT_LOW_PART,
7145 or certain SUBREGS). If possible, convert it into a series of
7146 logical operations.
7148 We half-heartedly support variable positions, but do not at all
7149 support variable lengths. */
7151 static const_rtx
7152 expand_field_assignment (const_rtx x)
7154 rtx inner;
7155 rtx pos; /* Always counts from low bit. */
7156 int len;
7157 rtx mask, cleared, masked;
7158 machine_mode compute_mode;
7160 /* Loop until we find something we can't simplify. */
7161 while (1)
7163 if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == STRICT_LOW_PART
7164 && GET_CODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)) == SUBREG)
7166 inner = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0));
7167 len = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7168 pos = GEN_INT (subreg_lsb (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0)));
7170 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == ZERO_EXTRACT
7171 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1)))
7173 inner = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 0);
7174 len = INTVAL (XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 1));
7175 pos = XEXP (SET_DEST (x), 2);
7177 /* A constant position should stay within the width of INNER. */
7178 if (CONST_INT_P (pos)
7179 && INTVAL (pos) + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)))
7180 break;
7182 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7184 if (CONST_INT_P (pos))
7185 pos = GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len
7186 - INTVAL (pos));
7187 else if (GET_CODE (pos) == MINUS
7188 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (pos, 1))
7189 && (INTVAL (XEXP (pos, 1))
7190 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner)) - len))
7191 /* If position is ADJUST - X, new position is X. */
7192 pos = XEXP (pos, 0);
7193 else
7195 HOST_WIDE_INT prec = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (inner));
7196 pos = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, GET_MODE (pos),
7197 gen_int_mode (prec - len,
7198 GET_MODE (pos)),
7199 pos);
7204 /* A SUBREG between two modes that occupy the same numbers of words
7205 can be done by moving the SUBREG to the source. */
7206 else if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (x)) == SUBREG
7207 /* We need SUBREGs to compute nonzero_bits properly. */
7208 && nonzero_sign_valid
7209 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SET_DEST (x)))
7210 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
7211 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))))
7212 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)))
7214 x = gen_rtx_SET (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x)),
7215 gen_lowpart
7216 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (x))),
7217 SET_SRC (x)));
7218 continue;
7220 else
7221 break;
7223 while (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7224 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7226 compute_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7228 /* Don't attempt bitwise arithmetic on non scalar integer modes. */
7229 if (! SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7231 machine_mode imode;
7233 /* Don't do anything for vector or complex integral types. */
7234 if (! FLOAT_MODE_P (compute_mode))
7235 break;
7237 /* Try to find an integral mode to pun with. */
7238 imode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (compute_mode), MODE_INT, 0);
7239 if (imode == BLKmode)
7240 break;
7242 compute_mode = imode;
7243 inner = gen_lowpart (imode, inner);
7246 /* Compute a mask of LEN bits, if we can do this on the host machine. */
7247 if (len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7248 break;
7250 /* Don't try to compute in too wide unsupported modes. */
7251 if (!targetm.scalar_mode_supported_p (compute_mode))
7252 break;
7254 /* Now compute the equivalent expression. Make a copy of INNER
7255 for the SET_DEST in case it is a MEM into which we will substitute;
7256 we don't want shared RTL in that case. */
7257 mask = gen_int_mode (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
7258 compute_mode);
7259 cleared = simplify_gen_binary (AND, compute_mode,
7260 simplify_gen_unary (NOT, compute_mode,
7261 simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT,
7262 compute_mode,
7263 mask, pos),
7264 compute_mode),
7265 inner);
7266 masked = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, compute_mode,
7267 simplify_gen_binary (
7268 AND, compute_mode,
7269 gen_lowpart (compute_mode, SET_SRC (x)),
7270 mask),
7271 pos);
7273 x = gen_rtx_SET (copy_rtx (inner),
7274 simplify_gen_binary (IOR, compute_mode,
7275 cleared, masked));
7278 return x;
7281 /* Return an RTX for a reference to LEN bits of INNER. If POS_RTX is nonzero,
7282 it is an RTX that represents the (variable) starting position; otherwise,
7283 POS is the (constant) starting bit position. Both are counted from the LSB.
7285 UNSIGNEDP is nonzero for an unsigned reference and zero for a signed one.
7287 IN_DEST is nonzero if this is a reference in the destination of a SET.
7288 This is used when a ZERO_ or SIGN_EXTRACT isn't needed. If nonzero,
7289 a STRICT_LOW_PART will be used, if zero, ZERO_EXTEND or SIGN_EXTEND will
7290 be used.
7292 IN_COMPARE is nonzero if we are in a COMPARE. This means that a
7293 ZERO_EXTRACT should be built even for bits starting at bit 0.
7295 MODE is the desired mode of the result (if IN_DEST == 0).
7297 The result is an RTX for the extraction or NULL_RTX if the target
7298 can't handle it. */
7300 static rtx
7301 make_extraction (machine_mode mode, rtx inner, HOST_WIDE_INT pos,
7302 rtx pos_rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len, int unsignedp,
7303 int in_dest, int in_compare)
7305 /* This mode describes the size of the storage area
7306 to fetch the overall value from. Within that, we
7307 ignore the POS lowest bits, etc. */
7308 machine_mode is_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7309 machine_mode inner_mode;
7310 machine_mode wanted_inner_mode;
7311 machine_mode wanted_inner_reg_mode = word_mode;
7312 machine_mode pos_mode = word_mode;
7313 machine_mode extraction_mode = word_mode;
7314 machine_mode tmode = mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT, 1);
7315 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7316 rtx orig_pos_rtx = pos_rtx;
7317 HOST_WIDE_INT orig_pos;
7319 if (pos_rtx && CONST_INT_P (pos_rtx))
7320 pos = INTVAL (pos_rtx), pos_rtx = 0;
7322 if (GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (inner))
7324 /* If going from (subreg:SI (mem:QI ...)) to (mem:QI ...),
7325 consider just the QI as the memory to extract from.
7326 The subreg adds or removes high bits; its mode is
7327 irrelevant to the meaning of this extraction,
7328 since POS and LEN count from the lsb. */
7329 if (MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (inner)))
7330 is_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner));
7331 inner = SUBREG_REG (inner);
7333 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == ASHIFT
7334 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
7335 && pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0
7336 && len > UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
7338 /* We're extracting the least significant bits of an rtx
7339 (ashift X (const_int C)), where LEN > C. Extract the
7340 least significant (LEN - C) bits of X, giving an rtx
7341 whose mode is MODE, then shift it left C times. */
7342 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, XEXP (inner, 0),
7343 0, 0, len - INTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)),
7344 unsignedp, in_dest, in_compare);
7345 if (new_rtx != 0)
7346 return gen_rtx_ASHIFT (mode, new_rtx, XEXP (inner, 1));
7348 else if (GET_CODE (inner) == TRUNCATE)
7349 inner = XEXP (inner, 0);
7351 inner_mode = GET_MODE (inner);
7353 /* See if this can be done without an extraction. We never can if the
7354 width of the field is not the same as that of some integer mode. For
7355 registers, we can only avoid the extraction if the position is at the
7356 low-order bit and this is either not in the destination or we have the
7357 appropriate STRICT_LOW_PART operation available.
7359 For MEM, we can avoid an extract if the field starts on an appropriate
7360 boundary and we can change the mode of the memory reference. */
7362 if (tmode != BLKmode
7363 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && (pos % BITS_PER_WORD) == 0
7364 && !MEM_P (inner)
7365 && (inner_mode == tmode
7366 || !REG_P (inner)
7367 || TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (tmode, inner_mode)
7368 || reg_truncated_to_mode (tmode, inner))
7369 && (! in_dest
7370 || (REG_P (inner)
7371 && have_insn_for (STRICT_LOW_PART, tmode))))
7372 || (MEM_P (inner) && pos_rtx == 0
7373 && (pos
7374 % (STRICT_ALIGNMENT ? GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (tmode)
7375 : BITS_PER_UNIT)) == 0
7376 /* We can't do this if we are widening INNER_MODE (it
7377 may not be aligned, for one thing). */
7378 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode) >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
7379 && (inner_mode == tmode
7380 || (! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0),
7381 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7382 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))))))
7384 /* If INNER is a MEM, make a new MEM that encompasses just the desired
7385 field. If the original and current mode are the same, we need not
7386 adjust the offset. Otherwise, we do if bytes big endian.
7388 If INNER is not a MEM, get a piece consisting of just the field
7389 of interest (in this case POS % BITS_PER_WORD must be 0). */
7391 if (MEM_P (inner))
7393 HOST_WIDE_INT offset;
7395 /* POS counts from lsb, but make OFFSET count in memory order. */
7396 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
7397 offset = (GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode) - len - pos) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7398 else
7399 offset = pos / BITS_PER_UNIT;
7401 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (inner, tmode, offset);
7403 else if (REG_P (inner))
7405 if (tmode != inner_mode)
7407 /* We can't call gen_lowpart in a DEST since we
7408 always want a SUBREG (see below) and it would sometimes
7409 return a new hard register. */
7410 if (pos || in_dest)
7412 HOST_WIDE_INT final_word = pos / BITS_PER_WORD;
7414 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
7415 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > UNITS_PER_WORD)
7416 final_word = ((GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7417 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7418 / UNITS_PER_WORD) - final_word;
7420 final_word *= UNITS_PER_WORD;
7421 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN &&
7422 GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode))
7423 final_word += (GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode)
7424 - GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode)) % UNITS_PER_WORD;
7426 /* Avoid creating invalid subregs, for example when
7427 simplifying (x>>32)&255. */
7428 if (!validate_subreg (tmode, inner_mode, inner, final_word))
7429 return NULL_RTX;
7431 new_rtx = gen_rtx_SUBREG (tmode, inner, final_word);
7433 else
7434 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (tmode, inner);
7436 else
7437 new_rtx = inner;
7439 else
7440 new_rtx = force_to_mode (inner, tmode,
7441 len >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7442 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
7443 : ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
7446 /* If this extraction is going into the destination of a SET,
7447 make a STRICT_LOW_PART unless we made a MEM. */
7449 if (in_dest)
7450 return (MEM_P (new_rtx) ? new_rtx
7451 : (GET_CODE (new_rtx) != SUBREG
7452 ? gen_rtx_CLOBBER (tmode, const0_rtx)
7453 : gen_rtx_STRICT_LOW_PART (VOIDmode, new_rtx)));
7455 if (mode == tmode)
7456 return new_rtx;
7458 if (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (new_rtx))
7459 return simplify_unary_operation (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7460 mode, new_rtx, tmode);
7462 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7463 bit is not set, convert the extraction to the cheaper of
7464 sign and zero extension, that are equivalent in these cases. */
7465 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7466 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
7467 && ((nonzero_bits (new_rtx, tmode)
7468 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) >> 1))
7469 == 0)))
7471 rtx temp = gen_rtx_ZERO_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7472 rtx temp1 = gen_rtx_SIGN_EXTEND (mode, new_rtx);
7474 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7475 backends. */
7476 if (set_src_cost (temp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7477 <= set_src_cost (temp1, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7478 return temp;
7479 return temp1;
7482 /* Otherwise, sign- or zero-extend unless we already are in the
7483 proper mode. */
7485 return (gen_rtx_fmt_e (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND,
7486 mode, new_rtx));
7489 /* Unless this is a COMPARE or we have a funny memory reference,
7490 don't do anything with zero-extending field extracts starting at
7491 the low-order bit since they are simple AND operations. */
7492 if (pos_rtx == 0 && pos == 0 && ! in_dest
7493 && ! in_compare && unsignedp)
7494 return 0;
7496 /* Unless INNER is not MEM, reject this if we would be spanning bytes or
7497 if the position is not a constant and the length is not 1. In all
7498 other cases, we would only be going outside our object in cases when
7499 an original shift would have been undefined. */
7500 if (MEM_P (inner)
7501 && ((pos_rtx == 0 && pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (is_mode))
7502 || (pos_rtx != 0 && len != 1)))
7503 return 0;
7505 enum extraction_pattern pattern = (in_dest ? EP_insv
7506 : unsignedp ? EP_extzv : EP_extv);
7508 /* If INNER is not from memory, we want it to have the mode of a register
7509 extraction pattern's structure operand, or word_mode if there is no
7510 such pattern. The same applies to extraction_mode and pos_mode
7511 and their respective operands.
7513 For memory, assume that the desired extraction_mode and pos_mode
7514 are the same as for a register operation, since at present we don't
7515 have named patterns for aligned memory structures. */
7516 struct extraction_insn insn;
7517 if (get_best_reg_extraction_insn (&insn, pattern,
7518 GET_MODE_BITSIZE (inner_mode), mode))
7520 wanted_inner_reg_mode = insn.struct_mode;
7521 pos_mode = insn.pos_mode;
7522 extraction_mode = insn.field_mode;
7525 /* Never narrow an object, since that might not be safe. */
7527 if (mode != VOIDmode
7528 && GET_MODE_SIZE (extraction_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
7529 extraction_mode = mode;
7531 if (!MEM_P (inner))
7532 wanted_inner_mode = wanted_inner_reg_mode;
7533 else
7535 /* Be careful not to go beyond the extracted object and maintain the
7536 natural alignment of the memory. */
7537 wanted_inner_mode = smallest_mode_for_size (len, MODE_INT);
7538 while (pos % GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode) + len
7539 > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7541 wanted_inner_mode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (wanted_inner_mode);
7542 gcc_assert (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode);
7546 orig_pos = pos;
7548 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
7550 /* POS is passed as if BITS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0, so we need to convert it to
7551 BITS_BIG_ENDIAN style. If position is constant, compute new
7552 position. Otherwise, build subtraction.
7553 Note that POS is relative to the mode of the original argument.
7554 If it's a MEM we need to recompute POS relative to that.
7555 However, if we're extracting from (or inserting into) a register,
7556 we want to recompute POS relative to wanted_inner_mode. */
7557 int width = (MEM_P (inner)
7558 ? GET_MODE_BITSIZE (is_mode)
7559 : GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode));
7561 if (pos_rtx == 0)
7562 pos = width - len - pos;
7563 else
7564 pos_rtx
7565 = gen_rtx_MINUS (GET_MODE (pos_rtx),
7566 gen_int_mode (width - len, GET_MODE (pos_rtx)),
7567 pos_rtx);
7568 /* POS may be less than 0 now, but we check for that below.
7569 Note that it can only be less than 0 if !MEM_P (inner). */
7572 /* If INNER has a wider mode, and this is a constant extraction, try to
7573 make it smaller and adjust the byte to point to the byte containing
7574 the value. */
7575 if (wanted_inner_mode != VOIDmode
7576 && inner_mode != wanted_inner_mode
7577 && ! pos_rtx
7578 && GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7579 && MEM_P (inner)
7580 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (inner, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (inner))
7581 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (inner))
7583 int offset = 0;
7585 /* The computations below will be correct if the machine is big
7586 endian in both bits and bytes or little endian in bits and bytes.
7587 If it is mixed, we must adjust. */
7589 /* If bytes are big endian and we had a paradoxical SUBREG, we must
7590 adjust OFFSET to compensate. */
7591 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
7592 && GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode))
7593 offset -= GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode) - GET_MODE_SIZE (inner_mode);
7595 /* We can now move to the desired byte. */
7596 offset += (pos / GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode))
7597 * GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7598 pos %= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode);
7600 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
7601 && is_mode != wanted_inner_mode)
7602 offset = (GET_MODE_SIZE (is_mode)
7603 - GET_MODE_SIZE (wanted_inner_mode) - offset);
7605 inner = adjust_address_nv (inner, wanted_inner_mode, offset);
7608 /* If INNER is not memory, get it into the proper mode. If we are changing
7609 its mode, POS must be a constant and smaller than the size of the new
7610 mode. */
7611 else if (!MEM_P (inner))
7613 /* On the LHS, don't create paradoxical subregs implicitely truncating
7614 the register unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION. */
7615 if (in_dest
7616 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (GET_MODE (inner),
7617 wanted_inner_mode))
7618 return NULL_RTX;
7620 if (GET_MODE (inner) != wanted_inner_mode
7621 && (pos_rtx != 0
7622 || orig_pos + len > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (wanted_inner_mode)))
7623 return NULL_RTX;
7625 if (orig_pos < 0)
7626 return NULL_RTX;
7628 inner = force_to_mode (inner, wanted_inner_mode,
7629 pos_rtx
7630 || len + orig_pos >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7631 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
7632 : ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1)
7633 << orig_pos),
7637 /* Adjust mode of POS_RTX, if needed. If we want a wider mode, we
7638 have to zero extend. Otherwise, we can just use a SUBREG. */
7639 if (pos_rtx != 0
7640 && GET_MODE_SIZE (pos_mode) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7642 rtx temp = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7643 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7645 /* If we know that no extraneous bits are set, and that the high
7646 bit is not set, convert extraction to cheaper one - either
7647 SIGN_EXTENSION or ZERO_EXTENSION, that are equivalent in these
7648 cases. */
7649 if (flag_expensive_optimizations
7650 && (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7651 && ((nonzero_bits (pos_rtx, GET_MODE (pos_rtx))
7652 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
7653 GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (pos_rtx)))
7654 >> 1))
7655 == 0)))
7657 rtx temp1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, pos_mode, pos_rtx,
7658 GET_MODE (pos_rtx));
7660 /* Prefer ZERO_EXTENSION, since it gives more information to
7661 backends. */
7662 if (set_src_cost (temp1, pos_mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
7663 < set_src_cost (temp, pos_mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p))
7664 temp = temp1;
7666 pos_rtx = temp;
7669 /* Make POS_RTX unless we already have it and it is correct. If we don't
7670 have a POS_RTX but we do have an ORIG_POS_RTX, the latter must
7671 be a CONST_INT. */
7672 if (pos_rtx == 0 && orig_pos_rtx != 0 && INTVAL (orig_pos_rtx) == pos)
7673 pos_rtx = orig_pos_rtx;
7675 else if (pos_rtx == 0)
7676 pos_rtx = GEN_INT (pos);
7678 /* Make the required operation. See if we can use existing rtx. */
7679 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_eee (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTRACT : SIGN_EXTRACT,
7680 extraction_mode, inner, GEN_INT (len), pos_rtx);
7681 if (! in_dest)
7682 new_rtx = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7684 return new_rtx;
7687 /* See if X contains an ASHIFT of COUNT or more bits that can be commuted
7688 with any other operations in X. Return X without that shift if so. */
7690 static rtx
7691 extract_left_shift (rtx x, int count)
7693 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7694 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7695 rtx tem;
7697 switch (code)
7699 case ASHIFT:
7700 /* This is the shift itself. If it is wide enough, we will return
7701 either the value being shifted if the shift count is equal to
7702 COUNT or a shift for the difference. */
7703 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7704 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= count)
7705 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (x, 0),
7706 INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) - count);
7707 break;
7709 case NEG: case NOT:
7710 if ((tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7711 return simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, tem, mode);
7713 break;
7715 case PLUS: case IOR: case XOR: case AND:
7716 /* If we can safely shift this constant and we find the inner shift,
7717 make a new operation. */
7718 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7719 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
7720 & ((((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count)) - 1)) == 0
7721 && (tem = extract_left_shift (XEXP (x, 0), count)) != 0)
7723 HOST_WIDE_INT val = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >> count;
7724 return simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, tem,
7725 gen_int_mode (val, mode));
7727 break;
7729 default:
7730 break;
7733 return 0;
7736 /* Look at the expression rooted at X. Look for expressions
7737 equivalent to ZERO_EXTRACT, SIGN_EXTRACT, ZERO_EXTEND, SIGN_EXTEND.
7738 Form these expressions.
7740 Return the new rtx, usually just X.
7742 Also, for machines like the VAX that don't have logical shift insns,
7743 try to convert logical to arithmetic shift operations in cases where
7744 they are equivalent. This undoes the canonicalizations to logical
7745 shifts done elsewhere.
7747 We try, as much as possible, to re-use rtl expressions to save memory.
7749 IN_CODE says what kind of expression we are processing. Normally, it is
7750 SET. In a memory address it is MEM. When processing the arguments of
7751 a comparison or a COMPARE against zero, it is COMPARE. */
7754 make_compound_operation (rtx x, enum rtx_code in_code)
7756 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
7757 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
7758 int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
7759 rtx rhs, lhs;
7760 enum rtx_code next_code;
7761 int i, j;
7762 rtx new_rtx = 0;
7763 rtx tem;
7764 const char *fmt;
7766 /* Select the code to be used in recursive calls. Once we are inside an
7767 address, we stay there. If we have a comparison, set to COMPARE,
7768 but once inside, go back to our default of SET. */
7770 next_code = (code == MEM ? MEM
7771 : ((code == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (x))
7772 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx) ? COMPARE
7773 : in_code == COMPARE ? SET : in_code);
7775 /* Process depending on the code of this operation. If NEW is set
7776 nonzero, it will be returned. */
7778 switch (code)
7780 case ASHIFT:
7781 /* Convert shifts by constants into multiplications if inside
7782 an address. */
7783 if (in_code == MEM && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
7784 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7785 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
7786 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7788 HOST_WIDE_INT count = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
7789 HOST_WIDE_INT multval = (HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << count;
7791 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
7792 if (GET_CODE (new_rtx) == NEG)
7794 new_rtx = XEXP (new_rtx, 0);
7795 multval = -multval;
7797 multval = trunc_int_for_mode (multval, mode);
7798 new_rtx = gen_rtx_MULT (mode, new_rtx, gen_int_mode (multval, mode));
7800 break;
7802 case PLUS:
7803 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7804 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7805 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7806 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7807 if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (lhs, 0)) == NEG
7808 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7810 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (lhs, 0), 0),
7811 XEXP (lhs, 1));
7812 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7814 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == MULT
7815 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) < 0))
7817 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (lhs, 0),
7818 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7819 XEXP (lhs, 1),
7820 mode));
7821 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (MINUS, mode, rhs, tem);
7823 else
7825 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7826 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7827 goto maybe_swap;
7829 x = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7830 goto maybe_swap;
7832 case MINUS:
7833 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7834 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7835 lhs = make_compound_operation (lhs, next_code);
7836 rhs = make_compound_operation (rhs, next_code);
7837 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (rhs, 0)) == NEG
7838 && SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
7840 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (XEXP (rhs, 0), 0),
7841 XEXP (rhs, 1));
7842 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7844 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == MULT
7845 && (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)) < 0))
7847 tem = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, XEXP (rhs, 0),
7848 simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
7849 XEXP (rhs, 1),
7850 mode));
7851 new_rtx = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, mode, tem, lhs);
7853 else
7855 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), lhs);
7856 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), rhs);
7857 return x;
7859 return gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
7861 case AND:
7862 /* If the second operand is not a constant, we can't do anything
7863 with it. */
7864 if (!CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
7865 break;
7867 /* If the constant is a power of two minus one and the first operand
7868 is a logical right shift, make an extraction. */
7869 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7870 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7872 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7873 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1), i, 1,
7874 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7877 /* Same as previous, but for (subreg (lshiftrt ...)) in first op. */
7878 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
7879 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0))
7880 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == LSHIFTRT
7881 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7883 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 0),
7884 next_code);
7885 new_rtx = make_extraction (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))), new_rtx, 0,
7886 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0)), 1), i, 1,
7887 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7889 /* If that didn't give anything, see if the AND simplifies on
7890 its own. */
7891 if (!new_rtx && i >= 0)
7893 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
7894 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx, 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1,
7895 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7898 /* Same as previous, but for (xor/ior (lshiftrt...) (lshiftrt...)). */
7899 else if ((GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == XOR
7900 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == IOR)
7901 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7902 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == LSHIFTRT
7903 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7905 /* Apply the distributive law, and then try to make extractions. */
7906 new_rtx = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)), mode,
7907 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0),
7908 XEXP (x, 1)),
7909 gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1),
7910 XEXP (x, 1)));
7911 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (new_rtx, in_code);
7914 /* If we are have (and (rotate X C) M) and C is larger than the number
7915 of bits in M, this is an extraction. */
7917 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ROTATE
7918 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
7919 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0
7920 && i <= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
7922 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code);
7923 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
7924 (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
7925 - INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))),
7926 NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7929 /* On machines without logical shifts, if the operand of the AND is
7930 a logical shift and our mask turns off all the propagated sign
7931 bits, we can replace the logical shift with an arithmetic shift. */
7932 else if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
7933 && !have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
7934 && have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
7935 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
7936 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
7937 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7938 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
7940 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
7942 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
7943 if ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~mask) == 0)
7944 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0),
7945 gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
7946 make_compound_operation
7947 (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), next_code),
7948 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)));
7951 /* If the constant is one less than a power of two, this might be
7952 representable by an extraction even if no shift is present.
7953 If it doesn't end up being a ZERO_EXTEND, we will ignore it unless
7954 we are in a COMPARE. */
7955 else if ((i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + 1)) >= 0)
7956 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
7957 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7958 next_code),
7959 0, NULL_RTX, i, 1, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
7961 /* If we are in a comparison and this is an AND with a power of two,
7962 convert this into the appropriate bit extract. */
7963 else if (in_code == COMPARE
7964 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)))) >= 0)
7965 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode,
7966 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7967 next_code),
7968 i, NULL_RTX, 1, 1, 0, 1);
7970 break;
7972 case LSHIFTRT:
7973 /* If the sign bit is known to be zero, replace this with an
7974 arithmetic shift. */
7975 if (have_insn_for (ASHIFTRT, mode)
7976 && ! have_insn_for (LSHIFTRT, mode)
7977 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
7978 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & (1 << (mode_width - 1))) == 0)
7980 new_rtx = gen_rtx_ASHIFTRT (mode,
7981 make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0),
7982 next_code),
7983 XEXP (x, 1));
7984 break;
7987 /* ... fall through ... */
7989 case ASHIFTRT:
7990 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
7991 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
7993 /* If we have (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) with C2 >= C1,
7994 this is a SIGN_EXTRACT. */
7995 if (CONST_INT_P (rhs)
7996 && GET_CODE (lhs) == ASHIFT
7997 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
7998 && INTVAL (rhs) >= INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1))
7999 && INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)) >= 0
8000 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width)
8002 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (lhs, 0), next_code);
8003 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, new_rtx,
8004 INTVAL (rhs) - INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)),
8005 NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
8006 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8007 break;
8010 /* See if we have operations between an ASHIFTRT and an ASHIFT.
8011 If so, try to merge the shifts into a SIGN_EXTEND. We could
8012 also do this for some cases of SIGN_EXTRACT, but it doesn't
8013 seem worth the effort; the case checked for occurs on Alpha. */
8015 if (!OBJECT_P (lhs)
8016 && ! (GET_CODE (lhs) == SUBREG
8017 && (OBJECT_P (SUBREG_REG (lhs))))
8018 && CONST_INT_P (rhs)
8019 && INTVAL (rhs) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8020 && INTVAL (rhs) < mode_width
8021 && (new_rtx = extract_left_shift (lhs, INTVAL (rhs))) != 0)
8022 new_rtx = make_extraction (mode, make_compound_operation (new_rtx, next_code),
8023 0, NULL_RTX, mode_width - INTVAL (rhs),
8024 code == LSHIFTRT, 0, in_code == COMPARE);
8026 break;
8028 case SUBREG:
8029 /* Call ourselves recursively on the inner expression. If we are
8030 narrowing the object and it has a different RTL code from
8031 what it originally did, do this SUBREG as a force_to_mode. */
8033 rtx inner = SUBREG_REG (x), simplified;
8034 enum rtx_code subreg_code = in_code;
8036 /* If in_code is COMPARE, it isn't always safe to pass it through
8037 to the recursive make_compound_operation call. */
8038 if (subreg_code == COMPARE
8039 && (!subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8040 || GET_CODE (inner) == SUBREG
8041 /* (subreg:SI (and:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 0x800000000)) 0)
8042 is (const_int 0), rather than
8043 (subreg:SI (lshiftrt:DI (reg:DI) (const_int 35)) 0). */
8044 || (GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8045 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (inner, 1))
8046 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8047 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (inner, 1)))
8048 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))))
8049 subreg_code = SET;
8051 tem = make_compound_operation (inner, subreg_code);
8053 simplified
8054 = simplify_subreg (mode, tem, GET_MODE (inner), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
8055 if (simplified)
8056 tem = simplified;
8058 if (GET_CODE (tem) != GET_CODE (inner)
8059 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (inner))
8060 && subreg_lowpart_p (x))
8062 rtx newer
8063 = force_to_mode (tem, mode, ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0, 0);
8065 /* If we have something other than a SUBREG, we might have
8066 done an expansion, so rerun ourselves. */
8067 if (GET_CODE (newer) != SUBREG)
8068 newer = make_compound_operation (newer, in_code);
8070 /* force_to_mode can expand compounds. If it just re-expanded the
8071 compound, use gen_lowpart to convert to the desired mode. */
8072 if (rtx_equal_p (newer, x)
8073 /* Likewise if it re-expanded the compound only partially.
8074 This happens for SUBREG of ZERO_EXTRACT if they extract
8075 the same number of bits. */
8076 || (GET_CODE (newer) == SUBREG
8077 && (GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == LSHIFTRT
8078 || GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (newer)) == ASHIFTRT)
8079 && GET_CODE (inner) == AND
8080 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (newer), XEXP (inner, 0))))
8081 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), tem);
8083 return newer;
8086 if (simplified)
8087 return tem;
8089 break;
8091 default:
8092 break;
8095 if (new_rtx)
8097 x = gen_lowpart (mode, new_rtx);
8098 code = GET_CODE (x);
8101 /* Now recursively process each operand of this operation. We need to
8102 handle ZERO_EXTEND specially so that we don't lose track of the
8103 inner mode. */
8104 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND)
8106 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, 0), next_code);
8107 tem = simplify_const_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
8108 new_rtx, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8109 if (tem)
8110 return tem;
8111 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), new_rtx);
8112 return x;
8115 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8116 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (code); i++)
8117 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8119 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XEXP (x, i), next_code);
8120 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), new_rtx);
8122 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8123 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8125 new_rtx = make_compound_operation (XVECEXP (x, i, j), next_code);
8126 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), new_rtx);
8129 maybe_swap:
8130 /* If this is a commutative operation, the changes to the operands
8131 may have made it noncanonical. */
8132 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x)
8133 && swap_commutative_operands_p (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1)))
8135 tem = XEXP (x, 0);
8136 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
8137 SUBST (XEXP (x, 1), tem);
8140 return x;
8143 /* Given M see if it is a value that would select a field of bits
8144 within an item, but not the entire word. Return -1 if not.
8145 Otherwise, return the starting position of the field, where 0 is the
8146 low-order bit.
8148 *PLEN is set to the length of the field. */
8150 static int
8151 get_pos_from_mask (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT m, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *plen)
8153 /* Get the bit number of the first 1 bit from the right, -1 if none. */
8154 int pos = m ? ctz_hwi (m) : -1;
8155 int len = 0;
8157 if (pos >= 0)
8158 /* Now shift off the low-order zero bits and see if we have a
8159 power of two minus 1. */
8160 len = exact_log2 ((m >> pos) + 1);
8162 if (len <= 0)
8163 pos = -1;
8165 *plen = len;
8166 return pos;
8169 /* If X refers to a register that equals REG in value, replace these
8170 references with REG. */
8171 static rtx
8172 canon_reg_for_combine (rtx x, rtx reg)
8174 rtx op0, op1, op2;
8175 const char *fmt;
8176 int i;
8177 bool copied;
8179 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8180 switch (GET_RTX_CLASS (code))
8182 case RTX_UNARY:
8183 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8184 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8185 return simplify_gen_unary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0,
8186 GET_MODE (reg));
8187 break;
8189 case RTX_BIN_ARITH:
8190 case RTX_COMM_ARITH:
8191 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8192 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8193 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8194 return simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x), op0, op1);
8195 break;
8197 case RTX_COMPARE:
8198 case RTX_COMM_COMPARE:
8199 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8200 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8201 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8202 return simplify_gen_relational (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8203 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1);
8204 break;
8206 case RTX_TERNARY:
8207 case RTX_BITFIELD_OPS:
8208 op0 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 0), reg);
8209 op1 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 1), reg);
8210 op2 = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, 2), reg);
8211 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1) || op2 != XEXP (x, 2))
8212 return simplify_gen_ternary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8213 GET_MODE (op0), op0, op1, op2);
8215 case RTX_OBJ:
8216 if (REG_P (x))
8218 if (rtx_equal_p (get_last_value (reg), x)
8219 || rtx_equal_p (reg, get_last_value (x)))
8220 return reg;
8221 else
8222 break;
8225 /* fall through */
8227 default:
8228 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
8229 copied = false;
8230 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
8231 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
8233 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XEXP (x, i), reg);
8234 if (op != XEXP (x, i))
8236 if (!copied)
8238 copied = true;
8239 x = copy_rtx (x);
8241 XEXP (x, i) = op;
8244 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
8246 int j;
8247 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
8249 rtx op = canon_reg_for_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j), reg);
8250 if (op != XVECEXP (x, i, j))
8252 if (!copied)
8254 copied = true;
8255 x = copy_rtx (x);
8257 XVECEXP (x, i, j) = op;
8262 break;
8265 return x;
8268 /* Return X converted to MODE. If the value is already truncated to
8269 MODE we can just return a subreg even though in the general case we
8270 would need an explicit truncation. */
8272 static rtx
8273 gen_lowpart_or_truncate (machine_mode mode, rtx x)
8275 if (!CONST_INT_P (x)
8276 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8277 && !TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, GET_MODE (x))
8278 && !(REG_P (x) && reg_truncated_to_mode (mode, x)))
8280 /* Bit-cast X into an integer mode. */
8281 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8282 x = gen_lowpart (int_mode_for_mode (GET_MODE (x)), x);
8283 x = simplify_gen_unary (TRUNCATE, int_mode_for_mode (mode),
8284 x, GET_MODE (x));
8287 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8290 /* See if X can be simplified knowing that we will only refer to it in
8291 MODE and will only refer to those bits that are nonzero in MASK.
8292 If other bits are being computed or if masking operations are done
8293 that select a superset of the bits in MASK, they can sometimes be
8294 ignored.
8296 Return a possibly simplified expression, but always convert X to
8297 MODE. If X is a CONST_INT, AND the CONST_INT with MASK.
8299 If JUST_SELECT is nonzero, don't optimize by noticing that bits in MASK
8300 are all off in X. This is used when X will be complemented, by either
8301 NOT, NEG, or XOR. */
8303 static rtx
8304 force_to_mode (rtx x, machine_mode mode, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask,
8305 int just_select)
8307 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8308 int next_select = just_select || code == XOR || code == NOT || code == NEG;
8309 machine_mode op_mode;
8310 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT fuller_mask, nonzero;
8311 rtx op0, op1, temp;
8313 /* If this is a CALL or ASM_OPERANDS, don't do anything. Some of the
8314 code below will do the wrong thing since the mode of such an
8315 expression is VOIDmode.
8317 Also do nothing if X is a CLOBBER; this can happen if X was
8318 the return value from a call to gen_lowpart. */
8319 if (code == CALL || code == ASM_OPERANDS || code == CLOBBER)
8320 return x;
8322 /* We want to perform the operation in its present mode unless we know
8323 that the operation is valid in MODE, in which case we do the operation
8324 in MODE. */
8325 op_mode = ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x))
8326 && have_insn_for (code, mode))
8327 ? mode : GET_MODE (x));
8329 /* It is not valid to do a right-shift in a narrower mode
8330 than the one it came in with. */
8331 if ((code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
8332 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8333 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8335 /* Truncate MASK to fit OP_MODE. */
8336 if (op_mode)
8337 mask &= GET_MODE_MASK (op_mode);
8339 /* When we have an arithmetic operation, or a shift whose count we
8340 do not know, we need to assume that all bits up to the highest-order
8341 bit in MASK will be needed. This is how we form such a mask. */
8342 if (mask & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT - 1)))
8343 fuller_mask = ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0;
8344 else
8345 fuller_mask = (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8346 - 1);
8348 /* Determine what bits of X are guaranteed to be (non)zero. */
8349 nonzero = nonzero_bits (x, mode);
8351 /* If none of the bits in X are needed, return a zero. */
8352 if (!just_select && (nonzero & mask) == 0 && !side_effects_p (x))
8353 x = const0_rtx;
8355 /* If X is a CONST_INT, return a new one. Do this here since the
8356 test below will fail. */
8357 if (CONST_INT_P (x))
8359 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode))
8360 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (x) & mask, mode);
8361 else
8363 x = GEN_INT (INTVAL (x) & mask);
8364 return gen_lowpart_common (mode, x);
8368 /* If X is narrower than MODE and we want all the bits in X's mode, just
8369 get X in the proper mode. */
8370 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)
8371 && (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask) == 0)
8372 return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
8374 /* We can ignore the effect of a SUBREG if it narrows the mode or
8375 if the constant masks to zero all the bits the mode doesn't have. */
8376 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
8377 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
8378 && ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
8379 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x))))
8380 || (0 == (mask
8381 & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))
8382 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)))))))
8383 return force_to_mode (SUBREG_REG (x), mode, mask, next_select);
8385 /* The arithmetic simplifications here only work for scalar integer modes. */
8386 if (!SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (mode) || !SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8387 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8389 switch (code)
8391 case CLOBBER:
8392 /* If X is a (clobber (const_int)), return it since we know we are
8393 generating something that won't match. */
8394 return x;
8396 case SIGN_EXTEND:
8397 case ZERO_EXTEND:
8398 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
8399 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
8400 x = expand_compound_operation (x);
8401 if (GET_CODE (x) != code)
8402 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8403 break;
8405 case TRUNCATE:
8406 /* Similarly for a truncate. */
8407 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8409 case AND:
8410 /* If this is an AND with a constant, convert it into an AND
8411 whose constant is the AND of that constant with MASK. If it
8412 remains an AND of MASK, delete it since it is redundant. */
8414 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
8416 x = simplify_and_const_int (x, op_mode, XEXP (x, 0),
8417 mask & INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8419 /* If X is still an AND, see if it is an AND with a mask that
8420 is just some low-order bits. If so, and it is MASK, we don't
8421 need it. */
8423 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8424 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)))
8425 == mask))
8426 x = XEXP (x, 0);
8428 /* If it remains an AND, try making another AND with the bits
8429 in the mode mask that aren't in MASK turned on. If the
8430 constant in the AND is wide enough, this might make a
8431 cheaper constant. */
8433 if (GET_CODE (x) == AND && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8434 && GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) != mask
8435 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
8437 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT cval
8438 = UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8439 | (GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x)) & ~mask);
8440 rtx y;
8442 y = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8443 gen_int_mode (cval, GET_MODE (x)));
8444 if (set_src_cost (y, GET_MODE (x), optimize_this_for_speed_p)
8445 < set_src_cost (x, GET_MODE (x), optimize_this_for_speed_p))
8446 x = y;
8449 break;
8452 goto binop;
8454 case PLUS:
8455 /* In (and (plus FOO C1) M), if M is a mask that just turns off
8456 low-order bits (as in an alignment operation) and FOO is already
8457 aligned to that boundary, mask C1 to that boundary as well.
8458 This may eliminate that PLUS and, later, the AND. */
8461 unsigned int width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
8462 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT smask = mask;
8464 /* If MODE is narrower than HOST_WIDE_INT and mask is a negative
8465 number, sign extend it. */
8467 if (width < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8468 && (smask & (HOST_WIDE_INT_1U << (width - 1))) != 0)
8469 smask |= HOST_WIDE_INT_M1U << width;
8471 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8472 && exact_log2 (- smask) >= 0
8473 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode) & ~smask) == 0
8474 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & ~smask) != 0)
8475 return force_to_mode (plus_constant (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8476 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & smask)),
8477 mode, smask, next_select);
8480 /* ... fall through ... */
8482 case MULT:
8483 /* Substituting into the operands of a widening MULT is not likely to
8484 create RTL matching a machine insn. */
8485 if (code == MULT
8486 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8487 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
8488 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == ZERO_EXTEND
8489 || GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == SIGN_EXTEND)
8490 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))
8491 && REG_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0)))
8492 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8494 /* For PLUS, MINUS and MULT, we need any bits less significant than the
8495 most significant bit in MASK since carries from those bits will
8496 affect the bits we are interested in. */
8497 mask = fuller_mask;
8498 goto binop;
8500 case MINUS:
8501 /* If X is (minus C Y) where C's least set bit is larger than any bit
8502 in the mask, then we may replace with (neg Y). */
8503 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8504 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)) & -UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))) > mask))
8506 x = simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 1),
8507 GET_MODE (x));
8508 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8511 /* Similarly, if C contains every bit in the fuller_mask, then we may
8512 replace with (not Y). */
8513 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 0))
8514 && ((UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0)) | fuller_mask) == UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 0))))
8516 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x),
8517 XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (x));
8518 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8521 mask = fuller_mask;
8522 goto binop;
8524 case IOR:
8525 case XOR:
8526 /* If X is (ior (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2), try to commute the IOR and
8527 LSHIFTRT so we end up with an (and (lshiftrt (ior ...) ...) ...)
8528 operation which may be a bitfield extraction. Ensure that the
8529 constant we form is not wider than the mode of X. */
8531 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8532 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8533 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8534 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8535 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8536 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8537 + floor_log2 (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))))
8538 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8539 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8540 & ~nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x))) == 0)
8542 temp = gen_int_mode ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) & mask)
8543 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8544 GET_MODE (x));
8545 temp = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (x), GET_MODE (x),
8546 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8547 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), temp,
8548 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8549 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8552 binop:
8553 /* For most binary operations, just propagate into the operation and
8554 change the mode if we have an operation of that mode. */
8556 op0 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8557 op1 = force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode, mask, next_select);
8559 /* If we ended up truncating both operands, truncate the result of the
8560 operation instead. */
8561 if (GET_CODE (op0) == TRUNCATE
8562 && GET_CODE (op1) == TRUNCATE)
8564 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
8565 op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
8568 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op0);
8569 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode, op1);
8571 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0) || op1 != XEXP (x, 1))
8572 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, op1);
8573 break;
8575 case ASHIFT:
8576 /* For left shifts, do the same, but just for the first operand.
8577 However, we cannot do anything with shifts where we cannot
8578 guarantee that the counts are smaller than the size of the mode
8579 because such a count will have a different meaning in a
8580 wider mode. */
8582 if (! (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8583 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8584 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
8585 && ! (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)) != VOIDmode
8586 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 1), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 1)))
8587 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))))
8588 break;
8590 /* If the shift count is a constant and we can do arithmetic in
8591 the mode of the shift, refine which bits we need. Otherwise, use the
8592 conservative form of the mask. */
8593 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8594 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8595 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (op_mode)
8596 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8597 mask >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8598 else
8599 mask = fuller_mask;
8601 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8602 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), op_mode,
8603 mask, next_select));
8605 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8606 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, op_mode, op0, XEXP (x, 1));
8607 break;
8609 case LSHIFTRT:
8610 /* Here we can only do something if the shift count is a constant,
8611 this shift constant is valid for the host, and we can do arithmetic
8612 in OP_MODE. */
8614 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8615 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8616 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8617 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (op_mode))
8619 rtx inner = XEXP (x, 0);
8620 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT inner_mask;
8622 /* Select the mask of the bits we need for the shift operand. */
8623 inner_mask = mask << INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8625 /* We can only change the mode of the shift if we can do arithmetic
8626 in the mode of the shift and INNER_MASK is no wider than the
8627 width of X's mode. */
8628 if ((inner_mask & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x))) != 0)
8629 op_mode = GET_MODE (x);
8631 inner = force_to_mode (inner, op_mode, inner_mask, next_select);
8633 if (GET_MODE (x) != op_mode || inner != XEXP (x, 0))
8634 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, op_mode, inner, XEXP (x, 1));
8637 /* If we have (and (lshiftrt FOO C1) C2) where the combination of the
8638 shift and AND produces only copies of the sign bit (C2 is one less
8639 than a power of two), we can do this with just a shift. */
8641 if (GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT
8642 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8643 /* The shift puts one of the sign bit copies in the least significant
8644 bit. */
8645 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8646 + num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0))))
8647 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8648 && exact_log2 (mask + 1) >= 0
8649 /* Number of bits left after the shift must be more than the mask
8650 needs. */
8651 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) + exact_log2 (mask + 1))
8652 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8653 /* Must be more sign bit copies than the mask needs. */
8654 && ((int) num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)))
8655 >= exact_log2 (mask + 1)))
8656 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8657 GEN_INT (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x))
8658 - exact_log2 (mask + 1)));
8660 goto shiftrt;
8662 case ASHIFTRT:
8663 /* If we are just looking for the sign bit, we don't need this shift at
8664 all, even if it has a variable count. */
8665 if (val_signbit_p (GET_MODE (x), mask))
8666 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8668 /* If this is a shift by a constant, get a mask that contains those bits
8669 that are not copies of the sign bit. We then have two cases: If
8670 MASK only includes those bits, this can be a logical shift, which may
8671 allow simplifications. If MASK is a single-bit field not within
8672 those bits, we are requesting a copy of the sign bit and hence can
8673 shift the sign bit to the appropriate location. */
8675 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1)) && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8676 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8678 int i;
8680 /* If the considered data is wider than HOST_WIDE_INT, we can't
8681 represent a mask for all its bits in a single scalar.
8682 But we only care about the lower bits, so calculate these. */
8684 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8686 nonzero = ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0;
8688 /* GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8689 is the number of bits a full-width mask would have set.
8690 We need only shift if these are fewer than nonzero can
8691 hold. If not, we must keep all bits set in nonzero. */
8693 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8694 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8695 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8696 + HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
8697 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) ;
8699 else
8701 nonzero = GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
8702 nonzero >>= INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
8705 if ((mask & ~nonzero) == 0)
8707 x = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8708 XEXP (x, 0), INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)));
8709 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8710 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8713 else if ((i = exact_log2 (mask)) >= 0)
8715 x = simplify_shift_const
8716 (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0),
8717 GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - 1 - i);
8719 if (GET_CODE (x) != ASHIFTRT)
8720 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8724 /* If MASK is 1, convert this to an LSHIFTRT. This can be done
8725 even if the shift count isn't a constant. */
8726 if (mask == 1)
8727 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8728 XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
8730 shiftrt:
8732 /* If this is a zero- or sign-extension operation that just affects bits
8733 we don't care about, remove it. Be sure the call above returned
8734 something that is still a shift. */
8736 if ((GET_CODE (x) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFTRT)
8737 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8738 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0
8739 && (INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1))
8740 <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) - (floor_log2 (mask) + 1))
8741 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == ASHIFT
8742 && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1) == XEXP (x, 1))
8743 return force_to_mode (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), mode, mask,
8744 next_select);
8746 break;
8748 case ROTATE:
8749 case ROTATERT:
8750 /* If the shift count is constant and we can do computations
8751 in the mode of X, compute where the bits we care about are.
8752 Otherwise, we can't do anything. Don't change the mode of
8753 the shift or propagate MODE into the shift, though. */
8754 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
8755 && INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1)) >= 0)
8757 temp = simplify_binary_operation (code == ROTATE ? ROTATERT : ROTATE,
8758 GET_MODE (x),
8759 gen_int_mode (mask, GET_MODE (x)),
8760 XEXP (x, 1));
8761 if (temp && CONST_INT_P (temp))
8762 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x),
8763 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), GET_MODE (x),
8764 INTVAL (temp), next_select),
8765 XEXP (x, 1));
8767 break;
8769 case NEG:
8770 /* If we just want the low-order bit, the NEG isn't needed since it
8771 won't change the low-order bit. */
8772 if (mask == 1)
8773 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, just_select);
8775 /* We need any bits less significant than the most significant bit in
8776 MASK since carries from those bits will affect the bits we are
8777 interested in. */
8778 mask = fuller_mask;
8779 goto unop;
8781 case NOT:
8782 /* (not FOO) is (xor FOO CONST), so if FOO is an LSHIFTRT, we can do the
8783 same as the XOR case above. Ensure that the constant we form is not
8784 wider than the mode of X. */
8786 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
8787 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1))
8788 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) >= 0
8789 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) + floor_log2 (mask)
8790 < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)))
8791 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
8793 temp = gen_int_mode (mask << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)),
8794 GET_MODE (x));
8795 temp = simplify_gen_binary (XOR, GET_MODE (x),
8796 XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0), temp);
8797 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (x),
8798 temp, XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1));
8800 return force_to_mode (x, mode, mask, next_select);
8803 /* (and (not FOO) CONST) is (not (or FOO (not CONST))), so we must
8804 use the full mask inside the NOT. */
8805 mask = fuller_mask;
8807 unop:
8808 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (op_mode,
8809 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask,
8810 next_select));
8811 if (op_mode != GET_MODE (x) || op0 != XEXP (x, 0))
8812 x = simplify_gen_unary (code, op_mode, op0, op_mode);
8813 break;
8815 case NE:
8816 /* (and (ne FOO 0) CONST) can be (and FOO CONST) if CONST is included
8817 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE and FOO has a single bit that might be nonzero,
8818 which is equal to STORE_FLAG_VALUE. */
8819 if ((mask & ~STORE_FLAG_VALUE) == 0
8820 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx
8821 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode
8822 && exact_log2 (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)) >= 0
8823 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (x, 0), mode)
8824 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) STORE_FLAG_VALUE))
8825 return force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 0), mode, mask, next_select);
8827 break;
8829 case IF_THEN_ELSE:
8830 /* We have no way of knowing if the IF_THEN_ELSE can itself be
8831 written in a narrower mode. We play it safe and do not do so. */
8833 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8834 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 1), mode,
8835 mask, next_select));
8836 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (GET_MODE (x),
8837 force_to_mode (XEXP (x, 2), mode,
8838 mask, next_select));
8839 if (op0 != XEXP (x, 1) || op1 != XEXP (x, 2))
8840 x = simplify_gen_ternary (IF_THEN_ELSE, GET_MODE (x),
8841 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)), XEXP (x, 0),
8842 op0, op1);
8843 break;
8845 default:
8846 break;
8849 /* Ensure we return a value of the proper mode. */
8850 return gen_lowpart_or_truncate (mode, x);
8853 /* Return nonzero if X is an expression that has one of two values depending on
8854 whether some other value is zero or nonzero. In that case, we return the
8855 value that is being tested, *PTRUE is set to the value if the rtx being
8856 returned has a nonzero value, and *PFALSE is set to the other alternative.
8858 If we return zero, we set *PTRUE and *PFALSE to X. */
8860 static rtx
8861 if_then_else_cond (rtx x, rtx *ptrue, rtx *pfalse)
8863 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
8864 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
8865 rtx cond0, cond1, true0, true1, false0, false1;
8866 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nz;
8868 /* If we are comparing a value against zero, we are done. */
8869 if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
8870 && XEXP (x, 1) == const0_rtx)
8872 *ptrue = (code == NE) ? const_true_rtx : const0_rtx;
8873 *pfalse = (code == NE) ? const0_rtx : const_true_rtx;
8874 return XEXP (x, 0);
8877 /* If this is a unary operation whose operand has one of two values, apply
8878 our opcode to compute those values. */
8879 else if (UNARY_P (x)
8880 && (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 0), &true0, &false0)) != 0)
8882 *ptrue = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, true0, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8883 *pfalse = simplify_gen_unary (code, mode, false0,
8884 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
8885 return cond0;
8888 /* If this is a COMPARE, do nothing, since the IF_THEN_ELSE we would
8889 make can't possibly match and would suppress other optimizations. */
8890 else if (code == COMPARE)
8893 /* If this is a binary operation, see if either side has only one of two
8894 values. If either one does or if both do and they are conditional on
8895 the same value, compute the new true and false values. */
8896 else if (BINARY_P (x))
8898 cond0 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 0), &true0, &false0);
8899 cond1 = if_then_else_cond (XEXP (x, 1), &true1, &false1);
8901 if ((cond0 != 0 || cond1 != 0)
8902 && ! (cond0 != 0 && cond1 != 0 && ! rtx_equal_p (cond0, cond1)))
8904 /* If if_then_else_cond returned zero, then true/false are the
8905 same rtl. We must copy one of them to prevent invalid rtl
8906 sharing. */
8907 if (cond0 == 0)
8908 true0 = copy_rtx (true0);
8909 else if (cond1 == 0)
8910 true1 = copy_rtx (true1);
8912 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
8914 *ptrue = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
8915 true0, true1);
8916 *pfalse = simplify_gen_relational (code, mode, VOIDmode,
8917 false0, false1);
8919 else
8921 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, true0, true1);
8922 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (code, mode, false0, false1);
8925 return cond0 ? cond0 : cond1;
8928 /* See if we have PLUS, IOR, XOR, MINUS or UMAX, where one of the
8929 operands is zero when the other is nonzero, and vice-versa,
8930 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or -1. */
8932 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
8933 && (code == PLUS || code == IOR || code == XOR || code == MINUS
8934 || code == UMAX)
8935 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
8937 rtx op0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1);
8938 rtx op1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 1);
8940 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
8941 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
8943 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
8944 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
8945 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
8946 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
8947 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
8948 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
8949 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
8950 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
8951 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
8952 && ! side_effects_p (x))
8954 *ptrue = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode, op0, const_true_rtx);
8955 *pfalse = simplify_gen_binary (MULT, mode,
8956 (code == MINUS
8957 ? simplify_gen_unary (NEG, mode,
8958 op1, mode)
8959 : op1),
8960 const_true_rtx);
8961 return cond0;
8965 /* Similarly for MULT, AND and UMIN, except that for these the result
8966 is always zero. */
8967 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
8968 && (code == MULT || code == AND || code == UMIN)
8969 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
8971 cond0 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
8972 cond1 = XEXP (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
8974 if (COMPARISON_P (cond0)
8975 && COMPARISON_P (cond1)
8976 && ((GET_CODE (cond0) == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL)
8977 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 0))
8978 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 1)))
8979 || ((swap_condition (GET_CODE (cond0))
8980 == reversed_comparison_code (cond1, NULL))
8981 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 0), XEXP (cond1, 1))
8982 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (cond0, 1), XEXP (cond1, 0))))
8983 && ! side_effects_p (x))
8985 *ptrue = *pfalse = const0_rtx;
8986 return cond0;
8991 else if (code == IF_THEN_ELSE)
8993 /* If we have IF_THEN_ELSE already, extract the condition and
8994 canonicalize it if it is NE or EQ. */
8995 cond0 = XEXP (x, 0);
8996 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 1), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 2);
8997 if (GET_CODE (cond0) == NE && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
8998 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
8999 else if (GET_CODE (cond0) == EQ && XEXP (cond0, 1) == const0_rtx)
9001 *ptrue = XEXP (x, 2), *pfalse = XEXP (x, 1);
9002 return XEXP (cond0, 0);
9004 else
9005 return cond0;
9008 /* If X is a SUBREG, we can narrow both the true and false values
9009 if the inner expression, if there is a condition. */
9010 else if (code == SUBREG
9011 && 0 != (cond0 = if_then_else_cond (SUBREG_REG (x),
9012 &true0, &false0)))
9014 true0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, true0,
9015 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9016 false0 = simplify_gen_subreg (mode, false0,
9017 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9018 if (true0 && false0)
9020 *ptrue = true0;
9021 *pfalse = false0;
9022 return cond0;
9026 /* If X is a constant, this isn't special and will cause confusions
9027 if we treat it as such. Likewise if it is equivalent to a constant. */
9028 else if (CONSTANT_P (x)
9029 || ((cond0 = get_last_value (x)) != 0 && CONSTANT_P (cond0)))
9032 /* If we're in BImode, canonicalize on 0 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE, as that
9033 will be least confusing to the rest of the compiler. */
9034 else if (mode == BImode)
9036 *ptrue = GEN_INT (STORE_FLAG_VALUE), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9037 return x;
9040 /* If X is known to be either 0 or -1, those are the true and
9041 false values when testing X. */
9042 else if (x == constm1_rtx || x == const0_rtx
9043 || (mode != VOIDmode
9044 && num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
9046 *ptrue = constm1_rtx, *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9047 return x;
9050 /* Likewise for 0 or a single bit. */
9051 else if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
9052 && exact_log2 (nz = nonzero_bits (x, mode)) >= 0)
9054 *ptrue = gen_int_mode (nz, mode), *pfalse = const0_rtx;
9055 return x;
9058 /* Otherwise fail; show no condition with true and false values the same. */
9059 *ptrue = *pfalse = x;
9060 return 0;
9063 /* Return the value of expression X given the fact that condition COND
9064 is known to be true when applied to REG as its first operand and VAL
9065 as its second. X is known to not be shared and so can be modified in
9066 place.
9068 We only handle the simplest cases, and specifically those cases that
9069 arise with IF_THEN_ELSE expressions. */
9071 static rtx
9072 known_cond (rtx x, enum rtx_code cond, rtx reg, rtx val)
9074 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9075 const char *fmt;
9076 int i, j;
9078 if (side_effects_p (x))
9079 return x;
9081 /* If either operand of the condition is a floating point value,
9082 then we have to avoid collapsing an EQ comparison. */
9083 if (cond == EQ
9084 && rtx_equal_p (x, reg)
9085 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9086 && ! FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (val)))
9087 return val;
9089 if (cond == UNEQ && rtx_equal_p (x, reg))
9090 return val;
9092 /* If X is (abs REG) and we know something about REG's relationship
9093 with zero, we may be able to simplify this. */
9095 if (code == ABS && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && val == const0_rtx)
9096 switch (cond)
9098 case GE: case GT: case EQ:
9099 return XEXP (x, 0);
9100 case LT: case LE:
9101 return simplify_gen_unary (NEG, GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)),
9102 XEXP (x, 0),
9103 GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
9104 default:
9105 break;
9108 /* The only other cases we handle are MIN, MAX, and comparisons if the
9109 operands are the same as REG and VAL. */
9111 else if (COMPARISON_P (x) || COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (x))
9113 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), val))
9115 std::swap (val, reg);
9116 cond = swap_condition (cond);
9119 if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 0), reg) && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (x, 1), val))
9121 if (COMPARISON_P (x))
9123 if (comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9124 return const_true_rtx;
9126 code = reversed_comparison_code (x, NULL);
9127 if (code != UNKNOWN
9128 && comparison_dominates_p (cond, code))
9129 return const0_rtx;
9130 else
9131 return x;
9133 else if (code == SMAX || code == SMIN
9134 || code == UMIN || code == UMAX)
9136 int unsignedp = (code == UMIN || code == UMAX);
9138 /* Do not reverse the condition when it is NE or EQ.
9139 This is because we cannot conclude anything about
9140 the value of 'SMAX (x, y)' when x is not equal to y,
9141 but we can when x equals y. */
9142 if ((code == SMAX || code == UMAX)
9143 && ! (cond == EQ || cond == NE))
9144 cond = reverse_condition (cond);
9146 switch (cond)
9148 case GE: case GT:
9149 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 1);
9150 case LE: case LT:
9151 return unsignedp ? x : XEXP (x, 0);
9152 case GEU: case GTU:
9153 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 1) : x;
9154 case LEU: case LTU:
9155 return unsignedp ? XEXP (x, 0) : x;
9156 default:
9157 break;
9162 else if (code == SUBREG)
9164 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
9165 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (SUBREG_REG (x), cond, reg, val);
9167 if (SUBREG_REG (x) != r)
9169 /* We must simplify subreg here, before we lose track of the
9170 original inner_mode. */
9171 new_rtx = simplify_subreg (GET_MODE (x), r,
9172 inner_mode, SUBREG_BYTE (x));
9173 if (new_rtx)
9174 return new_rtx;
9175 else
9176 SUBST (SUBREG_REG (x), r);
9179 return x;
9181 /* We don't have to handle SIGN_EXTEND here, because even in the
9182 case of replacing something with a modeless CONST_INT, a
9183 CONST_INT is already (supposed to be) a valid sign extension for
9184 its narrower mode, which implies it's already properly
9185 sign-extended for the wider mode. Now, for ZERO_EXTEND, the
9186 story is different. */
9187 else if (code == ZERO_EXTEND)
9189 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
9190 rtx new_rtx, r = known_cond (XEXP (x, 0), cond, reg, val);
9192 if (XEXP (x, 0) != r)
9194 /* We must simplify the zero_extend here, before we lose
9195 track of the original inner_mode. */
9196 new_rtx = simplify_unary_operation (ZERO_EXTEND, GET_MODE (x),
9197 r, inner_mode);
9198 if (new_rtx)
9199 return new_rtx;
9200 else
9201 SUBST (XEXP (x, 0), r);
9204 return x;
9207 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
9208 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
9210 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
9211 SUBST (XEXP (x, i), known_cond (XEXP (x, i), cond, reg, val));
9212 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
9213 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
9214 SUBST (XVECEXP (x, i, j), known_cond (XVECEXP (x, i, j),
9215 cond, reg, val));
9218 return x;
9221 /* See if X and Y are equal for the purposes of seeing if we can rewrite an
9222 assignment as a field assignment. */
9224 static int
9225 rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (rtx x, rtx y, bool widen_x)
9227 if (widen_x && GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9229 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (y)))
9230 return 0;
9231 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN != WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
9232 return 0;
9233 /* For big endian, adjust the memory offset. */
9234 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
9235 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y),
9236 -subreg_lowpart_offset (GET_MODE (x),
9237 GET_MODE (y)));
9238 else
9239 x = adjust_address_nv (x, GET_MODE (y), 0);
9242 if (x == y || rtx_equal_p (x, y))
9243 return 1;
9245 if (x == 0 || y == 0 || GET_MODE (x) != GET_MODE (y))
9246 return 0;
9248 /* Check for a paradoxical SUBREG of a MEM compared with the MEM.
9249 Note that all SUBREGs of MEM are paradoxical; otherwise they
9250 would have been rewritten. */
9251 if (MEM_P (x) && GET_CODE (y) == SUBREG
9252 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (y))
9253 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (y),
9254 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (y)), x)))
9255 return 1;
9257 if (MEM_P (y) && GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
9258 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x))
9259 && rtx_equal_p (SUBREG_REG (x),
9260 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x)), y)))
9261 return 1;
9263 /* We used to see if get_last_value of X and Y were the same but that's
9264 not correct. In one direction, we'll cause the assignment to have
9265 the wrong destination and in the case, we'll import a register into this
9266 insn that might have already have been dead. So fail if none of the
9267 above cases are true. */
9268 return 0;
9271 /* See if X, a SET operation, can be rewritten as a bit-field assignment.
9272 Return that assignment if so.
9274 We only handle the most common cases. */
9276 static rtx
9277 make_field_assignment (rtx x)
9279 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
9280 rtx src = SET_SRC (x);
9281 rtx assign;
9282 rtx rhs, lhs;
9283 HOST_WIDE_INT c1;
9284 HOST_WIDE_INT pos;
9285 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT len;
9286 rtx other;
9287 machine_mode mode;
9289 /* If SRC was (and (not (ashift (const_int 1) POS)) DEST), this is
9290 a clear of a one-bit field. We will have changed it to
9291 (and (rotate (const_int -2) POS) DEST), so check for that. Also check
9292 for a SUBREG. */
9294 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ROTATE
9295 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0))
9296 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0)) == -2
9297 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9299 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9300 1, 1, 1, 0);
9301 if (assign != 0)
9302 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const0_rtx);
9303 return x;
9306 if (GET_CODE (src) == AND && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == SUBREG
9307 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (src, 0))
9308 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (src, 0)))
9309 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)))))
9310 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0))) == ROTATE
9311 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0))
9312 && INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 0)) == -2
9313 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9315 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0,
9316 XEXP (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (src, 0)), 1),
9317 1, 1, 1, 0);
9318 if (assign != 0)
9319 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const0_rtx);
9320 return x;
9323 /* If SRC is (ior (ashift (const_int 1) POS) DEST), this is a set of a
9324 one-bit field. */
9325 if (GET_CODE (src) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (src, 0)) == ASHIFT
9326 && XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 0) == const1_rtx
9327 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (dest, XEXP (src, 1)))
9329 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, 0, XEXP (XEXP (src, 0), 1),
9330 1, 1, 1, 0);
9331 if (assign != 0)
9332 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, const1_rtx);
9333 return x;
9336 /* If DEST is already a field assignment, i.e. ZERO_EXTRACT, and the
9337 SRC is an AND with all bits of that field set, then we can discard
9338 the AND. */
9339 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9340 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (dest, 1))
9341 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9342 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1)))
9344 HOST_WIDE_INT width = INTVAL (XEXP (dest, 1));
9345 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT and_mask = INTVAL (XEXP (src, 1));
9346 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT ze_mask;
9348 if (width >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
9349 ze_mask = -1;
9350 else
9351 ze_mask = ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)1 << width) - 1;
9353 /* Complete overlap. We can remove the source AND. */
9354 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) == ze_mask)
9355 return gen_rtx_SET (dest, XEXP (src, 0));
9357 /* Partial overlap. We can reduce the source AND. */
9358 if ((and_mask & ze_mask) != and_mask)
9360 mode = GET_MODE (src);
9361 src = gen_rtx_AND (mode, XEXP (src, 0),
9362 gen_int_mode (and_mask & ze_mask, mode));
9363 return gen_rtx_SET (dest, src);
9367 /* The other case we handle is assignments into a constant-position
9368 field. They look like (ior/xor (and DEST C1) OTHER). If C1 represents
9369 a mask that has all one bits except for a group of zero bits and
9370 OTHER is known to have zeros where C1 has ones, this is such an
9371 assignment. Compute the position and length from C1. Shift OTHER
9372 to the appropriate position, force it to the required mode, and
9373 make the extraction. Check for the AND in both operands. */
9375 /* One or more SUBREGs might obscure the constant-position field
9376 assignment. The first one we are likely to encounter is an outer
9377 narrowing SUBREG, which we can just strip for the purposes of
9378 identifying the constant-field assignment. */
9379 if (GET_CODE (src) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (src))
9380 src = SUBREG_REG (src);
9382 if (GET_CODE (src) != IOR && GET_CODE (src) != XOR)
9383 return x;
9385 rhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 0));
9386 lhs = expand_compound_operation (XEXP (src, 1));
9388 if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9389 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9390 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (rhs, 0), dest))
9391 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9392 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9393 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9394 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9395 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9396 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9397 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9398 else if (GET_CODE (rhs) == AND
9399 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (rhs, 0))
9400 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9401 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (rhs, 1))
9402 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (rhs, 0)),
9403 dest, true))
9404 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (rhs, 1)), other = lhs;
9405 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9406 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9407 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), dest))
9408 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9409 /* The second SUBREG that might get in the way is a paradoxical
9410 SUBREG around the first operand of the AND. We want to
9411 pretend the operand is as wide as the destination here. We
9412 do this by adjusting the MEM to wider mode for the sole
9413 purpose of the call to rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p. Also
9414 note this trick only works for MEMs. */
9415 else if (GET_CODE (lhs) == AND
9416 && paradoxical_subreg_p (XEXP (lhs, 0))
9417 && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)))
9418 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (lhs, 1))
9419 && rtx_equal_for_field_assignment_p (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (lhs, 0)),
9420 dest, true))
9421 c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (lhs, 1)), other = rhs;
9422 else
9423 return x;
9425 pos = get_pos_from_mask ((~c1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (dest)), &len);
9426 if (pos < 0 || pos + len > GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest))
9427 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9428 || (c1 & nonzero_bits (other, GET_MODE (dest))) != 0)
9429 return x;
9431 assign = make_extraction (VOIDmode, dest, pos, NULL_RTX, len, 1, 1, 0);
9432 if (assign == 0)
9433 return x;
9435 /* The mode to use for the source is the mode of the assignment, or of
9436 what is inside a possible STRICT_LOW_PART. */
9437 mode = (GET_CODE (assign) == STRICT_LOW_PART
9438 ? GET_MODE (XEXP (assign, 0)) : GET_MODE (assign));
9440 /* Shift OTHER right POS places and make it the source, restricting it
9441 to the proper length and mode. */
9443 src = canon_reg_for_combine (simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT,
9444 GET_MODE (src),
9445 other, pos),
9446 dest);
9447 src = force_to_mode (src, mode,
9448 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) >= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9449 ? ~(unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 0
9450 : ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << len) - 1,
9453 /* If SRC is masked by an AND that does not make a difference in
9454 the value being stored, strip it. */
9455 if (GET_CODE (assign) == ZERO_EXTRACT
9456 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (assign, 1))
9457 && INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
9458 && GET_CODE (src) == AND
9459 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (src, 1))
9460 && UINTVAL (XEXP (src, 1))
9461 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (assign, 1))) - 1)
9462 src = XEXP (src, 0);
9464 return gen_rtx_SET (assign, src);
9467 /* See if X is of the form (+ (* a c) (* b c)) and convert to (* (+ a b) c)
9468 if so. */
9470 static rtx
9471 apply_distributive_law (rtx x)
9473 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
9474 enum rtx_code inner_code;
9475 rtx lhs, rhs, other;
9476 rtx tem;
9478 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9479 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9480 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9481 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9482 return x;
9484 /* The outer operation can only be one of the following: */
9485 if (code != IOR && code != AND && code != XOR
9486 && code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9487 return x;
9489 lhs = XEXP (x, 0);
9490 rhs = XEXP (x, 1);
9492 /* If either operand is a primitive we can't do anything, so get out
9493 fast. */
9494 if (OBJECT_P (lhs) || OBJECT_P (rhs))
9495 return x;
9497 lhs = expand_compound_operation (lhs);
9498 rhs = expand_compound_operation (rhs);
9499 inner_code = GET_CODE (lhs);
9500 if (inner_code != GET_CODE (rhs))
9501 return x;
9503 /* See if the inner and outer operations distribute. */
9504 switch (inner_code)
9506 case LSHIFTRT:
9507 case ASHIFTRT:
9508 case AND:
9509 case IOR:
9510 /* These all distribute except over PLUS. */
9511 if (code == PLUS || code == MINUS)
9512 return x;
9513 break;
9515 case MULT:
9516 if (code != PLUS && code != MINUS)
9517 return x;
9518 break;
9520 case ASHIFT:
9521 /* This is also a multiply, so it distributes over everything. */
9522 break;
9524 /* This used to handle SUBREG, but this turned out to be counter-
9525 productive, since (subreg (op ...)) usually is not handled by
9526 insn patterns, and this "optimization" therefore transformed
9527 recognizable patterns into unrecognizable ones. Therefore the
9528 SUBREG case was removed from here.
9530 It is possible that distributing SUBREG over arithmetic operations
9531 leads to an intermediate result than can then be optimized further,
9532 e.g. by moving the outer SUBREG to the other side of a SET as done
9533 in simplify_set. This seems to have been the original intent of
9534 handling SUBREGs here.
9536 However, with current GCC this does not appear to actually happen,
9537 at least on major platforms. If some case is found where removing
9538 the SUBREG case here prevents follow-on optimizations, distributing
9539 SUBREGs ought to be re-added at that place, e.g. in simplify_set. */
9541 default:
9542 return x;
9545 /* Set LHS and RHS to the inner operands (A and B in the example
9546 above) and set OTHER to the common operand (C in the example).
9547 There is only one way to do this unless the inner operation is
9548 commutative. */
9549 if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9550 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9551 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9552 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9553 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 0), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9554 other = XEXP (lhs, 0), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 1), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9555 else if (COMMUTATIVE_ARITH_P (lhs)
9556 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 0)))
9557 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 1);
9558 else if (rtx_equal_p (XEXP (lhs, 1), XEXP (rhs, 1)))
9559 other = XEXP (lhs, 1), lhs = XEXP (lhs, 0), rhs = XEXP (rhs, 0);
9560 else
9561 return x;
9563 /* Form the new inner operation, seeing if it simplifies first. */
9564 tem = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (x), lhs, rhs);
9566 /* There is one exception to the general way of distributing:
9567 (a | c) ^ (b | c) -> (a ^ b) & ~c */
9568 if (code == XOR && inner_code == IOR)
9570 inner_code = AND;
9571 other = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, GET_MODE (x), other, GET_MODE (x));
9574 /* We may be able to continuing distributing the result, so call
9575 ourselves recursively on the inner operation before forming the
9576 outer operation, which we return. */
9577 return simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, GET_MODE (x),
9578 apply_distributive_law (tem), other);
9581 /* See if X is of the form (* (+ A B) C), and if so convert to
9582 (+ (* A C) (* B C)) and try to simplify.
9584 Most of the time, this results in no change. However, if some of
9585 the operands are the same or inverses of each other, simplifications
9586 will result.
9588 For example, (and (ior A B) (not B)) can occur as the result of
9589 expanding a bit field assignment. When we apply the distributive
9590 law to this, we get (ior (and (A (not B))) (and (B (not B)))),
9591 which then simplifies to (and (A (not B))).
9593 Note that no checks happen on the validity of applying the inverse
9594 distributive law. This is pointless since we can do it in the
9595 few places where this routine is called.
9597 N is the index of the term that is decomposed (the arithmetic operation,
9598 i.e. (+ A B) in the first example above). !N is the index of the term that
9599 is distributed, i.e. of C in the first example above. */
9600 static rtx
9601 distribute_and_simplify_rtx (rtx x, int n)
9603 machine_mode mode;
9604 enum rtx_code outer_code, inner_code;
9605 rtx decomposed, distributed, inner_op0, inner_op1, new_op0, new_op1, tmp;
9607 /* Distributivity is not true for floating point as it can change the
9608 value. So we don't do it unless -funsafe-math-optimizations. */
9609 if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
9610 && ! flag_unsafe_math_optimizations)
9611 return NULL_RTX;
9613 decomposed = XEXP (x, n);
9614 if (!ARITHMETIC_P (decomposed))
9615 return NULL_RTX;
9617 mode = GET_MODE (x);
9618 outer_code = GET_CODE (x);
9619 distributed = XEXP (x, !n);
9621 inner_code = GET_CODE (decomposed);
9622 inner_op0 = XEXP (decomposed, 0);
9623 inner_op1 = XEXP (decomposed, 1);
9625 /* Special case (and (xor B C) (not A)), which is equivalent to
9626 (xor (ior A B) (ior A C)) */
9627 if (outer_code == AND && inner_code == XOR && GET_CODE (distributed) == NOT)
9629 distributed = XEXP (distributed, 0);
9630 outer_code = IOR;
9633 if (n == 0)
9635 /* Distribute the second term. */
9636 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op0, distributed);
9637 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, inner_op1, distributed);
9639 else
9641 /* Distribute the first term. */
9642 new_op0 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op0);
9643 new_op1 = simplify_gen_binary (outer_code, mode, distributed, inner_op1);
9646 tmp = apply_distributive_law (simplify_gen_binary (inner_code, mode,
9647 new_op0, new_op1));
9648 if (GET_CODE (tmp) != outer_code
9649 && (set_src_cost (tmp, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)
9650 < set_src_cost (x, mode, optimize_this_for_speed_p)))
9651 return tmp;
9653 return NULL_RTX;
9656 /* Simplify a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9657 in MODE. Return an equivalent form, if different from (and VAROP
9658 (const_int CONSTOP)). Otherwise, return NULL_RTX. */
9660 static rtx
9661 simplify_and_const_int_1 (machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9662 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9664 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT nonzero;
9665 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT orig_constop;
9666 rtx orig_varop;
9667 int i;
9669 orig_varop = varop;
9670 orig_constop = constop;
9671 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9672 return NULL_RTX;
9674 /* Simplify VAROP knowing that we will be only looking at some of the
9675 bits in it.
9677 Note by passing in CONSTOP, we guarantee that the bits not set in
9678 CONSTOP are not significant and will never be examined. We must
9679 ensure that is the case by explicitly masking out those bits
9680 before returning. */
9681 varop = force_to_mode (varop, mode, constop, 0);
9683 /* If VAROP is a CLOBBER, we will fail so return it. */
9684 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9685 return varop;
9687 /* If VAROP is a CONST_INT, then we need to apply the mask in CONSTOP
9688 to VAROP and return the new constant. */
9689 if (CONST_INT_P (varop))
9690 return gen_int_mode (INTVAL (varop) & constop, mode);
9692 /* See what bits may be nonzero in VAROP. Unlike the general case of
9693 a call to nonzero_bits, here we don't care about bits outside
9694 MODE. */
9696 nonzero = nonzero_bits (varop, mode) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9698 /* Turn off all bits in the constant that are known to already be zero.
9699 Thus, if the AND isn't needed at all, we will have CONSTOP == NONZERO_BITS
9700 which is tested below. */
9702 constop &= nonzero;
9704 /* If we don't have any bits left, return zero. */
9705 if (constop == 0)
9706 return const0_rtx;
9708 /* If VAROP is a NEG of something known to be zero or 1 and CONSTOP is
9709 a power of two, we can replace this with an ASHIFT. */
9710 if (GET_CODE (varop) == NEG && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), mode) == 1
9711 && (i = exact_log2 (constop)) >= 0)
9712 return simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), i);
9714 /* If VAROP is an IOR or XOR, apply the AND to both branches of the IOR
9715 or XOR, then try to apply the distributive law. This may eliminate
9716 operations if either branch can be simplified because of the AND.
9717 It may also make some cases more complex, but those cases probably
9718 won't match a pattern either with or without this. */
9720 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR || GET_CODE (varop) == XOR)
9721 return
9722 gen_lowpart
9723 (mode,
9724 apply_distributive_law
9725 (simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), GET_MODE (varop),
9726 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9727 GET_MODE (varop),
9728 XEXP (varop, 0),
9729 constop),
9730 simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX,
9731 GET_MODE (varop),
9732 XEXP (varop, 1),
9733 constop))));
9735 /* If VAROP is PLUS, and the constant is a mask of low bits, distribute
9736 the AND and see if one of the operands simplifies to zero. If so, we
9737 may eliminate it. */
9739 if (GET_CODE (varop) == PLUS
9740 && exact_log2 (constop + 1) >= 0)
9742 rtx o0, o1;
9744 o0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constop);
9745 o1 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (varop, 1), constop);
9746 if (o0 == const0_rtx)
9747 return o1;
9748 if (o1 == const0_rtx)
9749 return o0;
9752 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
9753 varop = gen_lowpart (mode, varop);
9754 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
9755 return NULL_RTX;
9757 /* If we are only masking insignificant bits, return VAROP. */
9758 if (constop == nonzero)
9759 return varop;
9761 if (varop == orig_varop && constop == orig_constop)
9762 return NULL_RTX;
9764 /* Otherwise, return an AND. */
9765 return simplify_gen_binary (AND, mode, varop, gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9769 /* We have X, a logical `and' of VAROP with the constant CONSTOP, to be done
9770 in MODE.
9772 Return an equivalent form, if different from X. Otherwise, return X. If
9773 X is zero, we are to always construct the equivalent form. */
9775 static rtx
9776 simplify_and_const_int (rtx x, machine_mode mode, rtx varop,
9777 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT constop)
9779 rtx tem = simplify_and_const_int_1 (mode, varop, constop);
9780 if (tem)
9781 return tem;
9783 if (!x)
9784 x = simplify_gen_binary (AND, GET_MODE (varop), varop,
9785 gen_int_mode (constop, mode));
9786 if (GET_MODE (x) != mode)
9787 x = gen_lowpart (mode, x);
9788 return x;
9791 /* Given a REG, X, compute which bits in X can be nonzero.
9792 We don't care about bits outside of those defined in MODE.
9794 For most X this is simply GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (MODE)), but if X is
9795 a shift, AND, or zero_extract, we can do better. */
9797 static rtx
9798 reg_nonzero_bits_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
9799 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9800 machine_mode known_mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9801 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9802 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT *nonzero)
9804 rtx tem;
9805 reg_stat_type *rsp;
9807 /* If X is a register whose nonzero bits value is current, use it.
9808 Otherwise, if X is a register whose value we can find, use that
9809 value. Otherwise, use the previously-computed global nonzero bits
9810 for this register. */
9812 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
9813 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
9814 && (rsp->last_set_mode == mode
9815 || (GET_MODE_CLASS (rsp->last_set_mode) == MODE_INT
9816 && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT))
9817 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
9818 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
9819 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
9820 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
9821 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
9822 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
9823 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
9824 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
9825 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
9826 REGNO (x)))))
9828 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits;
9830 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (rsp->last_set_mode) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9831 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
9832 mask |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (rsp->last_set_mode);
9834 *nonzero &= mask;
9835 return NULL;
9838 tem = get_last_value (x);
9840 if (tem)
9842 if (SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND)
9843 tem = sign_extend_short_imm (tem, GET_MODE (x),
9844 GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode));
9846 return tem;
9848 else if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->nonzero_bits)
9850 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = rsp->nonzero_bits;
9852 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9853 /* We don't know anything about the upper bits. */
9854 mask |= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) ^ GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (x));
9856 *nonzero &= mask;
9859 return NULL;
9862 /* Return the number of bits at the high-order end of X that are known to
9863 be equal to the sign bit. X will be used in mode MODE; if MODE is
9864 VOIDmode, X will be used in its own mode. The returned value will always
9865 be between 1 and the number of bits in MODE. */
9867 static rtx
9868 reg_num_sign_bit_copies_for_combine (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode,
9869 const_rtx known_x ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9870 machine_mode known_mode
9871 ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9872 unsigned int known_ret ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
9873 unsigned int *result)
9875 rtx tem;
9876 reg_stat_type *rsp;
9878 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
9879 if (rsp->last_set_value != 0
9880 && rsp->last_set_mode == mode
9881 && ((rsp->last_set_label >= label_tick_ebb_start
9882 && rsp->last_set_label < label_tick)
9883 || (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
9884 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) < subst_low_luid)
9885 || (REGNO (x) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
9886 && REGNO (x) < reg_n_sets_max
9887 && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (x)) == 1
9888 && !REGNO_REG_SET_P
9889 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
9890 REGNO (x)))))
9892 *result = rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies;
9893 return NULL;
9896 tem = get_last_value (x);
9897 if (tem != 0)
9898 return tem;
9900 if (nonzero_sign_valid && rsp->sign_bit_copies != 0
9901 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (x)) == GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
9902 *result = rsp->sign_bit_copies;
9904 return NULL;
9907 /* Return the number of "extended" bits there are in X, when interpreted
9908 as a quantity in MODE whose signedness is indicated by UNSIGNEDP. For
9909 unsigned quantities, this is the number of high-order zero bits.
9910 For signed quantities, this is the number of copies of the sign bit
9911 minus 1. In both case, this function returns the number of "spare"
9912 bits. For example, if two quantities for which this function returns
9913 at least 1 are added, the addition is known not to overflow.
9915 This function will always return 0 unless called during combine, which
9916 implies that it must be called from a define_split. */
9918 unsigned int
9919 extended_count (const_rtx x, machine_mode mode, int unsignedp)
9921 if (nonzero_sign_valid == 0)
9922 return 0;
9924 return (unsignedp
9925 ? (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
9926 ? (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1
9927 - floor_log2 (nonzero_bits (x, mode)))
9928 : 0)
9929 : num_sign_bit_copies (x, mode) - 1);
9932 /* This function is called from `simplify_shift_const' to merge two
9933 outer operations. Specifically, we have already found that we need
9934 to perform operation *POP0 with constant *PCONST0 at the outermost
9935 position. We would now like to also perform OP1 with constant CONST1
9936 (with *POP0 being done last).
9938 Return 1 if we can do the operation and update *POP0 and *PCONST0 with
9939 the resulting operation. *PCOMP_P is set to 1 if we would need to
9940 complement the innermost operand, otherwise it is unchanged.
9942 MODE is the mode in which the operation will be done. No bits outside
9943 the width of this mode matter. It is assumed that the width of this mode
9944 is smaller than or equal to HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT.
9946 If *POP0 or OP1 are UNKNOWN, it means no operation is required. Only NEG, PLUS,
9947 IOR, XOR, and AND are supported. We may set *POP0 to SET if the proper
9948 result is simply *PCONST0.
9950 If the resulting operation cannot be expressed as one operation, we
9951 return 0 and do not change *POP0, *PCONST0, and *PCOMP_P. */
9953 static int
9954 merge_outer_ops (enum rtx_code *pop0, HOST_WIDE_INT *pconst0, enum rtx_code op1, HOST_WIDE_INT const1, machine_mode mode, int *pcomp_p)
9956 enum rtx_code op0 = *pop0;
9957 HOST_WIDE_INT const0 = *pconst0;
9959 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9960 const1 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
9962 /* If OP0 is an AND, clear unimportant bits in CONST1. */
9963 if (op0 == AND)
9964 const1 &= const0;
9966 /* If OP0 or OP1 is UNKNOWN, this is easy. Similarly if they are the same or
9967 if OP0 is SET. */
9969 if (op1 == UNKNOWN || op0 == SET)
9970 return 1;
9972 else if (op0 == UNKNOWN)
9973 op0 = op1, const0 = const1;
9975 else if (op0 == op1)
9977 switch (op0)
9979 case AND:
9980 const0 &= const1;
9981 break;
9982 case IOR:
9983 const0 |= const1;
9984 break;
9985 case XOR:
9986 const0 ^= const1;
9987 break;
9988 case PLUS:
9989 const0 += const1;
9990 break;
9991 case NEG:
9992 op0 = UNKNOWN;
9993 break;
9994 default:
9995 break;
9999 /* Otherwise, if either is a PLUS or NEG, we can't do anything. */
10000 else if (op0 == PLUS || op1 == PLUS || op0 == NEG || op1 == NEG)
10001 return 0;
10003 /* If the two constants aren't the same, we can't do anything. The
10004 remaining six cases can all be done. */
10005 else if (const0 != const1)
10006 return 0;
10008 else
10009 switch (op0)
10011 case IOR:
10012 if (op1 == AND)
10013 /* (a & b) | b == b */
10014 op0 = SET;
10015 else /* op1 == XOR */
10016 /* (a ^ b) | b == a | b */
10018 break;
10020 case XOR:
10021 if (op1 == AND)
10022 /* (a & b) ^ b == (~a) & b */
10023 op0 = AND, *pcomp_p = 1;
10024 else /* op1 == IOR */
10025 /* (a | b) ^ b == a & ~b */
10026 op0 = AND, const0 = ~const0;
10027 break;
10029 case AND:
10030 if (op1 == IOR)
10031 /* (a | b) & b == b */
10032 op0 = SET;
10033 else /* op1 == XOR */
10034 /* (a ^ b) & b) == (~a) & b */
10035 *pcomp_p = 1;
10036 break;
10037 default:
10038 break;
10041 /* Check for NO-OP cases. */
10042 const0 &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
10043 if (const0 == 0
10044 && (op0 == IOR || op0 == XOR || op0 == PLUS))
10045 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10046 else if (const0 == 0 && op0 == AND)
10047 op0 = SET;
10048 else if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const0 == GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10049 && op0 == AND)
10050 op0 = UNKNOWN;
10052 *pop0 = op0;
10054 /* ??? Slightly redundant with the above mask, but not entirely.
10055 Moving this above means we'd have to sign-extend the mode mask
10056 for the final test. */
10057 if (op0 != UNKNOWN && op0 != NEG)
10058 *pconst0 = trunc_int_for_mode (const0, mode);
10060 return 1;
10063 /* A helper to simplify_shift_const_1 to determine the mode we can perform
10064 the shift in. The original shift operation CODE is performed on OP in
10065 ORIG_MODE. Return the wider mode MODE if we can perform the operation
10066 in that mode. Return ORIG_MODE otherwise. We can also assume that the
10067 result of the shift is subject to operation OUTER_CODE with operand
10068 OUTER_CONST. */
10070 static machine_mode
10071 try_widen_shift_mode (enum rtx_code code, rtx op, int count,
10072 machine_mode orig_mode, machine_mode mode,
10073 enum rtx_code outer_code, HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const)
10075 if (orig_mode == mode)
10076 return mode;
10077 gcc_assert (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode));
10079 /* In general we can't perform in wider mode for right shift and rotate. */
10080 switch (code)
10082 case ASHIFTRT:
10083 /* We can still widen if the bits brought in from the left are identical
10084 to the sign bit of ORIG_MODE. */
10085 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op, mode)
10086 > (unsigned) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)
10087 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode)))
10088 return mode;
10089 return orig_mode;
10091 case LSHIFTRT:
10092 /* Similarly here but with zero bits. */
10093 if (HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10094 && (nonzero_bits (op, mode) & ~GET_MODE_MASK (orig_mode)) == 0)
10095 return mode;
10097 /* We can also widen if the bits brought in will be masked off. This
10098 operation is performed in ORIG_MODE. */
10099 if (outer_code == AND)
10101 int care_bits = low_bitmask_len (orig_mode, outer_const);
10103 if (care_bits >= 0
10104 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (orig_mode) - care_bits >= count)
10105 return mode;
10107 /* fall through */
10109 case ROTATE:
10110 return orig_mode;
10112 case ROTATERT:
10113 gcc_unreachable ();
10115 default:
10116 return mode;
10120 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by ORIG_COUNT bits. CODE says what kind
10121 of shift. The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. Return NULL_RTX
10122 if we cannot simplify it. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10124 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10125 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10126 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10128 static rtx
10129 simplify_shift_const_1 (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
10130 rtx varop, int orig_count)
10132 enum rtx_code orig_code = code;
10133 rtx orig_varop = varop;
10134 int count;
10135 machine_mode mode = result_mode;
10136 machine_mode shift_mode, tmode;
10137 unsigned int mode_words
10138 = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
10139 /* We form (outer_op (code varop count) (outer_const)). */
10140 enum rtx_code outer_op = UNKNOWN;
10141 HOST_WIDE_INT outer_const = 0;
10142 int complement_p = 0;
10143 rtx new_rtx, x;
10145 /* Make sure and truncate the "natural" shift on the way in. We don't
10146 want to do this inside the loop as it makes it more difficult to
10147 combine shifts. */
10148 if (SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED)
10149 orig_count &= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1;
10151 /* If we were given an invalid count, don't do anything except exactly
10152 what was requested. */
10154 if (orig_count < 0 || orig_count >= (int) GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode))
10155 return NULL_RTX;
10157 count = orig_count;
10159 /* Unless one of the branches of the `if' in this loop does a `continue',
10160 we will `break' the loop after the `if'. */
10162 while (count != 0)
10164 /* If we have an operand of (clobber (const_int 0)), fail. */
10165 if (GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
10166 return NULL_RTX;
10168 /* Convert ROTATERT to ROTATE. */
10169 if (code == ROTATERT)
10171 unsigned int bitsize = GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode);
10172 code = ROTATE;
10173 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (result_mode))
10174 count = bitsize / GET_MODE_NUNITS (result_mode) - count;
10175 else
10176 count = bitsize - count;
10179 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode,
10180 mode, outer_op, outer_const);
10182 /* Handle cases where the count is greater than the size of the mode
10183 minus 1. For ASHIFT, use the size minus one as the count (this can
10184 occur when simplifying (lshiftrt (ashiftrt ..))). For rotates,
10185 take the count modulo the size. For other shifts, the result is
10186 zero.
10188 Since these shifts are being produced by the compiler by combining
10189 multiple operations, each of which are defined, we know what the
10190 result is supposed to be. */
10192 if (count > (GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1))
10194 if (code == ASHIFTRT)
10195 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1;
10196 else if (code == ROTATE || code == ROTATERT)
10197 count %= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode);
10198 else
10200 /* We can't simply return zero because there may be an
10201 outer op. */
10202 varop = const0_rtx;
10203 count = 0;
10204 break;
10208 /* If we discovered we had to complement VAROP, leave. Making a NOT
10209 here would cause an infinite loop. */
10210 if (complement_p)
10211 break;
10213 /* An arithmetic right shift of a quantity known to be -1 or 0
10214 is a no-op. */
10215 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10216 && (num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_mode)
10217 == GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode)))
10219 count = 0;
10220 break;
10223 /* If we are doing an arithmetic right shift and discarding all but
10224 the sign bit copies, this is equivalent to doing a shift by the
10225 bitsize minus one. Convert it into that shift because it will often
10226 allow other simplifications. */
10228 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10229 && (count + num_sign_bit_copies (varop, shift_mode)
10230 >= GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode)))
10231 count = GET_MODE_PRECISION (shift_mode) - 1;
10233 /* We simplify the tests below and elsewhere by converting
10234 ASHIFTRT to LSHIFTRT if we know the sign bit is clear.
10235 `make_compound_operation' will convert it to an ASHIFTRT for
10236 those machines (such as VAX) that don't have an LSHIFTRT. */
10237 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10238 && val_signbit_known_clear_p (shift_mode,
10239 nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode)))
10240 code = LSHIFTRT;
10242 if (((code == LSHIFTRT
10243 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_mode)
10244 && !(nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode) >> count))
10245 || (code == ASHIFT
10246 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (shift_mode)
10247 && !((nonzero_bits (varop, shift_mode) << count)
10248 & GET_MODE_MASK (shift_mode))))
10249 && !side_effects_p (varop))
10250 varop = const0_rtx;
10252 switch (GET_CODE (varop))
10254 case SIGN_EXTEND:
10255 case ZERO_EXTEND:
10256 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
10257 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
10258 new_rtx = expand_compound_operation (varop);
10259 if (new_rtx != varop)
10261 varop = new_rtx;
10262 continue;
10264 break;
10266 case MEM:
10267 /* If we have (xshiftrt (mem ...) C) and C is MODE_WIDTH
10268 minus the width of a smaller mode, we can do this with a
10269 SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND from the narrower memory location. */
10270 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10271 && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (varop, 0),
10272 MEM_ADDR_SPACE (varop))
10273 && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (varop)
10274 && (tmode = mode_for_size (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - count,
10275 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode)
10277 new_rtx = adjust_address_nv (varop, tmode,
10278 BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN ? 0
10279 : count / BITS_PER_UNIT);
10281 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code == ASHIFTRT ? SIGN_EXTEND
10282 : ZERO_EXTEND, mode, new_rtx);
10283 count = 0;
10284 continue;
10286 break;
10288 case SUBREG:
10289 /* If VAROP is a SUBREG, strip it as long as the inner operand has
10290 the same number of words as what we've seen so far. Then store
10291 the widest mode in MODE. */
10292 if (subreg_lowpart_p (varop)
10293 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10294 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)))
10295 && (unsigned int) ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop)))
10296 + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
10297 == mode_words
10298 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (varop)) == MODE_INT
10299 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (varop))) == MODE_INT)
10301 varop = SUBREG_REG (varop);
10302 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (varop)) > GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
10303 mode = GET_MODE (varop);
10304 continue;
10306 break;
10308 case MULT:
10309 /* Some machines use MULT instead of ASHIFT because MULT
10310 is cheaper. But it is still better on those machines to
10311 merge two shifts into one. */
10312 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10313 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10315 varop
10316 = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFT, GET_MODE (varop),
10317 XEXP (varop, 0),
10318 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10319 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10320 continue;
10322 break;
10324 case UDIV:
10325 /* Similar, for when divides are cheaper. */
10326 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10327 && exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1))) >= 0)
10329 varop
10330 = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, GET_MODE (varop),
10331 XEXP (varop, 0),
10332 GEN_INT (exact_log2 (
10333 UINTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)))));
10334 continue;
10336 break;
10338 case ASHIFTRT:
10339 /* If we are extracting just the sign bit of an arithmetic
10340 right shift, that shift is not needed. However, the sign
10341 bit of a wider mode may be different from what would be
10342 interpreted as the sign bit in a narrower mode, so, if
10343 the result is narrower, don't discard the shift. */
10344 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10345 && count == (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode) - 1)
10346 && (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (result_mode)
10347 >= GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (varop))))
10349 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10350 continue;
10353 /* ... fall through ... */
10355 case LSHIFTRT:
10356 case ASHIFT:
10357 case ROTATE:
10358 /* Here we have two nested shifts. The result is usually the
10359 AND of a new shift with a mask. We compute the result below. */
10360 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10361 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) >= 0
10362 && INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)) < GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))
10363 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10364 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
10365 && !VECTOR_MODE_P (result_mode))
10367 enum rtx_code first_code = GET_CODE (varop);
10368 unsigned int first_count = INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1));
10369 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask;
10370 rtx mask_rtx;
10372 /* We have one common special case. We can't do any merging if
10373 the inner code is an ASHIFTRT of a smaller mode. However, if
10374 we have (ashift:M1 (subreg:M1 (ashiftrt:M2 FOO C1) 0) C2)
10375 with C2 == GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M1) - GET_MODE_BITSIZE (M2),
10376 we can convert it to
10377 (ashiftrt:M1 (ashift:M1 (and:M1 (subreg:M1 FOO 0) C3) C2) C1).
10378 This simplifies certain SIGN_EXTEND operations. */
10379 if (code == ASHIFT && first_code == ASHIFTRT
10380 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode)
10381 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop))))
10383 /* C3 has the low-order C1 bits zero. */
10385 mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
10386 & ~(((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << first_count) - 1);
10388 varop = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode,
10389 XEXP (varop, 0), mask);
10390 varop = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, ASHIFT, result_mode,
10391 varop, count);
10392 count = first_count;
10393 code = ASHIFTRT;
10394 continue;
10397 /* If this was (ashiftrt (ashift foo C1) C2) and FOO has more
10398 than C1 high-order bits equal to the sign bit, we can convert
10399 this to either an ASHIFT or an ASHIFTRT depending on the
10400 two counts.
10402 We cannot do this if VAROP's mode is not SHIFT_MODE. */
10404 if (code == ASHIFTRT && first_code == ASHIFT
10405 && GET_MODE (varop) == shift_mode
10406 && (num_sign_bit_copies (XEXP (varop, 0), shift_mode)
10407 > first_count))
10409 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10410 count -= first_count;
10411 if (count < 0)
10413 count = -count;
10414 code = ASHIFT;
10417 continue;
10420 /* There are some cases we can't do. If CODE is ASHIFTRT,
10421 we can only do this if FIRST_CODE is also ASHIFTRT.
10423 We can't do the case when CODE is ROTATE and FIRST_CODE is
10424 ASHIFTRT.
10426 If the mode of this shift is not the mode of the outer shift,
10427 we can't do this if either shift is a right shift or ROTATE.
10429 Finally, we can't do any of these if the mode is too wide
10430 unless the codes are the same.
10432 Handle the case where the shift codes are the same
10433 first. */
10435 if (code == first_code)
10437 if (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10438 && (code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT
10439 || code == ROTATE))
10440 break;
10442 count += first_count;
10443 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10444 continue;
10447 if (code == ASHIFTRT
10448 || (code == ROTATE && first_code == ASHIFTRT)
10449 || GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10450 || (GET_MODE (varop) != result_mode
10451 && (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT
10452 || first_code == ROTATE
10453 || code == ROTATE)))
10454 break;
10456 /* To compute the mask to apply after the shift, shift the
10457 nonzero bits of the inner shift the same way the
10458 outer shift will. */
10460 mask_rtx = gen_int_mode (nonzero_bits (varop, GET_MODE (varop)),
10461 result_mode);
10463 mask_rtx
10464 = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, result_mode, mask_rtx,
10465 GEN_INT (count));
10467 /* Give up if we can't compute an outer operation to use. */
10468 if (mask_rtx == 0
10469 || !CONST_INT_P (mask_rtx)
10470 || ! merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, AND,
10471 INTVAL (mask_rtx),
10472 result_mode, &complement_p))
10473 break;
10475 /* If the shifts are in the same direction, we add the
10476 counts. Otherwise, we subtract them. */
10477 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10478 == (first_code == ASHIFTRT || first_code == LSHIFTRT))
10479 count += first_count;
10480 else
10481 count -= first_count;
10483 /* If COUNT is positive, the new shift is usually CODE,
10484 except for the two exceptions below, in which case it is
10485 FIRST_CODE. If the count is negative, FIRST_CODE should
10486 always be used */
10487 if (count > 0
10488 && ((first_code == ROTATE && code == ASHIFT)
10489 || (first_code == ASHIFTRT && code == LSHIFTRT)))
10490 code = first_code;
10491 else if (count < 0)
10492 code = first_code, count = -count;
10494 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10495 continue;
10498 /* If we have (A << B << C) for any shift, we can convert this to
10499 (A << C << B). This wins if A is a constant. Only try this if
10500 B is not a constant. */
10502 else if (GET_CODE (varop) == code
10503 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 0))
10504 && !CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1)))
10506 rtx new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation (code, mode,
10507 XEXP (varop, 0),
10508 GEN_INT (count));
10509 varop = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, mode, new_rtx, XEXP (varop, 1));
10510 count = 0;
10511 continue;
10513 break;
10515 case NOT:
10516 if (VECTOR_MODE_P (mode))
10517 break;
10519 /* Make this fit the case below. */
10520 varop = gen_rtx_XOR (mode, XEXP (varop, 0), constm1_rtx);
10521 continue;
10523 case IOR:
10524 case AND:
10525 case XOR:
10526 /* If we have (xshiftrt (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) C)
10527 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10528 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10529 we have an (le X 0) operation. If we have an arithmetic shift
10530 and STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 or we have a logical shift with
10531 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of -1, we have a (neg (le X 0)) operation. */
10533 if (GET_CODE (varop) == IOR && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == PLUS
10534 && XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
10535 && (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10536 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10537 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10538 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10540 count = 0;
10541 varop = gen_rtx_LE (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10542 const0_rtx);
10544 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10545 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10547 continue;
10550 /* If we have (shift (logical)), move the logical to the outside
10551 to allow it to possibly combine with another logical and the
10552 shift to combine with another shift. This also canonicalizes to
10553 what a ZERO_EXTRACT looks like. Also, some machines have
10554 (and (shift)) insns. */
10556 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10557 /* We can't do this if we have (ashiftrt (xor)) and the
10558 constant has its sign bit set in shift_mode with shift_mode
10559 wider than result_mode. */
10560 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10561 && result_mode != shift_mode
10562 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10563 shift_mode))
10564 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10565 (code, result_mode,
10566 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10567 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10568 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10569 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, GET_CODE (varop),
10570 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10572 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10573 continue;
10576 /* If we can't do that, try to simplify the shift in each arm of the
10577 logical expression, make a new logical expression, and apply
10578 the inverse distributive law. This also can't be done for
10579 (ashiftrt (xor)) where we've widened the shift and the constant
10580 changes the sign bit. */
10581 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10582 && !(code == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (varop) == XOR
10583 && result_mode != shift_mode
10584 && 0 > trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)),
10585 shift_mode)))
10587 rtx lhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10588 XEXP (varop, 0), count);
10589 rtx rhs = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, code, shift_mode,
10590 XEXP (varop, 1), count);
10592 varop = simplify_gen_binary (GET_CODE (varop), shift_mode,
10593 lhs, rhs);
10594 varop = apply_distributive_law (varop);
10596 count = 0;
10597 continue;
10599 break;
10601 case EQ:
10602 /* Convert (lshiftrt (eq FOO 0) C) to (xor FOO 1) if STORE_FLAG_VALUE
10603 says that the sign bit can be tested, FOO has mode MODE, C is
10604 GET_MODE_PRECISION (MODE) - 1, and FOO has only its low-order bit
10605 that may be nonzero. */
10606 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10607 && XEXP (varop, 1) == const0_rtx
10608 && GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == result_mode
10609 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10610 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10611 && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1
10612 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10613 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10614 &complement_p))
10616 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10617 count = 0;
10618 continue;
10620 break;
10622 case NEG:
10623 /* (lshiftrt (neg A) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C is one less
10624 than the number of bits in the mode is equivalent to A. */
10625 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10626 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10627 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1)
10629 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10630 count = 0;
10631 continue;
10634 /* NEG commutes with ASHIFT since it is multiplication. Move the
10635 NEG outside to allow shifts to combine. */
10636 if (code == ASHIFT
10637 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, NEG, 0, result_mode,
10638 &complement_p))
10640 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10641 continue;
10643 break;
10645 case PLUS:
10646 /* (lshiftrt (plus A -1) C) where A is either 0 or 1 and C
10647 is one less than the number of bits in the mode is
10648 equivalent to (xor A 1). */
10649 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10650 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) - 1)
10651 && XEXP (varop, 1) == constm1_rtx
10652 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode) == 1
10653 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR, 1, result_mode,
10654 &complement_p))
10656 count = 0;
10657 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10658 continue;
10661 /* If we have (xshiftrt (plus FOO BAR) C), and the only bits
10662 that might be nonzero in BAR are those being shifted out and those
10663 bits are known zero in FOO, we can replace the PLUS with FOO.
10664 Similarly in the other operand order. This code occurs when
10665 we are computing the size of a variable-size array. */
10667 if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10668 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10669 && nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode) >> count == 0
10670 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1), result_mode)
10671 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)) == 0)
10673 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10674 continue;
10676 else if ((code == ASHIFTRT || code == LSHIFTRT)
10677 && count < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
10678 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (result_mode)
10679 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10680 >> count)
10681 && 0 == (nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 0), result_mode)
10682 & nonzero_bits (XEXP (varop, 1),
10683 result_mode)))
10685 varop = XEXP (varop, 1);
10686 continue;
10689 /* (ashift (plus foo C) N) is (plus (ashift foo N) C'). */
10690 if (code == ASHIFT
10691 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10692 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10693 (ASHIFT, result_mode,
10694 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10695 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10696 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10697 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, PLUS,
10698 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10700 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10701 continue;
10704 /* Check for 'PLUS signbit', which is the canonical form of 'XOR
10705 signbit', and attempt to change the PLUS to an XOR and move it to
10706 the outer operation as is done above in the AND/IOR/XOR case
10707 leg for shift(logical). See details in logical handling above
10708 for reasoning in doing so. */
10709 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10710 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (varop, 1))
10711 && mode_signbit_p (result_mode, XEXP (varop, 1))
10712 && (new_rtx = simplify_const_binary_operation
10713 (code, result_mode,
10714 gen_int_mode (INTVAL (XEXP (varop, 1)), result_mode),
10715 GEN_INT (count))) != 0
10716 && CONST_INT_P (new_rtx)
10717 && merge_outer_ops (&outer_op, &outer_const, XOR,
10718 INTVAL (new_rtx), result_mode, &complement_p))
10720 varop = XEXP (varop, 0);
10721 continue;
10724 break;
10726 case MINUS:
10727 /* If we have (xshiftrt (minus (ashiftrt X C)) X) C)
10728 with C the size of VAROP - 1 and the shift is logical if
10729 STORE_FLAG_VALUE is 1 and arithmetic if STORE_FLAG_VALUE is -1,
10730 we have a (gt X 0) operation. If the shift is arithmetic with
10731 STORE_FLAG_VALUE of 1 or logical with STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1,
10732 we have a (neg (gt X 0)) operation. */
10734 if ((STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 || STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
10735 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
10736 && count == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)) - 1)
10737 && (code == LSHIFTRT || code == ASHIFTRT)
10738 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10739 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1)) == count
10740 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 0), XEXP (varop, 1)))
10742 count = 0;
10743 varop = gen_rtx_GT (GET_MODE (varop), XEXP (varop, 1),
10744 const0_rtx);
10746 if (STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 ? code == ASHIFTRT : code == LSHIFTRT)
10747 varop = gen_rtx_NEG (GET_MODE (varop), varop);
10749 continue;
10751 break;
10753 case TRUNCATE:
10754 /* Change (lshiftrt (truncate (lshiftrt))) to (truncate (lshiftrt))
10755 if the truncate does not affect the value. */
10756 if (code == LSHIFTRT
10757 && GET_CODE (XEXP (varop, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
10758 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10759 && (INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (varop, 0), 1))
10760 >= (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (varop, 0)))
10761 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (varop)))))
10763 rtx varop_inner = XEXP (varop, 0);
10765 varop_inner
10766 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (GET_MODE (varop_inner),
10767 XEXP (varop_inner, 0),
10768 GEN_INT
10769 (count + INTVAL (XEXP (varop_inner, 1))));
10770 varop = gen_rtx_TRUNCATE (GET_MODE (varop), varop_inner);
10771 count = 0;
10772 continue;
10774 break;
10776 default:
10777 break;
10780 break;
10783 shift_mode = try_widen_shift_mode (code, varop, count, result_mode, mode,
10784 outer_op, outer_const);
10786 /* We have now finished analyzing the shift. The result should be
10787 a shift of type CODE with SHIFT_MODE shifting VAROP COUNT places. If
10788 OUTER_OP is non-UNKNOWN, it is an operation that needs to be applied
10789 to the result of the shift. OUTER_CONST is the relevant constant,
10790 but we must turn off all bits turned off in the shift. */
10792 if (outer_op == UNKNOWN
10793 && orig_code == code && orig_count == count
10794 && varop == orig_varop
10795 && shift_mode == GET_MODE (varop))
10796 return NULL_RTX;
10798 /* Make a SUBREG if necessary. If we can't make it, fail. */
10799 varop = gen_lowpart (shift_mode, varop);
10800 if (varop == NULL_RTX || GET_CODE (varop) == CLOBBER)
10801 return NULL_RTX;
10803 /* If we have an outer operation and we just made a shift, it is
10804 possible that we could have simplified the shift were it not
10805 for the outer operation. So try to do the simplification
10806 recursively. */
10808 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
10809 x = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, shift_mode, varop, count);
10810 else
10811 x = NULL_RTX;
10813 if (x == NULL_RTX)
10814 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, shift_mode, varop, GEN_INT (count));
10816 /* If we were doing an LSHIFTRT in a wider mode than it was originally,
10817 turn off all the bits that the shift would have turned off. */
10818 if (orig_code == LSHIFTRT && result_mode != shift_mode)
10819 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, shift_mode, x,
10820 GET_MODE_MASK (result_mode) >> orig_count);
10822 /* Do the remainder of the processing in RESULT_MODE. */
10823 x = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (result_mode, x);
10825 /* If COMPLEMENT_P is set, we have to complement X before doing the outer
10826 operation. */
10827 if (complement_p)
10828 x = simplify_gen_unary (NOT, result_mode, x, result_mode);
10830 if (outer_op != UNKNOWN)
10832 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) != RTX_UNARY
10833 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (result_mode) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
10834 outer_const = trunc_int_for_mode (outer_const, result_mode);
10836 if (outer_op == AND)
10837 x = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, result_mode, x, outer_const);
10838 else if (outer_op == SET)
10840 /* This means that we have determined that the result is
10841 equivalent to a constant. This should be rare. */
10842 if (!side_effects_p (x))
10843 x = GEN_INT (outer_const);
10845 else if (GET_RTX_CLASS (outer_op) == RTX_UNARY)
10846 x = simplify_gen_unary (outer_op, result_mode, x, result_mode);
10847 else
10848 x = simplify_gen_binary (outer_op, result_mode, x,
10849 GEN_INT (outer_const));
10852 return x;
10855 /* Simplify a shift of VAROP by COUNT bits. CODE says what kind of shift.
10856 The result of the shift is RESULT_MODE. If we cannot simplify it,
10857 return X or, if it is NULL, synthesize the expression with
10858 simplify_gen_binary. Otherwise, return a simplified value.
10860 The shift is normally computed in the widest mode we find in VAROP, as
10861 long as it isn't a different number of words than RESULT_MODE. Exceptions
10862 are ASHIFTRT and ROTATE, which are always done in their original mode. */
10864 static rtx
10865 simplify_shift_const (rtx x, enum rtx_code code, machine_mode result_mode,
10866 rtx varop, int count)
10868 rtx tem = simplify_shift_const_1 (code, result_mode, varop, count);
10869 if (tem)
10870 return tem;
10872 if (!x)
10873 x = simplify_gen_binary (code, GET_MODE (varop), varop, GEN_INT (count));
10874 if (GET_MODE (x) != result_mode)
10875 x = gen_lowpart (result_mode, x);
10876 return x;
10880 /* A subroutine of recog_for_combine. See there for arguments and
10881 return value. */
10883 static int
10884 recog_for_combine_1 (rtx *pnewpat, rtx_insn *insn, rtx *pnotes)
10886 rtx pat = *pnewpat;
10887 rtx pat_without_clobbers;
10888 int insn_code_number;
10889 int num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
10890 int i;
10891 rtx notes = NULL_RTX;
10892 rtx old_notes, old_pat;
10893 int old_icode;
10895 /* If PAT is a PARALLEL, check to see if it contains the CLOBBER
10896 we use to indicate that something didn't match. If we find such a
10897 thing, force rejection. */
10898 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10899 for (i = XVECLEN (pat, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
10900 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) == CLOBBER
10901 && XEXP (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i), 0) == const0_rtx)
10902 return -1;
10904 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
10905 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
10906 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
10907 REG_NOTES (insn) = NULL_RTX;
10909 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
10910 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
10912 if (insn_code_number < 0)
10913 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10914 else
10915 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10916 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
10919 /* If it isn't, there is the possibility that we previously had an insn
10920 that clobbered some register as a side effect, but the combined
10921 insn doesn't need to do that. So try once more without the clobbers
10922 unless this represents an ASM insn. */
10924 if (insn_code_number < 0 && ! check_asm_operands (pat)
10925 && GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10927 int pos;
10929 for (pos = 0, i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
10930 if (GET_CODE (XVECEXP (pat, 0, i)) != CLOBBER)
10932 if (i != pos)
10933 SUBST (XVECEXP (pat, 0, pos), XVECEXP (pat, 0, i));
10934 pos++;
10937 SUBST_INT (XVECLEN (pat, 0), pos);
10939 if (pos == 1)
10940 pat = XVECEXP (pat, 0, 0);
10942 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
10943 insn_code_number = recog (pat, insn, &num_clobbers_to_add);
10944 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
10946 if (insn_code_number < 0)
10947 fputs ("Failed to match this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10948 else
10949 fputs ("Successfully matched this instruction:\n", dump_file);
10950 print_rtl_single (dump_file, pat);
10954 pat_without_clobbers = pat;
10956 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
10957 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
10959 /* Recognize all noop sets, these will be killed by followup pass. */
10960 if (insn_code_number < 0 && GET_CODE (pat) == SET && set_noop_p (pat))
10961 insn_code_number = NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE, num_clobbers_to_add = 0;
10963 /* If we had any clobbers to add, make a new pattern than contains
10964 them. Then check to make sure that all of them are dead. */
10965 if (num_clobbers_to_add)
10967 rtx newpat = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
10968 rtvec_alloc (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL
10969 ? (XVECLEN (pat, 0)
10970 + num_clobbers_to_add)
10971 : num_clobbers_to_add + 1));
10973 if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
10974 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
10975 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i) = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
10976 else
10977 XVECEXP (newpat, 0, 0) = pat;
10979 add_clobbers (newpat, insn_code_number);
10981 for (i = XVECLEN (newpat, 0) - num_clobbers_to_add;
10982 i < XVECLEN (newpat, 0); i++)
10984 if (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0))
10985 && ! reg_dead_at_p (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), insn))
10986 return -1;
10987 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)) != SCRATCH)
10989 gcc_assert (REG_P (XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0)));
10990 notes = alloc_reg_note (REG_UNUSED,
10991 XEXP (XVECEXP (newpat, 0, i), 0), notes);
10994 pat = newpat;
10997 if (insn_code_number >= 0
10998 && insn_code_number != NOOP_MOVE_INSN_CODE)
11000 old_pat = PATTERN (insn);
11001 old_notes = REG_NOTES (insn);
11002 old_icode = INSN_CODE (insn);
11003 PATTERN (insn) = pat;
11004 REG_NOTES (insn) = notes;
11006 /* Allow targets to reject combined insn. */
11007 if (!targetm.legitimate_combined_insn (insn))
11009 if (dump_file && (dump_flags & TDF_DETAILS))
11010 fputs ("Instruction not appropriate for target.",
11011 dump_file);
11013 /* Callers expect recog_for_combine to strip
11014 clobbers from the pattern on failure. */
11015 pat = pat_without_clobbers;
11016 notes = NULL_RTX;
11018 insn_code_number = -1;
11021 PATTERN (insn) = old_pat;
11022 REG_NOTES (insn) = old_notes;
11023 INSN_CODE (insn) = old_icode;
11026 *pnewpat = pat;
11027 *pnotes = notes;
11029 return insn_code_number;
11032 /* Change every ZERO_EXTRACT and ZERO_EXTEND of a SUBREG that can be
11033 expressed as an AND and maybe an LSHIFTRT, to that formulation.
11034 Return whether anything was so changed. */
11036 static bool
11037 change_zero_ext (rtx *src)
11039 bool changed = false;
11041 subrtx_ptr_iterator::array_type array;
11042 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_PTR (iter, array, src, NONCONST)
11044 rtx x = **iter;
11045 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
11046 int size;
11048 if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTRACT
11049 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 1))
11050 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (x, 2))
11051 && GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == mode)
11053 size = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 1));
11055 int start = INTVAL (XEXP (x, 2));
11056 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11057 start = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - size - start;
11059 x = simplify_gen_binary (LSHIFTRT, mode,
11060 XEXP (x, 0), GEN_INT (start));
11062 else if (GET_CODE (x) == ZERO_EXTEND
11063 && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == SUBREG
11064 && GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0))) == mode
11065 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (x, 0)))
11067 size = GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0)));
11068 x = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (x, 0));
11070 else
11071 continue;
11073 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = 1;
11074 mask <<= size;
11075 mask--;
11077 x = gen_rtx_AND (mode, x, GEN_INT (mask));
11079 SUBST (**iter, x);
11080 changed = true;
11083 return changed;
11086 /* Like recog, but we receive the address of a pointer to a new pattern.
11087 We try to match the rtx that the pointer points to.
11088 If that fails, we may try to modify or replace the pattern,
11089 storing the replacement into the same pointer object.
11091 Modifications include deletion or addition of CLOBBERs. If the
11092 instruction will still not match, we change ZERO_EXTEND and ZERO_EXTRACT
11093 to the equivalent AND and perhaps LSHIFTRT patterns, and try with that
11094 (and undo if that fails).
11096 PNOTES is a pointer to a location where any REG_UNUSED notes added for
11097 the CLOBBERs are placed.
11099 The value is the final insn code from the pattern ultimately matched,
11100 or -1. */
11102 static int
11103 recog_for_combine (rtx *pnewpat, rtx_insn *insn, rtx *pnotes)
11105 rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
11106 int insn_code_number = recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat, insn, pnotes);
11107 if (insn_code_number >= 0 || check_asm_operands (pat))
11108 return insn_code_number;
11110 void *marker = get_undo_marker ();
11111 bool changed = false;
11113 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
11114 changed = change_zero_ext (&SET_SRC (pat));
11115 else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
11117 int i;
11118 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
11120 rtx set = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
11121 if (GET_CODE (set) == SET)
11122 changed |= change_zero_ext (&SET_SRC (set));
11126 if (changed)
11128 insn_code_number = recog_for_combine_1 (pnewpat, insn, pnotes);
11130 if (insn_code_number < 0)
11131 undo_to_marker (marker);
11134 return insn_code_number;
11137 /* Like gen_lowpart_general but for use by combine. In combine it
11138 is not possible to create any new pseudoregs. However, it is
11139 safe to create invalid memory addresses, because combine will
11140 try to recognize them and all they will do is make the combine
11141 attempt fail.
11143 If for some reason this cannot do its job, an rtx
11144 (clobber (const_int 0)) is returned.
11145 An insn containing that will not be recognized. */
11147 static rtx
11148 gen_lowpart_for_combine (machine_mode omode, rtx x)
11150 machine_mode imode = GET_MODE (x);
11151 unsigned int osize = GET_MODE_SIZE (omode);
11152 unsigned int isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11153 rtx result;
11155 if (omode == imode)
11156 return x;
11158 /* We can only support MODE being wider than a word if X is a
11159 constant integer or has a mode the same size. */
11160 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (omode) > UNITS_PER_WORD
11161 && ! (CONST_SCALAR_INT_P (x) || isize == osize))
11162 goto fail;
11164 /* X might be a paradoxical (subreg (mem)). In that case, gen_lowpart
11165 won't know what to do. So we will strip off the SUBREG here and
11166 process normally. */
11167 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && MEM_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
11169 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
11171 /* For use in case we fall down into the address adjustments
11172 further below, we need to adjust the known mode and size of
11173 x; imode and isize, since we just adjusted x. */
11174 imode = GET_MODE (x);
11176 if (imode == omode)
11177 return x;
11179 isize = GET_MODE_SIZE (imode);
11182 result = gen_lowpart_common (omode, x);
11184 if (result)
11185 return result;
11187 if (MEM_P (x))
11189 int offset = 0;
11191 /* Refuse to work on a volatile memory ref or one with a mode-dependent
11192 address. */
11193 if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (x)
11194 || mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (x, 0), MEM_ADDR_SPACE (x)))
11195 goto fail;
11197 /* If we want to refer to something bigger than the original memref,
11198 generate a paradoxical subreg instead. That will force a reload
11199 of the original memref X. */
11200 if (isize < osize)
11201 return gen_rtx_SUBREG (omode, x, 0);
11203 if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11204 offset = MAX (isize, UNITS_PER_WORD) - MAX (osize, UNITS_PER_WORD);
11206 /* Adjust the address so that the address-after-the-data is
11207 unchanged. */
11208 if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN)
11209 offset -= MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, osize) - MIN (UNITS_PER_WORD, isize);
11211 return adjust_address_nv (x, omode, offset);
11214 /* If X is a comparison operator, rewrite it in a new mode. This
11215 probably won't match, but may allow further simplifications. */
11216 else if (COMPARISON_P (x))
11217 return gen_rtx_fmt_ee (GET_CODE (x), omode, XEXP (x, 0), XEXP (x, 1));
11219 /* If we couldn't simplify X any other way, just enclose it in a
11220 SUBREG. Normally, this SUBREG won't match, but some patterns may
11221 include an explicit SUBREG or we may simplify it further in combine. */
11222 else
11224 rtx res;
11226 if (imode == VOIDmode)
11228 imode = int_mode_for_mode (omode);
11229 x = gen_lowpart_common (imode, x);
11230 if (x == NULL)
11231 goto fail;
11233 res = lowpart_subreg (omode, x, imode);
11234 if (res)
11235 return res;
11238 fail:
11239 return gen_rtx_CLOBBER (omode, const0_rtx);
11242 /* Try to simplify a comparison between OP0 and a constant OP1,
11243 where CODE is the comparison code that will be tested, into a
11244 (CODE OP0 const0_rtx) form.
11246 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use.
11247 *POP1 may be updated. */
11249 static enum rtx_code
11250 simplify_compare_const (enum rtx_code code, machine_mode mode,
11251 rtx op0, rtx *pop1)
11253 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11254 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op = INTVAL (*pop1);
11256 /* Get the constant we are comparing against and turn off all bits
11257 not on in our mode. */
11258 if (mode != VOIDmode)
11259 const_op = trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode);
11261 /* If we are comparing against a constant power of two and the value
11262 being compared can only have that single bit nonzero (e.g., it was
11263 `and'ed with that bit), we can replace this with a comparison
11264 with zero. */
11265 if (const_op
11266 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == GEU
11267 || code == LT || code == LTU)
11268 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11269 && exact_log2 (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) >= 0
11270 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11271 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))))
11273 code = (code == EQ || code == GE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11274 const_op = 0;
11277 /* Similarly, if we are comparing a value known to be either -1 or
11278 0 with -1, change it to the opposite comparison against zero. */
11279 if (const_op == -1
11280 && (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GT || code == LE
11281 || code == GEU || code == LTU)
11282 && num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) == mode_width)
11284 code = (code == EQ || code == LE || code == GEU ? NE : EQ);
11285 const_op = 0;
11288 /* Do some canonicalizations based on the comparison code. We prefer
11289 comparisons against zero and then prefer equality comparisons.
11290 If we can reduce the size of a constant, we will do that too. */
11291 switch (code)
11293 case LT:
11294 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1) */
11295 if (const_op > 0)
11297 const_op -= 1;
11298 code = LE;
11299 /* ... fall through to LE case below. */
11301 else
11302 break;
11304 case LE:
11305 /* <= C is equivalent to < (C + 1); we do this for C < 0 */
11306 if (const_op < 0)
11308 const_op += 1;
11309 code = LT;
11312 /* If we are doing a <= 0 comparison on a value known to have
11313 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with == 0. */
11314 else if (const_op == 0
11315 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11316 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11317 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11318 == 0)
11319 code = EQ;
11320 break;
11322 case GE:
11323 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11324 if (const_op > 0)
11326 const_op -= 1;
11327 code = GT;
11328 /* ... fall through to GT below. */
11330 else
11331 break;
11333 case GT:
11334 /* > C is equivalent to >= (C + 1); we do this for C < 0. */
11335 if (const_op < 0)
11337 const_op += 1;
11338 code = GE;
11341 /* If we are doing a > 0 comparison on a value known to have
11342 a zero sign bit, we can replace this with != 0. */
11343 else if (const_op == 0
11344 && mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11345 && (nonzero_bits (op0, mode)
11346 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11347 == 0)
11348 code = NE;
11349 break;
11351 case LTU:
11352 /* < C is equivalent to <= (C - 1). */
11353 if (const_op > 0)
11355 const_op -= 1;
11356 code = LEU;
11357 /* ... fall through ... */
11359 /* (unsigned) < 0x80000000 is equivalent to >= 0. */
11360 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11361 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11362 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))
11364 const_op = 0;
11365 code = GE;
11366 break;
11368 else
11369 break;
11371 case LEU:
11372 /* unsigned <= 0 is equivalent to == 0 */
11373 if (const_op == 0)
11374 code = EQ;
11375 /* (unsigned) <= 0x7fffffff is equivalent to >= 0. */
11376 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11377 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11378 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11380 const_op = 0;
11381 code = GE;
11383 break;
11385 case GEU:
11386 /* >= C is equivalent to > (C - 1). */
11387 if (const_op > 1)
11389 const_op -= 1;
11390 code = GTU;
11391 /* ... fall through ... */
11394 /* (unsigned) >= 0x80000000 is equivalent to < 0. */
11395 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11396 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11397 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1))
11399 const_op = 0;
11400 code = LT;
11401 break;
11403 else
11404 break;
11406 case GTU:
11407 /* unsigned > 0 is equivalent to != 0 */
11408 if (const_op == 0)
11409 code = NE;
11410 /* (unsigned) > 0x7fffffff is equivalent to < 0. */
11411 else if (mode_width - 1 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11412 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
11413 == ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)) - 1)
11415 const_op = 0;
11416 code = LT;
11418 break;
11420 default:
11421 break;
11424 *pop1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
11425 return code;
11428 /* Simplify a comparison between *POP0 and *POP1 where CODE is the
11429 comparison code that will be tested.
11431 The result is a possibly different comparison code to use. *POP0 and
11432 *POP1 may be updated.
11434 It is possible that we might detect that a comparison is either always
11435 true or always false. However, we do not perform general constant
11436 folding in combine, so this knowledge isn't useful. Such tautologies
11437 should have been detected earlier. Hence we ignore all such cases. */
11439 static enum rtx_code
11440 simplify_comparison (enum rtx_code code, rtx *pop0, rtx *pop1)
11442 rtx op0 = *pop0;
11443 rtx op1 = *pop1;
11444 rtx tem, tem1;
11445 int i;
11446 machine_mode mode, tmode;
11448 /* Try a few ways of applying the same transformation to both operands. */
11449 while (1)
11451 /* The test below this one won't handle SIGN_EXTENDs on these machines,
11452 so check specially. */
11453 if (!WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
11454 && code != GTU && code != GEU && code != LTU && code != LEU
11455 && GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT && GET_CODE (op1) == ASHIFTRT
11456 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
11457 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op1, 0)) == ASHIFT
11458 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11459 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0)) == SUBREG
11460 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)))
11461 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0))))
11462 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11463 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1)
11464 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
11465 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 1)
11466 && (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
11467 == (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (op0))
11468 - (GET_MODE_PRECISION
11469 (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))))))))
11471 op0 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
11472 op1 = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (XEXP (op1, 0), 0));
11475 /* If both operands are the same constant shift, see if we can ignore the
11476 shift. We can if the shift is a rotate or if the bits shifted out of
11477 this shift are known to be zero for both inputs and if the type of
11478 comparison is compatible with the shift. */
11479 if (GET_CODE (op0) == GET_CODE (op1)
11480 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (GET_MODE (op0))
11481 && ((GET_CODE (op0) == ROTATE && (code == NE || code == EQ))
11482 || ((GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11483 && (code != GT && code != LT && code != GE && code != LE))
11484 || (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT
11485 && (code != GTU && code != LTU
11486 && code != GEU && code != LEU)))
11487 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11488 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
11489 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11490 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (op1, 1))
11492 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11493 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11494 int shift_count = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11496 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT || GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFTRT)
11497 mask &= (mask >> shift_count) << shift_count;
11498 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == ASHIFT)
11499 mask = (mask & (mask << shift_count)) >> shift_count;
11501 if ((nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0
11502 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op1, 0), mode) & ~mask) == 0)
11503 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11504 else
11505 break;
11508 /* If both operands are AND's of a paradoxical SUBREG by constant, the
11509 SUBREGs are of the same mode, and, in both cases, the AND would
11510 be redundant if the comparison was done in the narrower mode,
11511 do the comparison in the narrower mode (e.g., we are AND'ing with 1
11512 and the operand's possibly nonzero bits are 0xffffff01; in that case
11513 if we only care about QImode, we don't need the AND). This case
11514 occurs if the output mode of an scc insn is not SImode and
11515 STORE_FLAG_VALUE == 1 (e.g., the 386).
11517 Similarly, check for a case where the AND's are ZERO_EXTEND
11518 operations from some narrower mode even though a SUBREG is not
11519 present. */
11521 else if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND && GET_CODE (op1) == AND
11522 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11523 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
11525 rtx inner_op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11526 rtx inner_op1 = XEXP (op1, 0);
11527 HOST_WIDE_INT c0 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
11528 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op1, 1));
11529 int changed = 0;
11531 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (inner_op0)
11532 && GET_CODE (inner_op1) == SUBREG
11533 && (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0))
11534 == GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1)))
11535 && (GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))
11536 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11537 && (0 == ((~c0) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0),
11538 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op0)))))
11539 && (0 == ((~c1) & nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1),
11540 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (inner_op1))))))
11542 op0 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op0);
11543 op1 = SUBREG_REG (inner_op1);
11545 /* The resulting comparison is always unsigned since we masked
11546 off the original sign bit. */
11547 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11549 changed = 1;
11552 else if (c0 == c1)
11553 for (tmode = GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE
11554 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)));
11555 tmode != GET_MODE (op0); tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
11556 if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c0 == GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
11558 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, inner_op0);
11559 op1 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, inner_op1);
11560 code = unsigned_condition (code);
11561 changed = 1;
11562 break;
11565 if (! changed)
11566 break;
11569 /* If both operands are NOT, we can strip off the outer operation
11570 and adjust the comparison code for swapped operands; similarly for
11571 NEG, except that this must be an equality comparison. */
11572 else if ((GET_CODE (op0) == NOT && GET_CODE (op1) == NOT)
11573 || (GET_CODE (op0) == NEG && GET_CODE (op1) == NEG
11574 && (code == EQ || code == NE)))
11575 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0), op1 = XEXP (op1, 0), code = swap_condition (code);
11577 else
11578 break;
11581 /* If the first operand is a constant, swap the operands and adjust the
11582 comparison code appropriately, but don't do this if the second operand
11583 is already a constant integer. */
11584 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
11586 std::swap (op0, op1);
11587 code = swap_condition (code);
11590 /* We now enter a loop during which we will try to simplify the comparison.
11591 For the most part, we only are concerned with comparisons with zero,
11592 but some things may really be comparisons with zero but not start
11593 out looking that way. */
11595 while (CONST_INT_P (op1))
11597 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
11598 unsigned int mode_width = GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode);
11599 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT mask = GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
11600 int equality_comparison_p;
11601 int sign_bit_comparison_p;
11602 int unsigned_comparison_p;
11603 HOST_WIDE_INT const_op;
11605 /* We only want to handle integral modes. This catches VOIDmode,
11606 CCmode, and the floating-point modes. An exception is that we
11607 can handle VOIDmode if OP0 is a COMPARE or a comparison
11608 operation. */
11610 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) != MODE_INT
11611 && ! (mode == VOIDmode
11612 && (GET_CODE (op0) == COMPARE || COMPARISON_P (op0))))
11613 break;
11615 /* Try to simplify the compare to constant, possibly changing the
11616 comparison op, and/or changing op1 to zero. */
11617 code = simplify_compare_const (code, mode, op0, &op1);
11618 const_op = INTVAL (op1);
11620 /* Compute some predicates to simplify code below. */
11622 equality_comparison_p = (code == EQ || code == NE);
11623 sign_bit_comparison_p = ((code == LT || code == GE) && const_op == 0);
11624 unsigned_comparison_p = (code == LTU || code == LEU || code == GTU
11625 || code == GEU);
11627 /* If this is a sign bit comparison and we can do arithmetic in
11628 MODE, say that we will only be needing the sign bit of OP0. */
11629 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
11630 op0 = force_to_mode (op0, mode,
11631 (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
11632 << (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) - 1),
11635 /* Now try cases based on the opcode of OP0. If none of the cases
11636 does a "continue", we exit this loop immediately after the
11637 switch. */
11639 switch (GET_CODE (op0))
11641 case ZERO_EXTRACT:
11642 /* If we are extracting a single bit from a variable position in
11643 a constant that has only a single bit set and are comparing it
11644 with zero, we can convert this into an equality comparison
11645 between the position and the location of the single bit. */
11646 /* Except we can't if SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED is set, since we might
11647 have already reduced the shift count modulo the word size. */
11648 if (!SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
11649 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11650 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
11651 && equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
11652 && (i = exact_log2 (UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 0)))) >= 0)
11654 if (BITS_BIG_ENDIAN)
11655 i = BITS_PER_WORD - 1 - i;
11657 op0 = XEXP (op0, 2);
11658 op1 = GEN_INT (i);
11659 const_op = i;
11661 /* Result is nonzero iff shift count is equal to I. */
11662 code = reverse_condition (code);
11663 continue;
11666 /* ... fall through ... */
11668 case SIGN_EXTRACT:
11669 tem = expand_compound_operation (op0);
11670 if (tem != op0)
11672 op0 = tem;
11673 continue;
11675 break;
11677 case NOT:
11678 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NOT of the constant. */
11679 if (equality_comparison_p
11680 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NOT, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11682 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11683 op1 = tem;
11684 continue;
11687 /* If just looking at the sign bit, reverse the sense of the
11688 comparison. */
11689 if (sign_bit_comparison_p)
11691 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11692 code = (code == GE ? LT : GE);
11693 continue;
11695 break;
11697 case NEG:
11698 /* If testing for equality, we can take the NEG of the constant. */
11699 if (equality_comparison_p
11700 && (tem = simplify_unary_operation (NEG, mode, op1, mode)) != 0)
11702 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11703 op1 = tem;
11704 continue;
11707 /* The remaining cases only apply to comparisons with zero. */
11708 if (const_op != 0)
11709 break;
11711 /* When X is ABS or is known positive,
11712 (neg X) is < 0 if and only if X != 0. */
11714 if (sign_bit_comparison_p
11715 && (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS
11716 || (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11717 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
11718 & ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
11719 == 0)))
11721 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11722 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
11723 continue;
11726 /* If we have NEG of something whose two high-order bits are the
11727 same, we know that "(-a) < 0" is equivalent to "a > 0". */
11728 if (num_sign_bit_copies (op0, mode) >= 2)
11730 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11731 code = swap_condition (code);
11732 continue;
11734 break;
11736 case ROTATE:
11737 /* If we are testing equality and our count is a constant, we
11738 can perform the inverse operation on our RHS. */
11739 if (equality_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11740 && (tem = simplify_binary_operation (ROTATERT, mode,
11741 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))) != 0)
11743 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11744 op1 = tem;
11745 continue;
11748 /* If we are doing a < 0 or >= 0 comparison, it means we are testing
11749 a particular bit. Convert it to an AND of a constant of that
11750 bit. This will be converted into a ZERO_EXTRACT. */
11751 if (const_op == 0 && sign_bit_comparison_p
11752 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
11753 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
11755 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
11756 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
11757 << (mode_width - 1
11758 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
11759 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
11760 continue;
11763 /* Fall through. */
11765 case ABS:
11766 /* ABS is ignorable inside an equality comparison with zero. */
11767 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p)
11769 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11770 continue;
11772 break;
11774 case SIGN_EXTEND:
11775 /* Can simplify (compare (zero/sign_extend FOO) CONST) to
11776 (compare FOO CONST) if CONST fits in FOO's mode and we
11777 are either testing inequality or have an unsigned
11778 comparison with ZERO_EXTEND or a signed comparison with
11779 SIGN_EXTEND. But don't do it if we don't have a compare
11780 insn of the given mode, since we'd have to revert it
11781 later on, and then we wouldn't know whether to sign- or
11782 zero-extend. */
11783 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
11784 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
11785 && ! unsigned_comparison_p
11786 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
11787 && trunc_int_for_mode (const_op, mode) == const_op
11788 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
11790 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11791 continue;
11793 break;
11795 case SUBREG:
11796 /* Check for the case where we are comparing A - C1 with C2, that is
11798 (subreg:MODE (plus (A) (-C1))) op (C2)
11800 with C1 a constant, and try to lift the SUBREG, i.e. to do the
11801 comparison in the wider mode. One of the following two conditions
11802 must be true in order for this to be valid:
11804 1. The mode extension results in the same bit pattern being added
11805 on both sides and the comparison is equality or unsigned. As
11806 C2 has been truncated to fit in MODE, the pattern can only be
11807 all 0s or all 1s.
11809 2. The mode extension results in the sign bit being copied on
11810 each side.
11812 The difficulty here is that we have predicates for A but not for
11813 (A - C1) so we need to check that C1 is within proper bounds so
11814 as to perturbate A as little as possible. */
11816 if (mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
11817 && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
11818 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) > mode_width
11819 && GET_CODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)) == PLUS
11820 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1)))
11822 machine_mode inner_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0));
11823 rtx a = XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 0);
11824 HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = -INTVAL (XEXP (SUBREG_REG (op0), 1));
11826 if ((c1 > 0
11827 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
11828 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)
11829 && (equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
11830 /* (A - C1) zero-extends if it is positive and sign-extends
11831 if it is negative, C2 both zero- and sign-extends. */
11832 && ((0 == (nonzero_bits (a, inner_mode)
11833 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
11834 && const_op >= 0)
11835 /* (A - C1) sign-extends if it is positive and 1-extends
11836 if it is negative, C2 both sign- and 1-extends. */
11837 || (num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
11838 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
11839 - mode_width)
11840 && const_op < 0)))
11841 || ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) c1
11842 < (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 2)
11843 /* (A - C1) always sign-extends, like C2. */
11844 && num_sign_bit_copies (a, inner_mode)
11845 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (inner_mode)
11846 - (mode_width - 1))))
11848 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
11849 continue;
11853 /* If the inner mode is narrower and we are extracting the low part,
11854 we can treat the SUBREG as if it were a ZERO_EXTEND. */
11855 if (subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
11856 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) < mode_width)
11857 /* Fall through */ ;
11858 else
11859 break;
11861 /* ... fall through ... */
11863 case ZERO_EXTEND:
11864 mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0));
11865 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
11866 && (unsigned_comparison_p || equality_comparison_p)
11867 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
11868 && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode)
11869 && const_op >= 0
11870 && have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
11872 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11873 continue;
11875 break;
11877 case PLUS:
11878 /* (eq (plus X A) B) -> (eq X (minus B A)). We can only do
11879 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
11880 overflows. */
11881 if (equality_comparison_p
11882 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
11883 op1, XEXP (op0, 1))))
11885 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11886 op1 = tem;
11887 continue;
11890 /* (plus (abs X) (const_int -1)) is < 0 if and only if X == 0. */
11891 if (const_op == 0 && XEXP (op0, 1) == constm1_rtx
11892 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ABS && sign_bit_comparison_p)
11894 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
11895 code = (code == LT ? EQ : NE);
11896 continue;
11898 break;
11900 case MINUS:
11901 /* We used to optimize signed comparisons against zero, but that
11902 was incorrect. Unsigned comparisons against zero (GTU, LEU)
11903 arrive here as equality comparisons, or (GEU, LTU) are
11904 optimized away. No need to special-case them. */
11906 /* (eq (minus A B) C) -> (eq A (plus B C)) or
11907 (eq B (minus A C)), whichever simplifies. We can only do
11908 this for equality comparisons due to pathological cases involving
11909 overflows. */
11910 if (equality_comparison_p
11911 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode,
11912 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
11914 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11915 op1 = tem;
11916 continue;
11919 if (equality_comparison_p
11920 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (MINUS, mode,
11921 XEXP (op0, 0), op1)))
11923 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11924 op1 = tem;
11925 continue;
11928 /* The sign bit of (minus (ashiftrt X C) X), where C is the number
11929 of bits in X minus 1, is one iff X > 0. */
11930 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFTRT
11931 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
11932 && UINTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) == mode_width - 1
11933 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
11935 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11936 code = (code == GE ? LE : GT);
11937 continue;
11939 break;
11941 case XOR:
11942 /* (eq (xor A B) C) -> (eq A (xor B C)). This is a simplification
11943 if C is zero or B is a constant. */
11944 if (equality_comparison_p
11945 && 0 != (tem = simplify_binary_operation (XOR, mode,
11946 XEXP (op0, 1), op1)))
11948 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
11949 op1 = tem;
11950 continue;
11952 break;
11954 case EQ: case NE:
11955 case UNEQ: case LTGT:
11956 case LT: case LTU: case UNLT: case LE: case LEU: case UNLE:
11957 case GT: case GTU: case UNGT: case GE: case GEU: case UNGE:
11958 case UNORDERED: case ORDERED:
11959 /* We can't do anything if OP0 is a condition code value, rather
11960 than an actual data value. */
11961 if (const_op != 0
11962 || CC0_P (XEXP (op0, 0))
11963 || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (XEXP (op0, 0))) == MODE_CC)
11964 break;
11966 /* Get the two operands being compared. */
11967 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == COMPARE)
11968 tem = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), tem1 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
11969 else
11970 tem = XEXP (op0, 0), tem1 = XEXP (op0, 1);
11972 /* Check for the cases where we simply want the result of the
11973 earlier test or the opposite of that result. */
11974 if (code == NE || code == EQ
11975 || (val_signbit_known_set_p (GET_MODE (op0), STORE_FLAG_VALUE)
11976 && (code == LT || code == GE)))
11978 enum rtx_code new_code;
11979 if (code == LT || code == NE)
11980 new_code = GET_CODE (op0);
11981 else
11982 new_code = reversed_comparison_code (op0, NULL);
11984 if (new_code != UNKNOWN)
11986 code = new_code;
11987 op0 = tem;
11988 op1 = tem1;
11989 continue;
11992 break;
11994 case IOR:
11995 /* The sign bit of (ior (plus X (const_int -1)) X) is nonzero
11996 iff X <= 0. */
11997 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
11998 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1) == constm1_rtx
11999 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), XEXP (op0, 1)))
12001 op0 = XEXP (op0, 1);
12002 code = (code == GE ? GT : LE);
12003 continue;
12005 break;
12007 case AND:
12008 /* Convert (and (xshift 1 X) Y) to (and (lshiftrt Y X) 1). This
12009 will be converted to a ZERO_EXTRACT later. */
12010 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12011 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
12012 && XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0) == const1_rtx)
12014 op0 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (op0, 1),
12015 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1));
12016 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
12017 continue;
12020 /* If we are comparing (and (lshiftrt X C1) C2) for equality with
12021 zero and X is a comparison and C1 and C2 describe only bits set
12022 in STORE_FLAG_VALUE, we can compare with X. */
12023 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12024 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12025 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12026 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT
12027 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12028 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) >= 0
12029 && INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12031 mask = ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12032 << INTVAL (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)));
12033 if ((~STORE_FLAG_VALUE & mask) == 0
12034 && (COMPARISON_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))
12035 || ((tem = get_last_value (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0))) != 0
12036 && COMPARISON_P (tem))))
12038 op0 = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12039 continue;
12043 /* If we are doing an equality comparison of an AND of a bit equal
12044 to the sign bit, replace this with a LT or GE comparison of
12045 the underlying value. */
12046 if (equality_comparison_p
12047 && const_op == 0
12048 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12049 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12050 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12051 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (mode_width - 1)))
12053 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12054 code = (code == EQ ? GE : LT);
12055 continue;
12058 /* If this AND operation is really a ZERO_EXTEND from a narrower
12059 mode, the constant fits within that mode, and this is either an
12060 equality or unsigned comparison, try to do this comparison in
12061 the narrower mode.
12063 Note that in:
12065 (ne:DI (and:DI (reg:DI 4) (const_int 0xffffffff)) (const_int 0))
12066 -> (ne:DI (reg:SI 4) (const_int 0))
12068 unless TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION allows it or the register is
12069 known to hold a value of the required mode the
12070 transformation is invalid. */
12071 if ((equality_comparison_p || unsigned_comparison_p)
12072 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12073 && (i = exact_log2 ((UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
12074 & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
12075 + 1)) >= 0
12076 && const_op >> i == 0
12077 && (tmode = mode_for_size (i, MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode)
12079 op0 = gen_lowpart_or_truncate (tmode, XEXP (op0, 0));
12080 continue;
12083 /* If this is (and:M1 (subreg:M1 X:M2 0) (const_int C1)) where C1
12084 fits in both M1 and M2 and the SUBREG is either paradoxical
12085 or represents the low part, permute the SUBREG and the AND
12086 and try again. */
12087 if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == SUBREG
12088 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12090 tmode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)));
12091 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT c1 = INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12092 /* Require an integral mode, to avoid creating something like
12093 (AND:SF ...). */
12094 if (SCALAR_INT_MODE_P (tmode)
12095 /* It is unsafe to commute the AND into the SUBREG if the
12096 SUBREG is paradoxical and WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS is
12097 not defined. As originally written the upper bits
12098 have a defined value due to the AND operation.
12099 However, if we commute the AND inside the SUBREG then
12100 they no longer have defined values and the meaning of
12101 the code has been changed.
12102 Also C1 should not change value in the smaller mode,
12103 see PR67028 (a positive C1 can become negative in the
12104 smaller mode, so that the AND does no longer mask the
12105 upper bits). */
12106 && ((WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
12107 && mode_width > GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12108 && mode_width <= BITS_PER_WORD
12109 && trunc_int_for_mode (c1, tmode) == (HOST_WIDE_INT) c1)
12110 || (mode_width <= GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12111 && subreg_lowpart_p (XEXP (op0, 0))))
12112 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12113 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode)
12114 && (c1 & ~mask) == 0
12115 && (c1 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)) == 0
12116 && c1 != mask
12117 && c1 != GET_MODE_MASK (tmode))
12119 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12120 SUBREG_REG (XEXP (op0, 0)),
12121 gen_int_mode (c1, tmode));
12122 op0 = gen_lowpart (mode, op0);
12123 continue;
12127 /* Convert (ne (and (not X) 1) 0) to (eq (and X 1) 0). */
12128 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12129 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
12130 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == NOT)
12132 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode,
12133 XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1);
12134 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12135 continue;
12138 /* Convert (ne (and (lshiftrt (not X)) 1) 0) to
12139 (eq (and (lshiftrt X) 1) 0).
12140 Also handle the case where (not X) is expressed using xor. */
12141 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12142 && XEXP (op0, 1) == const1_rtx
12143 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == LSHIFTRT)
12145 rtx shift_op = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0);
12146 rtx shift_count = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12148 if (GET_CODE (shift_op) == NOT
12149 || (GET_CODE (shift_op) == XOR
12150 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12151 && CONST_INT_P (shift_count)
12152 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode)
12153 && (UINTVAL (XEXP (shift_op, 1))
12154 == (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12155 << INTVAL (shift_count))))
12158 = gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (mode, XEXP (shift_op, 0), shift_count);
12159 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, op0, 1);
12160 code = (code == NE ? EQ : NE);
12161 continue;
12164 break;
12166 case ASHIFT:
12167 /* If we have (compare (ashift FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12168 the high order N bits of FOO (N+1 if an inequality comparison)
12169 are known to be zero, we can do this by comparing FOO with C
12170 shifted right N bits so long as the low-order N bits of C are
12171 zero. */
12172 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12173 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >= 0
12174 && ((INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) + ! equality_comparison_p)
12175 < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12176 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12177 & (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12178 - 1)) == 0)
12179 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12180 && (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12181 & ~(mask >> (INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))
12182 + ! equality_comparison_p))) == 0)
12184 /* We must perform a logical shift, not an arithmetic one,
12185 as we want the top N bits of C to be zero. */
12186 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT temp = const_op & GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
12188 temp >>= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12189 op1 = gen_int_mode (temp, mode);
12190 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12191 continue;
12194 /* If we are doing a sign bit comparison, it means we are testing
12195 a particular bit. Convert it to the appropriate AND. */
12196 if (sign_bit_comparison_p && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12197 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12199 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
12200 ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12201 << (mode_width - 1
12202 - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
12203 code = (code == LT ? NE : EQ);
12204 continue;
12207 /* If this an equality comparison with zero and we are shifting
12208 the low bit to the sign bit, we can convert this to an AND of the
12209 low-order bit. */
12210 if (const_op == 0 && equality_comparison_p
12211 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12212 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12214 op0 = simplify_and_const_int (NULL_RTX, mode, XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12215 continue;
12217 break;
12219 case ASHIFTRT:
12220 /* If this is an equality comparison with zero, we can do this
12221 as a logical shift, which might be much simpler. */
12222 if (equality_comparison_p && const_op == 0
12223 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
12225 op0 = simplify_shift_const (NULL_RTX, LSHIFTRT, mode,
12226 XEXP (op0, 0),
12227 INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)));
12228 continue;
12231 /* If OP0 is a sign extension and CODE is not an unsigned comparison,
12232 do the comparison in a narrower mode. */
12233 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12234 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12235 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == ASHIFT
12236 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1)
12237 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12238 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12239 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12240 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12241 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12243 op0 = gen_lowpart (tmode, XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0));
12244 continue;
12247 /* Likewise if OP0 is a PLUS of a sign extension with a
12248 constant, which is usually represented with the PLUS
12249 between the shifts. */
12250 if (! unsigned_comparison_p
12251 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12252 && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 0)) == PLUS
12253 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1))
12254 && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0)) == ASHIFT
12255 && XEXP (op0, 1) == XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 1)
12256 && (tmode = mode_for_size (mode_width - INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)),
12257 MODE_INT, 1)) != BLKmode
12258 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12259 + (GET_MODE_MASK (tmode) >> 1) + 1)
12260 <= GET_MODE_MASK (tmode)))
12262 rtx inner = XEXP (XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 0), 0);
12263 rtx add_const = XEXP (XEXP (op0, 0), 1);
12264 rtx new_const = simplify_gen_binary (ASHIFTRT, GET_MODE (op0),
12265 add_const, XEXP (op0, 1));
12267 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (PLUS, tmode,
12268 gen_lowpart (tmode, inner),
12269 new_const);
12270 continue;
12273 /* ... fall through ... */
12274 case LSHIFTRT:
12275 /* If we have (compare (xshiftrt FOO N) (const_int C)) and
12276 the low order N bits of FOO are known to be zero, we can do this
12277 by comparing FOO with C shifted left N bits so long as no
12278 overflow occurs. Even if the low order N bits of FOO aren't known
12279 to be zero, if the comparison is >= or < we can use the same
12280 optimization and for > or <= by setting all the low
12281 order N bits in the comparison constant. */
12282 if (CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12283 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) > 0
12284 && INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) < HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12285 && mode_width <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT
12286 && (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) const_op
12287 + (GET_CODE (op0) != LSHIFTRT
12288 ? ((GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) >> 1)
12289 + 1)
12290 : 0))
12291 <= GET_MODE_MASK (mode) >> INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))))
12293 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits
12294 = (nonzero_bits (XEXP (op0, 0), mode)
12295 & (((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1
12296 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1));
12297 if (low_bits == 0 || !equality_comparison_p)
12299 /* If the shift was logical, then we must make the condition
12300 unsigned. */
12301 if (GET_CODE (op0) == LSHIFTRT)
12302 code = unsigned_condition (code);
12304 const_op <<= INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1));
12305 if (low_bits != 0
12306 && (code == GT || code == GTU
12307 || code == LE || code == LEU))
12308 const_op
12309 |= (((HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1))) - 1);
12310 op1 = GEN_INT (const_op);
12311 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12312 continue;
12316 /* If we are using this shift to extract just the sign bit, we
12317 can replace this with an LT or GE comparison. */
12318 if (const_op == 0
12319 && (equality_comparison_p || sign_bit_comparison_p)
12320 && CONST_INT_P (XEXP (op0, 1))
12321 && UINTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)) == mode_width - 1)
12323 op0 = XEXP (op0, 0);
12324 code = (code == NE || code == GT ? LT : GE);
12325 continue;
12327 break;
12329 default:
12330 break;
12333 break;
12336 /* Now make any compound operations involved in this comparison. Then,
12337 check for an outmost SUBREG on OP0 that is not doing anything or is
12338 paradoxical. The latter transformation must only be performed when
12339 it is known that the "extra" bits will be the same in op0 and op1 or
12340 that they don't matter. There are three cases to consider:
12342 1. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a register. In this case the bits are don't
12343 care bits and we can assume they have any convenient value. So
12344 making the transformation is safe.
12346 2. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is not defined.
12347 In this case the upper bits of op0 are undefined. We should not make
12348 the simplification in that case as we do not know the contents of
12349 those bits.
12351 3. SUBREG_REG (op0) is a memory and LOAD_EXTEND_OP is defined and not
12352 UNKNOWN. In that case we know those bits are zeros or ones. We must
12353 also be sure that they are the same as the upper bits of op1.
12355 We can never remove a SUBREG for a non-equality comparison because
12356 the sign bit is in a different place in the underlying object. */
12358 op0 = make_compound_operation (op0, op1 == const0_rtx ? COMPARE : SET);
12359 op1 = make_compound_operation (op1, SET);
12361 if (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG && subreg_lowpart_p (op0)
12362 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
12363 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0))) == MODE_INT
12364 && (code == NE || code == EQ))
12366 if (paradoxical_subreg_p (op0))
12368 /* For paradoxical subregs, allow case 1 as above. Case 3 isn't
12369 implemented. */
12370 if (REG_P (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12372 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0);
12373 op1 = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (op0), op1);
12376 else if ((GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12377 <= HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12378 && (nonzero_bits (SUBREG_REG (op0),
12379 GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12380 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12382 tem = gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)), op1);
12384 if ((nonzero_bits (tem, GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (op0)))
12385 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) == 0)
12386 op0 = SUBREG_REG (op0), op1 = tem;
12390 /* We now do the opposite procedure: Some machines don't have compare
12391 insns in all modes. If OP0's mode is an integer mode smaller than a
12392 word and we can't do a compare in that mode, see if there is a larger
12393 mode for which we can do the compare. There are a number of cases in
12394 which we can use the wider mode. */
12396 mode = GET_MODE (op0);
12397 if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12398 && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
12399 && ! have_insn_for (COMPARE, mode))
12400 for (tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (mode);
12401 (tmode != VOIDmode && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (tmode));
12402 tmode = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (tmode))
12403 if (have_insn_for (COMPARE, tmode))
12405 int zero_extended;
12407 /* If this is a test for negative, we can make an explicit
12408 test of the sign bit. Test this first so we can use
12409 a paradoxical subreg to extend OP0. */
12411 if (op1 == const0_rtx && (code == LT || code == GE)
12412 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
12414 unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT sign
12415 = (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) 1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1);
12416 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12417 gen_lowpart (tmode, op0),
12418 gen_int_mode (sign, tmode));
12419 code = (code == LT) ? NE : EQ;
12420 break;
12423 /* If the only nonzero bits in OP0 and OP1 are those in the
12424 narrower mode and this is an equality or unsigned comparison,
12425 we can use the wider mode. Similarly for sign-extended
12426 values, in which case it is true for all comparisons. */
12427 zero_extended = ((code == EQ || code == NE
12428 || code == GEU || code == GTU
12429 || code == LEU || code == LTU)
12430 && (nonzero_bits (op0, tmode)
12431 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0
12432 && ((CONST_INT_P (op1)
12433 || (nonzero_bits (op1, tmode)
12434 & ~GET_MODE_MASK (mode)) == 0)));
12436 if (zero_extended
12437 || ((num_sign_bit_copies (op0, tmode)
12438 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12439 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))
12440 && (num_sign_bit_copies (op1, tmode)
12441 > (unsigned int) (GET_MODE_PRECISION (tmode)
12442 - GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode)))))
12444 /* If OP0 is an AND and we don't have an AND in MODE either,
12445 make a new AND in the proper mode. */
12446 if (GET_CODE (op0) == AND
12447 && !have_insn_for (AND, mode))
12448 op0 = simplify_gen_binary (AND, tmode,
12449 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12450 XEXP (op0, 0)),
12451 gen_lowpart (tmode,
12452 XEXP (op0, 1)));
12453 else
12455 if (zero_extended)
12457 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12458 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (ZERO_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12460 else
12462 op0 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op0, mode);
12463 op1 = simplify_gen_unary (SIGN_EXTEND, tmode, op1, mode);
12465 break;
12470 /* We may have changed the comparison operands. Re-canonicalize. */
12471 if (swap_commutative_operands_p (op0, op1))
12473 std::swap (op0, op1);
12474 code = swap_condition (code);
12477 /* If this machine only supports a subset of valid comparisons, see if we
12478 can convert an unsupported one into a supported one. */
12479 target_canonicalize_comparison (&code, &op0, &op1, 0);
12481 *pop0 = op0;
12482 *pop1 = op1;
12484 return code;
12487 /* Utility function for record_value_for_reg. Count number of
12488 rtxs in X. */
12489 static int
12490 count_rtxs (rtx x)
12492 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12493 const char *fmt;
12494 int i, j, ret = 1;
12496 if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12497 || GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12499 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12500 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12502 if (x0 == x1)
12503 return 1 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0);
12505 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12506 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x1)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12507 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12508 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x0)
12509 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x1, 0)
12510 ? XEXP (x1, 1) : XEXP (x1, 0));
12512 if ((GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_BIN_ARITH
12513 || GET_RTX_CLASS (GET_CODE (x0)) == RTX_COMM_ARITH)
12514 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12515 return 2 + 2 * count_rtxs (x1)
12516 + count_rtxs (x == XEXP (x0, 0)
12517 ? XEXP (x0, 1) : XEXP (x0, 0));
12520 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12521 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12522 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12523 ret += count_rtxs (XEXP (x, i));
12524 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12525 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12526 ret += count_rtxs (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12528 return ret;
12531 /* Utility function for following routine. Called when X is part of a value
12532 being stored into last_set_value. Sets last_set_table_tick
12533 for each register mentioned. Similar to mention_regs in cse.c */
12535 static void
12536 update_table_tick (rtx x)
12538 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
12539 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
12540 int i, j;
12542 if (code == REG)
12544 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
12545 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
12546 unsigned int r;
12548 for (r = regno; r < endregno; r++)
12550 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[r];
12551 rsp->last_set_table_tick = label_tick;
12554 return;
12557 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
12558 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
12560 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
12561 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
12562 them. */
12563 if (i == 0 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
12565 /* Note that at this point x1 has already been
12566 processed. */
12567 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
12568 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
12570 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then there is no need to
12571 process x0. */
12572 if (x0 == x1)
12573 break;
12575 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then while
12576 processing x1, x0 has already been processed. Thus we
12577 are done with x. */
12578 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
12579 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
12580 break;
12582 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then we
12583 still have to process the rest of x0. */
12584 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
12585 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
12587 update_table_tick (XEXP (x0, x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) ? 1 : 0));
12588 break;
12592 update_table_tick (XEXP (x, i));
12594 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
12595 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12596 update_table_tick (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12599 /* Record that REG is set to VALUE in insn INSN. If VALUE is zero, we
12600 are saying that the register is clobbered and we no longer know its
12601 value. If INSN is zero, don't update reg_stat[].last_set; this is
12602 only permitted with VALUE also zero and is used to invalidate the
12603 register. */
12605 static void
12606 record_value_for_reg (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn, rtx value)
12608 unsigned int regno = REGNO (reg);
12609 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
12610 unsigned int i;
12611 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12613 /* If VALUE contains REG and we have a previous value for REG, substitute
12614 the previous value. */
12615 if (value && insn && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, value))
12617 rtx tem;
12619 /* Set things up so get_last_value is allowed to see anything set up to
12620 our insn. */
12621 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12622 tem = get_last_value (reg);
12624 /* If TEM is simply a binary operation with two CLOBBERs as operands,
12625 it isn't going to be useful and will take a lot of time to process,
12626 so just use the CLOBBER. */
12628 if (tem)
12630 if (ARITHMETIC_P (tem)
12631 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 0)) == CLOBBER
12632 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem, 1)) == CLOBBER)
12633 tem = XEXP (tem, 0);
12634 else if (count_occurrences (value, reg, 1) >= 2)
12636 /* If there are two or more occurrences of REG in VALUE,
12637 prevent the value from growing too much. */
12638 if (count_rtxs (tem) > MAX_LAST_VALUE_RTL)
12639 tem = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (tem), const0_rtx);
12642 value = replace_rtx (copy_rtx (value), reg, tem);
12646 /* For each register modified, show we don't know its value, that
12647 we don't know about its bitwise content, that its value has been
12648 updated, and that we don't know the location of the death of the
12649 register. */
12650 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12652 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12654 if (insn)
12655 rsp->last_set = insn;
12657 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
12658 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
12659 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
12660 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
12661 rsp->last_death = 0;
12662 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
12665 /* Mark registers that are being referenced in this value. */
12666 if (value)
12667 update_table_tick (value);
12669 /* Now update the status of each register being set.
12670 If someone is using this register in this block, set this register
12671 to invalid since we will get confused between the two lives in this
12672 basic block. This makes using this register always invalid. In cse, we
12673 scan the table to invalidate all entries using this register, but this
12674 is too much work for us. */
12676 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12678 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12679 rsp->last_set_label = label_tick;
12680 if (!insn
12681 || (value && rsp->last_set_table_tick >= label_tick_ebb_start))
12682 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
12683 else
12684 rsp->last_set_invalid = 0;
12687 /* The value being assigned might refer to X (like in "x++;"). In that
12688 case, we must replace it with (clobber (const_int 0)) to prevent
12689 infinite loops. */
12690 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
12691 if (value && !get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 0))
12693 value = copy_rtx (value);
12694 if (!get_last_value_validate (&value, insn, label_tick, 1))
12695 value = 0;
12698 /* For the main register being modified, update the value, the mode, the
12699 nonzero bits, and the number of sign bit copies. */
12701 rsp->last_set_value = value;
12703 if (value)
12705 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (reg);
12706 subst_low_luid = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12707 rsp->last_set_mode = mode;
12708 if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
12709 && HWI_COMPUTABLE_MODE_P (mode))
12710 mode = nonzero_bits_mode;
12711 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = nonzero_bits (value, mode);
12712 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies
12713 = num_sign_bit_copies (value, GET_MODE (reg));
12717 /* Called via note_stores from record_dead_and_set_regs to handle one
12718 SET or CLOBBER in an insn. DATA is the instruction in which the
12719 set is occurring. */
12721 static void
12722 record_dead_and_set_regs_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx setter, void *data)
12724 rtx_insn *record_dead_insn = (rtx_insn *) data;
12726 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
12727 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
12729 if (!record_dead_insn)
12731 if (REG_P (dest))
12732 record_value_for_reg (dest, NULL, NULL_RTX);
12733 return;
12736 if (REG_P (dest))
12738 /* If we are setting the whole register, we know its value. Otherwise
12739 show that we don't know the value. We can handle SUBREG in
12740 some cases. */
12741 if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET && dest == SET_DEST (setter))
12742 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, SET_SRC (setter));
12743 else if (GET_CODE (setter) == SET
12744 && GET_CODE (SET_DEST (setter)) == SUBREG
12745 && SUBREG_REG (SET_DEST (setter)) == dest
12746 && GET_MODE_PRECISION (GET_MODE (dest)) <= BITS_PER_WORD
12747 && subreg_lowpart_p (SET_DEST (setter)))
12748 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn,
12749 gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (dest),
12750 SET_SRC (setter)));
12751 else
12752 record_value_for_reg (dest, record_dead_insn, NULL_RTX);
12754 else if (MEM_P (dest)
12755 /* Ignore pushes, they clobber nothing. */
12756 && ! push_operand (dest, GET_MODE (dest)))
12757 mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (record_dead_insn);
12760 /* Update the records of when each REG was most recently set or killed
12761 for the things done by INSN. This is the last thing done in processing
12762 INSN in the combiner loop.
12764 We update reg_stat[], in particular fields last_set, last_set_value,
12765 last_set_mode, last_set_nonzero_bits, last_set_sign_bit_copies,
12766 last_death, and also the similar information mem_last_set (which insn
12767 most recently modified memory) and last_call_luid (which insn was the
12768 most recent subroutine call). */
12770 static void
12771 record_dead_and_set_regs (rtx_insn *insn)
12773 rtx link;
12774 unsigned int i;
12776 for (link = REG_NOTES (insn); link; link = XEXP (link, 1))
12778 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_DEAD
12779 && REG_P (XEXP (link, 0)))
12781 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
12782 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (XEXP (link, 0));
12784 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
12786 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12788 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12789 rsp->last_death = insn;
12792 else if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == REG_INC)
12793 record_value_for_reg (XEXP (link, 0), insn, NULL_RTX);
12796 if (CALL_P (insn))
12798 hard_reg_set_iterator hrsi;
12799 EXECUTE_IF_SET_IN_HARD_REG_SET (regs_invalidated_by_call, 0, i, hrsi)
12801 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12803 rsp = &reg_stat[i];
12804 rsp->last_set_invalid = 1;
12805 rsp->last_set = insn;
12806 rsp->last_set_value = 0;
12807 rsp->last_set_mode = VOIDmode;
12808 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits = 0;
12809 rsp->last_set_sign_bit_copies = 0;
12810 rsp->last_death = 0;
12811 rsp->truncated_to_mode = VOIDmode;
12814 last_call_luid = mem_last_set = DF_INSN_LUID (insn);
12816 /* We can't combine into a call pattern. Remember, though, that
12817 the return value register is set at this LUID. We could
12818 still replace a register with the return value from the
12819 wrong subroutine call! */
12820 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, NULL_RTX);
12822 else
12823 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), record_dead_and_set_regs_1, insn);
12826 /* If a SUBREG has the promoted bit set, it is in fact a property of the
12827 register present in the SUBREG, so for each such SUBREG go back and
12828 adjust nonzero and sign bit information of the registers that are
12829 known to have some zero/sign bits set.
12831 This is needed because when combine blows the SUBREGs away, the
12832 information on zero/sign bits is lost and further combines can be
12833 missed because of that. */
12835 static void
12836 record_promoted_value (rtx_insn *insn, rtx subreg)
12838 struct insn_link *links;
12839 rtx set;
12840 unsigned int regno = REGNO (SUBREG_REG (subreg));
12841 machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (subreg);
12843 if (GET_MODE_PRECISION (mode) > HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT)
12844 return;
12846 for (links = LOG_LINKS (insn); links;)
12848 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12850 insn = links->insn;
12851 set = single_set (insn);
12853 if (! set || !REG_P (SET_DEST (set))
12854 || REGNO (SET_DEST (set)) != regno
12855 || GET_MODE (SET_DEST (set)) != GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (subreg)))
12857 links = links->next;
12858 continue;
12861 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
12862 if (rsp->last_set == insn)
12864 if (SUBREG_PROMOTED_UNSIGNED_P (subreg))
12865 rsp->last_set_nonzero_bits &= GET_MODE_MASK (mode);
12868 if (REG_P (SET_SRC (set)))
12870 regno = REGNO (SET_SRC (set));
12871 links = LOG_LINKS (insn);
12873 else
12874 break;
12878 /* Check if X, a register, is known to contain a value already
12879 truncated to MODE. In this case we can use a subreg to refer to
12880 the truncated value even though in the generic case we would need
12881 an explicit truncation. */
12883 static bool
12884 reg_truncated_to_mode (machine_mode mode, const_rtx x)
12886 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
12887 machine_mode truncated = rsp->truncated_to_mode;
12889 if (truncated == 0
12890 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start)
12891 return false;
12892 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
12893 return true;
12894 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (mode, truncated))
12895 return true;
12896 return false;
12899 /* If X is a hard reg or a subreg record the mode that the register is
12900 accessed in. For non-TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION targets we might be able
12901 to turn a truncate into a subreg using this information. Return true
12902 if traversing X is complete. */
12904 static bool
12905 record_truncated_value (rtx x)
12907 machine_mode truncated_mode;
12908 reg_stat_type *rsp;
12910 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
12912 machine_mode original_mode = GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (x));
12913 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
12915 if (GET_MODE_SIZE (original_mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode))
12916 return true;
12918 if (TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION_MODES_P (truncated_mode, original_mode))
12919 return true;
12921 x = SUBREG_REG (x);
12923 /* ??? For hard-regs we now record everything. We might be able to
12924 optimize this using last_set_mode. */
12925 else if (REG_P (x) && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
12926 truncated_mode = GET_MODE (x);
12927 else
12928 return false;
12930 rsp = &reg_stat[REGNO (x)];
12931 if (rsp->truncated_to_mode == 0
12932 || rsp->truncation_label < label_tick_ebb_start
12933 || (GET_MODE_SIZE (truncated_mode)
12934 < GET_MODE_SIZE (rsp->truncated_to_mode)))
12936 rsp->truncated_to_mode = truncated_mode;
12937 rsp->truncation_label = label_tick;
12940 return true;
12943 /* Callback for note_uses. Find hardregs and subregs of pseudos and
12944 the modes they are used in. This can help truning TRUNCATEs into
12945 SUBREGs. */
12947 static void
12948 record_truncated_values (rtx *loc, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
12950 subrtx_var_iterator::array_type array;
12951 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX_VAR (iter, array, *loc, NONCONST)
12952 if (record_truncated_value (*iter))
12953 iter.skip_subrtxes ();
12956 /* Scan X for promoted SUBREGs. For each one found,
12957 note what it implies to the registers used in it. */
12959 static void
12960 check_promoted_subreg (rtx_insn *insn, rtx x)
12962 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
12963 && SUBREG_PROMOTED_VAR_P (x)
12964 && REG_P (SUBREG_REG (x)))
12965 record_promoted_value (insn, x);
12966 else
12968 const char *format = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
12969 int i, j;
12971 for (i = 0; i < GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x)); i++)
12972 switch (format[i])
12974 case 'e':
12975 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XEXP (x, i));
12976 break;
12977 case 'V':
12978 case 'E':
12979 if (XVEC (x, i) != 0)
12980 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
12981 check_promoted_subreg (insn, XVECEXP (x, i, j));
12982 break;
12987 /* Verify that all the registers and memory references mentioned in *LOC are
12988 still valid. *LOC was part of a value set in INSN when label_tick was
12989 equal to TICK. Return 0 if some are not. If REPLACE is nonzero, replace
12990 the invalid references with (clobber (const_int 0)) and return 1. This
12991 replacement is useful because we often can get useful information about
12992 the form of a value (e.g., if it was produced by a shift that always
12993 produces -1 or 0) even though we don't know exactly what registers it
12994 was produced from. */
12996 static int
12997 get_last_value_validate (rtx *loc, rtx_insn *insn, int tick, int replace)
12999 rtx x = *loc;
13000 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (GET_CODE (x));
13001 int len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (GET_CODE (x));
13002 int i, j;
13004 if (REG_P (x))
13006 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13007 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (x);
13008 unsigned int j;
13010 for (j = regno; j < endregno; j++)
13012 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[j];
13013 if (rsp->last_set_invalid
13014 /* If this is a pseudo-register that was only set once and not
13015 live at the beginning of the function, it is always valid. */
13016 || (! (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13017 && regno < reg_n_sets_max
13018 && REG_N_SETS (regno) == 1
13019 && (!REGNO_REG_SET_P
13020 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb),
13021 regno)))
13022 && rsp->last_set_label > tick))
13024 if (replace)
13025 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
13026 return replace;
13030 return 1;
13032 /* If this is a memory reference, make sure that there were no stores after
13033 it that might have clobbered the value. We don't have alias info, so we
13034 assume any store invalidates it. Moreover, we only have local UIDs, so
13035 we also assume that there were stores in the intervening basic blocks. */
13036 else if (MEM_P (x) && !MEM_READONLY_P (x)
13037 && (tick != label_tick || DF_INSN_LUID (insn) <= mem_last_set))
13039 if (replace)
13040 *loc = gen_rtx_CLOBBER (GET_MODE (x), const0_rtx);
13041 return replace;
13044 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
13046 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13048 /* Check for identical subexpressions. If x contains
13049 identical subexpression we only have to traverse one of
13050 them. */
13051 if (i == 1 && ARITHMETIC_P (x))
13053 /* Note that at this point x0 has already been checked
13054 and found valid. */
13055 rtx x0 = XEXP (x, 0);
13056 rtx x1 = XEXP (x, 1);
13058 /* If x0 and x1 are identical then x is also valid. */
13059 if (x0 == x1)
13060 return 1;
13062 /* If x1 is identical to a subexpression of x0 then
13063 while checking x0, x1 has already been checked. Thus
13064 it is valid and so as x. */
13065 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x0)
13066 && (x1 == XEXP (x0, 0) || x1 == XEXP (x0, 1)))
13067 return 1;
13069 /* If x0 is identical to a subexpression of x1 then x is
13070 valid iff the rest of x1 is valid. */
13071 if (ARITHMETIC_P (x1)
13072 && (x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) || x0 == XEXP (x1, 1)))
13073 return
13074 get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x1,
13075 x0 == XEXP (x1, 0) ? 1 : 0),
13076 insn, tick, replace);
13079 if (get_last_value_validate (&XEXP (x, i), insn, tick,
13080 replace) == 0)
13081 return 0;
13083 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13084 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13085 if (get_last_value_validate (&XVECEXP (x, i, j),
13086 insn, tick, replace) == 0)
13087 return 0;
13090 /* If we haven't found a reason for it to be invalid, it is valid. */
13091 return 1;
13094 /* Get the last value assigned to X, if known. Some registers
13095 in the value may be replaced with (clobber (const_int 0)) if their value
13096 is known longer known reliably. */
13098 static rtx
13099 get_last_value (const_rtx x)
13101 unsigned int regno;
13102 rtx value;
13103 reg_stat_type *rsp;
13105 /* If this is a non-paradoxical SUBREG, get the value of its operand and
13106 then convert it to the desired mode. If this is a paradoxical SUBREG,
13107 we cannot predict what values the "extra" bits might have. */
13108 if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG
13109 && subreg_lowpart_p (x)
13110 && !paradoxical_subreg_p (x)
13111 && (value = get_last_value (SUBREG_REG (x))) != 0)
13112 return gen_lowpart (GET_MODE (x), value);
13114 if (!REG_P (x))
13115 return 0;
13117 regno = REGNO (x);
13118 rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13119 value = rsp->last_set_value;
13121 /* If we don't have a value, or if it isn't for this basic block and
13122 it's either a hard register, set more than once, or it's a live
13123 at the beginning of the function, return 0.
13125 Because if it's not live at the beginning of the function then the reg
13126 is always set before being used (is never used without being set).
13127 And, if it's set only once, and it's always set before use, then all
13128 uses must have the same last value, even if it's not from this basic
13129 block. */
13131 if (value == 0
13132 || (rsp->last_set_label < label_tick_ebb_start
13133 && (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13134 || regno >= reg_n_sets_max
13135 || REG_N_SETS (regno) != 1
13136 || REGNO_REG_SET_P
13137 (DF_LR_IN (ENTRY_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)->next_bb), regno))))
13138 return 0;
13140 /* If the value was set in a later insn than the ones we are processing,
13141 we can't use it even if the register was only set once. */
13142 if (rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13143 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) >= subst_low_luid)
13144 return 0;
13146 /* If the value has all its registers valid, return it. */
13147 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 0))
13148 return value;
13150 /* Otherwise, make a copy and replace any invalid register with
13151 (clobber (const_int 0)). If that fails for some reason, return 0. */
13153 value = copy_rtx (value);
13154 if (get_last_value_validate (&value, rsp->last_set, rsp->last_set_label, 1))
13155 return value;
13157 return 0;
13160 /* Return nonzero if expression X refers to a REG or to memory
13161 that is set in an instruction more recent than FROM_LUID. */
13163 static int
13164 use_crosses_set_p (const_rtx x, int from_luid)
13166 const char *fmt;
13167 int i;
13168 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13170 if (code == REG)
13172 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13173 unsigned endreg = END_REGNO (x);
13175 #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
13176 /* Don't allow uses of the stack pointer to be moved,
13177 because we don't know whether the move crosses a push insn. */
13178 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM && PUSH_ARGS)
13179 return 1;
13180 #endif
13181 for (; regno < endreg; regno++)
13183 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
13184 if (rsp->last_set
13185 && rsp->last_set_label == label_tick
13186 && DF_INSN_LUID (rsp->last_set) > from_luid)
13187 return 1;
13189 return 0;
13192 if (code == MEM && mem_last_set > from_luid)
13193 return 1;
13195 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13197 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13199 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13201 int j;
13202 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13203 if (use_crosses_set_p (XVECEXP (x, i, j), from_luid))
13204 return 1;
13206 else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
13207 && use_crosses_set_p (XEXP (x, i), from_luid))
13208 return 1;
13210 return 0;
13213 /* Define three variables used for communication between the following
13214 routines. */
13216 static unsigned int reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno;
13217 static int reg_dead_flag;
13219 /* Function called via note_stores from reg_dead_at_p.
13221 If DEST is within [reg_dead_regno, reg_dead_endregno), set
13222 reg_dead_flag to 1 if X is a CLOBBER and to -1 it is a SET. */
13224 static void
13225 reg_dead_at_p_1 (rtx dest, const_rtx x, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
13227 unsigned int regno, endregno;
13229 if (!REG_P (dest))
13230 return;
13232 regno = REGNO (dest);
13233 endregno = END_REGNO (dest);
13234 if (reg_dead_endregno > regno && reg_dead_regno < endregno)
13235 reg_dead_flag = (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER) ? 1 : -1;
13238 /* Return nonzero if REG is known to be dead at INSN.
13240 We scan backwards from INSN. If we hit a REG_DEAD note or a CLOBBER
13241 referencing REG, it is dead. If we hit a SET referencing REG, it is
13242 live. Otherwise, see if it is live or dead at the start of the basic
13243 block we are in. Hard regs marked as being live in NEWPAT_USED_REGS
13244 must be assumed to be always live. */
13246 static int
13247 reg_dead_at_p (rtx reg, rtx_insn *insn)
13249 basic_block block;
13250 unsigned int i;
13252 /* Set variables for reg_dead_at_p_1. */
13253 reg_dead_regno = REGNO (reg);
13254 reg_dead_endregno = END_REGNO (reg);
13256 reg_dead_flag = 0;
13258 /* Check that reg isn't mentioned in NEWPAT_USED_REGS. For fixed registers
13259 we allow the machine description to decide whether use-and-clobber
13260 patterns are OK. */
13261 if (reg_dead_regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13263 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13264 if (!fixed_regs[i] && TEST_HARD_REG_BIT (newpat_used_regs, i))
13265 return 0;
13268 /* Scan backwards until we find a REG_DEAD note, SET, CLOBBER, or
13269 beginning of basic block. */
13270 block = BLOCK_FOR_INSN (insn);
13271 for (;;)
13273 if (INSN_P (insn))
13275 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_UNUSED, reg_dead_regno))
13276 return 1;
13278 note_stores (PATTERN (insn), reg_dead_at_p_1, NULL);
13279 if (reg_dead_flag)
13280 return reg_dead_flag == 1 ? 1 : 0;
13282 if (find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, reg_dead_regno))
13283 return 1;
13286 if (insn == BB_HEAD (block))
13287 break;
13289 insn = PREV_INSN (insn);
13292 /* Look at live-in sets for the basic block that we were in. */
13293 for (i = reg_dead_regno; i < reg_dead_endregno; i++)
13294 if (REGNO_REG_SET_P (df_get_live_in (block), i))
13295 return 0;
13297 return 1;
13300 /* Note hard registers in X that are used. */
13302 static void
13303 mark_used_regs_combine (rtx x)
13305 RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
13306 unsigned int regno;
13307 int i;
13309 switch (code)
13311 case LABEL_REF:
13312 case SYMBOL_REF:
13313 case CONST:
13314 CASE_CONST_ANY:
13315 case PC:
13316 case ADDR_VEC:
13317 case ADDR_DIFF_VEC:
13318 case ASM_INPUT:
13319 /* CC0 must die in the insn after it is set, so we don't need to take
13320 special note of it here. */
13321 case CC0:
13322 return;
13324 case CLOBBER:
13325 /* If we are clobbering a MEM, mark any hard registers inside the
13326 address as used. */
13327 if (MEM_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
13328 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0));
13329 return;
13331 case REG:
13332 regno = REGNO (x);
13333 /* A hard reg in a wide mode may really be multiple registers.
13334 If so, mark all of them just like the first. */
13335 if (regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13337 /* None of this applies to the stack, frame or arg pointers. */
13338 if (regno == STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
13339 || (!HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
13340 && regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
13341 || (FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM != ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
13342 && regno == ARG_POINTER_REGNUM && fixed_regs[regno])
13343 || regno == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
13344 return;
13346 add_to_hard_reg_set (&newpat_used_regs, GET_MODE (x), regno);
13348 return;
13350 case SET:
13352 /* If setting a MEM, or a SUBREG of a MEM, then note any hard regs in
13353 the address. */
13354 rtx testreg = SET_DEST (x);
13356 while (GET_CODE (testreg) == SUBREG
13357 || GET_CODE (testreg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13358 || GET_CODE (testreg) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13359 testreg = XEXP (testreg, 0);
13361 if (MEM_P (testreg))
13362 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (testreg, 0));
13364 mark_used_regs_combine (SET_SRC (x));
13366 return;
13368 default:
13369 break;
13372 /* Recursively scan the operands of this expression. */
13375 const char *fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13377 for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13379 if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13380 mark_used_regs_combine (XEXP (x, i));
13381 else if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13383 int j;
13385 for (j = 0; j < XVECLEN (x, i); j++)
13386 mark_used_regs_combine (XVECEXP (x, i, j));
13392 /* Remove register number REGNO from the dead registers list of INSN.
13394 Return the note used to record the death, if there was one. */
13397 remove_death (unsigned int regno, rtx_insn *insn)
13399 rtx note = find_regno_note (insn, REG_DEAD, regno);
13401 if (note)
13402 remove_note (insn, note);
13404 return note;
13407 /* For each register (hardware or pseudo) used within expression X, if its
13408 death is in an instruction with luid between FROM_LUID (inclusive) and
13409 TO_INSN (exclusive), put a REG_DEAD note for that register in the
13410 list headed by PNOTES.
13412 That said, don't move registers killed by maybe_kill_insn.
13414 This is done when X is being merged by combination into TO_INSN. These
13415 notes will then be distributed as needed. */
13417 static void
13418 move_deaths (rtx x, rtx maybe_kill_insn, int from_luid, rtx_insn *to_insn,
13419 rtx *pnotes)
13421 const char *fmt;
13422 int len, i;
13423 enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
13425 if (code == REG)
13427 unsigned int regno = REGNO (x);
13428 rtx_insn *where_dead = reg_stat[regno].last_death;
13430 /* Don't move the register if it gets killed in between from and to. */
13431 if (maybe_kill_insn && reg_set_p (x, maybe_kill_insn)
13432 && ! reg_referenced_p (x, maybe_kill_insn))
13433 return;
13435 if (where_dead
13436 && BLOCK_FOR_INSN (where_dead) == BLOCK_FOR_INSN (to_insn)
13437 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) >= from_luid
13438 && DF_INSN_LUID (where_dead) < DF_INSN_LUID (to_insn))
13440 rtx note = remove_death (regno, where_dead);
13442 /* It is possible for the call above to return 0. This can occur
13443 when last_death points to I2 or I1 that we combined with.
13444 In that case make a new note.
13446 We must also check for the case where X is a hard register
13447 and NOTE is a death note for a range of hard registers
13448 including X. In that case, we must put REG_DEAD notes for
13449 the remaining registers in place of NOTE. */
13451 if (note != 0 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13452 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13453 > GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))))
13455 unsigned int deadregno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13456 unsigned int deadend = END_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
13457 unsigned int ourend = END_REGNO (x);
13458 unsigned int i;
13460 for (i = deadregno; i < deadend; i++)
13461 if (i < regno || i >= ourend)
13462 add_reg_note (where_dead, REG_DEAD, regno_reg_rtx[i]);
13465 /* If we didn't find any note, or if we found a REG_DEAD note that
13466 covers only part of the given reg, and we have a multi-reg hard
13467 register, then to be safe we must check for REG_DEAD notes
13468 for each register other than the first. They could have
13469 their own REG_DEAD notes lying around. */
13470 else if ((note == 0
13471 || (note != 0
13472 && (GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)))
13473 < GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x)))))
13474 && regno < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13475 && REG_NREGS (x) > 1)
13477 unsigned int ourend = END_REGNO (x);
13478 unsigned int i, offset;
13479 rtx oldnotes = 0;
13481 if (note)
13482 offset = hard_regno_nregs[regno][GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0))];
13483 else
13484 offset = 1;
13486 for (i = regno + offset; i < ourend; i++)
13487 move_deaths (regno_reg_rtx[i],
13488 maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, &oldnotes);
13491 if (note != 0 && GET_MODE (XEXP (note, 0)) == GET_MODE (x))
13493 XEXP (note, 1) = *pnotes;
13494 *pnotes = note;
13496 else
13497 *pnotes = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, x, *pnotes);
13500 return;
13503 else if (GET_CODE (x) == SET)
13505 rtx dest = SET_DEST (x);
13507 move_deaths (SET_SRC (x), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13509 /* In the case of a ZERO_EXTRACT, a STRICT_LOW_PART, or a SUBREG
13510 that accesses one word of a multi-word item, some
13511 piece of everything register in the expression is used by
13512 this insn, so remove any old death. */
13513 /* ??? So why do we test for equality of the sizes? */
13515 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT
13516 || GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13517 || (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG
13518 && (((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (dest))
13519 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
13520 == ((GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (SUBREG_REG (dest)))
13521 + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD))))
13523 move_deaths (dest, maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13524 return;
13527 /* If this is some other SUBREG, we know it replaces the entire
13528 value, so use that as the destination. */
13529 if (GET_CODE (dest) == SUBREG)
13530 dest = SUBREG_REG (dest);
13532 /* If this is a MEM, adjust deaths of anything used in the address.
13533 For a REG (the only other possibility), the entire value is
13534 being replaced so the old value is not used in this insn. */
13536 if (MEM_P (dest))
13537 move_deaths (XEXP (dest, 0), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13538 to_insn, pnotes);
13539 return;
13542 else if (GET_CODE (x) == CLOBBER)
13543 return;
13545 len = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code);
13546 fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);
13548 for (i = 0; i < len; i++)
13550 if (fmt[i] == 'E')
13552 int j;
13553 for (j = XVECLEN (x, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
13554 move_deaths (XVECEXP (x, i, j), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid,
13555 to_insn, pnotes);
13557 else if (fmt[i] == 'e')
13558 move_deaths (XEXP (x, i), maybe_kill_insn, from_luid, to_insn, pnotes);
13562 /* Return 1 if X is the target of a bit-field assignment in BODY, the
13563 pattern of an insn. X must be a REG. */
13565 static int
13566 reg_bitfield_target_p (rtx x, rtx body)
13568 int i;
13570 if (GET_CODE (body) == SET)
13572 rtx dest = SET_DEST (body);
13573 rtx target;
13574 unsigned int regno, tregno, endregno, endtregno;
13576 if (GET_CODE (dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT)
13577 target = XEXP (dest, 0);
13578 else if (GET_CODE (dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART)
13579 target = SUBREG_REG (XEXP (dest, 0));
13580 else
13581 return 0;
13583 if (GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)
13584 target = SUBREG_REG (target);
13586 if (!REG_P (target))
13587 return 0;
13589 tregno = REGNO (target), regno = REGNO (x);
13590 if (tregno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
13591 return target == x;
13593 endtregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (target), tregno);
13594 endregno = end_hard_regno (GET_MODE (x), regno);
13596 return endregno > tregno && regno < endtregno;
13599 else if (GET_CODE (body) == PARALLEL)
13600 for (i = XVECLEN (body, 0) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
13601 if (reg_bitfield_target_p (x, XVECEXP (body, 0, i)))
13602 return 1;
13604 return 0;
13607 /* Given a chain of REG_NOTES originally from FROM_INSN, try to place them
13608 as appropriate. I3 and I2 are the insns resulting from the combination
13609 insns including FROM (I2 may be zero).
13611 ELIM_I2 and ELIM_I1 are either zero or registers that we know will
13612 not need REG_DEAD notes because they are being substituted for. This
13613 saves searching in the most common cases.
13615 Each note in the list is either ignored or placed on some insns, depending
13616 on the type of note. */
13618 static void
13619 distribute_notes (rtx notes, rtx_insn *from_insn, rtx_insn *i3, rtx_insn *i2,
13620 rtx elim_i2, rtx elim_i1, rtx elim_i0)
13622 rtx note, next_note;
13623 rtx tem_note;
13624 rtx_insn *tem_insn;
13626 for (note = notes; note; note = next_note)
13628 rtx_insn *place = 0, *place2 = 0;
13630 next_note = XEXP (note, 1);
13631 switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (note))
13633 case REG_BR_PROB:
13634 case REG_BR_PRED:
13635 /* Doesn't matter much where we put this, as long as it's somewhere.
13636 It is preferable to keep these notes on branches, which is most
13637 likely to be i3. */
13638 place = i3;
13639 break;
13641 case REG_NON_LOCAL_GOTO:
13642 if (JUMP_P (i3))
13643 place = i3;
13644 else
13646 gcc_assert (i2 && JUMP_P (i2));
13647 place = i2;
13649 break;
13651 case REG_EH_REGION:
13652 /* These notes must remain with the call or trapping instruction. */
13653 if (CALL_P (i3))
13654 place = i3;
13655 else if (i2 && CALL_P (i2))
13656 place = i2;
13657 else
13659 gcc_assert (cfun->can_throw_non_call_exceptions);
13660 if (may_trap_p (i3))
13661 place = i3;
13662 else if (i2 && may_trap_p (i2))
13663 place = i2;
13664 /* ??? Otherwise assume we've combined things such that we
13665 can now prove that the instructions can't trap. Drop the
13666 note in this case. */
13668 break;
13670 case REG_ARGS_SIZE:
13671 /* ??? How to distribute between i3-i1. Assume i3 contains the
13672 entire adjustment. Assert i3 contains at least some adjust. */
13673 if (!noop_move_p (i3))
13675 int old_size, args_size = INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0));
13676 /* fixup_args_size_notes looks at REG_NORETURN note,
13677 so ensure the note is placed there first. */
13678 if (CALL_P (i3))
13680 rtx *np;
13681 for (np = &next_note; *np; np = &XEXP (*np, 1))
13682 if (REG_NOTE_KIND (*np) == REG_NORETURN)
13684 rtx n = *np;
13685 *np = XEXP (n, 1);
13686 XEXP (n, 1) = REG_NOTES (i3);
13687 REG_NOTES (i3) = n;
13688 break;
13691 old_size = fixup_args_size_notes (PREV_INSN (i3), i3, args_size);
13692 /* emit_call_1 adds for !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
13693 REG_ARGS_SIZE note to all noreturn calls, allow that here. */
13694 gcc_assert (old_size != args_size
13695 || (CALL_P (i3)
13696 && !ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
13697 && find_reg_note (i3, REG_NORETURN, NULL_RTX)));
13699 break;
13701 case REG_NORETURN:
13702 case REG_SETJMP:
13703 case REG_TM:
13704 case REG_CALL_DECL:
13705 /* These notes must remain with the call. It should not be
13706 possible for both I2 and I3 to be a call. */
13707 if (CALL_P (i3))
13708 place = i3;
13709 else
13711 gcc_assert (i2 && CALL_P (i2));
13712 place = i2;
13714 break;
13716 case REG_UNUSED:
13717 /* Any clobbers for i3 may still exist, and so we must process
13718 REG_UNUSED notes from that insn.
13720 Any clobbers from i2 or i1 can only exist if they were added by
13721 recog_for_combine. In that case, recog_for_combine created the
13722 necessary REG_UNUSED notes. Trying to keep any original
13723 REG_UNUSED notes from these insns can cause incorrect output
13724 if it is for the same register as the original i3 dest.
13725 In that case, we will notice that the register is set in i3,
13726 and then add a REG_UNUSED note for the destination of i3, which
13727 is wrong. However, it is possible to have REG_UNUSED notes from
13728 i2 or i1 for register which were both used and clobbered, so
13729 we keep notes from i2 or i1 if they will turn into REG_DEAD
13730 notes. */
13732 /* If this register is set or clobbered in I3, put the note there
13733 unless there is one already. */
13734 if (reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13736 if (from_insn != i3)
13737 break;
13739 if (! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
13740 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
13741 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_UNUSED, XEXP (note, 0))))
13742 place = i3;
13744 /* Otherwise, if this register is used by I3, then this register
13745 now dies here, so we must put a REG_DEAD note here unless there
13746 is one already. */
13747 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
13748 && ! (REG_P (XEXP (note, 0))
13749 ? find_regno_note (i3, REG_DEAD,
13750 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)))
13751 : find_reg_note (i3, REG_DEAD, XEXP (note, 0))))
13753 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_DEAD);
13754 place = i3;
13756 break;
13758 case REG_EQUAL:
13759 case REG_EQUIV:
13760 case REG_NOALIAS:
13761 /* These notes say something about results of an insn. We can
13762 only support them if they used to be on I3 in which case they
13763 remain on I3. Otherwise they are ignored.
13765 If the note refers to an expression that is not a constant, we
13766 must also ignore the note since we cannot tell whether the
13767 equivalence is still true. It might be possible to do
13768 slightly better than this (we only have a problem if I2DEST
13769 or I1DEST is present in the expression), but it doesn't
13770 seem worth the trouble. */
13772 if (from_insn == i3
13773 && (XEXP (note, 0) == 0 || CONSTANT_P (XEXP (note, 0))))
13774 place = i3;
13775 break;
13777 case REG_INC:
13778 /* These notes say something about how a register is used. They must
13779 be present on any use of the register in I2 or I3. */
13780 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13781 place = i3;
13783 if (i2 && reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13785 if (place)
13786 place2 = i2;
13787 else
13788 place = i2;
13790 break;
13792 case REG_LABEL_TARGET:
13793 case REG_LABEL_OPERAND:
13794 /* This can show up in several ways -- either directly in the
13795 pattern, or hidden off in the constant pool with (or without?)
13796 a REG_EQUAL note. */
13797 /* ??? Ignore the without-reg_equal-note problem for now. */
13798 if (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3))
13799 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i3, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
13800 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
13801 && LABEL_REF_LABEL (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13802 place = i3;
13804 if (i2
13805 && (reg_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2))
13806 || ((tem_note = find_reg_note (i2, REG_EQUAL, NULL_RTX))
13807 && GET_CODE (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == LABEL_REF
13808 && LABEL_REF_LABEL (XEXP (tem_note, 0)) == XEXP (note, 0))))
13810 if (place)
13811 place2 = i2;
13812 else
13813 place = i2;
13816 /* For REG_LABEL_TARGET on a JUMP_P, we prefer to put the note
13817 as a JUMP_LABEL or decrement LABEL_NUSES if it's already
13818 there. */
13819 if (place && JUMP_P (place)
13820 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
13821 && (JUMP_LABEL (place) == NULL
13822 || JUMP_LABEL (place) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13824 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place);
13826 if (!label)
13827 JUMP_LABEL (place) = XEXP (note, 0);
13828 else if (LABEL_P (label))
13829 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
13832 if (place2 && JUMP_P (place2)
13833 && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_LABEL_TARGET
13834 && (JUMP_LABEL (place2) == NULL
13835 || JUMP_LABEL (place2) == XEXP (note, 0)))
13837 rtx label = JUMP_LABEL (place2);
13839 if (!label)
13840 JUMP_LABEL (place2) = XEXP (note, 0);
13841 else if (LABEL_P (label))
13842 LABEL_NUSES (label)--;
13843 place2 = 0;
13845 break;
13847 case REG_NONNEG:
13848 /* This note says something about the value of a register prior
13849 to the execution of an insn. It is too much trouble to see
13850 if the note is still correct in all situations. It is better
13851 to simply delete it. */
13852 break;
13854 case REG_DEAD:
13855 /* If we replaced the right hand side of FROM_INSN with a
13856 REG_EQUAL note, the original use of the dying register
13857 will not have been combined into I3 and I2. In such cases,
13858 FROM_INSN is guaranteed to be the first of the combined
13859 instructions, so we simply need to search back before
13860 FROM_INSN for the previous use or set of this register,
13861 then alter the notes there appropriately.
13863 If the register is used as an input in I3, it dies there.
13864 Similarly for I2, if it is nonzero and adjacent to I3.
13866 If the register is not used as an input in either I3 or I2
13867 and it is not one of the registers we were supposed to eliminate,
13868 there are two possibilities. We might have a non-adjacent I2
13869 or we might have somehow eliminated an additional register
13870 from a computation. For example, we might have had A & B where
13871 we discover that B will always be zero. In this case we will
13872 eliminate the reference to A.
13874 In both cases, we must search to see if we can find a previous
13875 use of A and put the death note there. */
13877 if (from_insn
13878 && from_insn == i2mod
13879 && !reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0), i2mod_new_rhs))
13880 tem_insn = from_insn;
13881 else
13883 if (from_insn
13884 && CALL_P (from_insn)
13885 && find_reg_fusage (from_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0)))
13886 place = from_insn;
13887 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i3)))
13888 place = i3;
13889 else if (i2 != 0 && next_nonnote_nondebug_insn (i2) == i3
13890 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13891 place = i2;
13892 else if ((rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i2)
13893 && !(i2mod
13894 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (XEXP (note, 0),
13895 i2mod_old_rhs)))
13896 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i1)
13897 || rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), elim_i0))
13898 break;
13899 tem_insn = i3;
13900 /* If the new I2 sets the same register that is marked dead
13901 in the note, the note now should not be put on I2, as the
13902 note refers to a previous incarnation of the reg. */
13903 if (i2 != 0 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
13904 tem_insn = i2;
13907 if (place == 0)
13909 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
13911 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn); place == 0; tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
13913 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
13915 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
13916 break;
13917 continue;
13920 /* If the register is being set at TEM_INSN, see if that is all
13921 TEM_INSN is doing. If so, delete TEM_INSN. Otherwise, make this
13922 into a REG_UNUSED note instead. Don't delete sets to
13923 global register vars. */
13924 if ((REGNO (XEXP (note, 0)) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
13925 || !global_regs[REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))])
13926 && reg_set_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn)))
13928 rtx set = single_set (tem_insn);
13929 rtx inner_dest = 0;
13930 rtx_insn *cc0_setter = NULL;
13932 if (set != 0)
13933 for (inner_dest = SET_DEST (set);
13934 (GET_CODE (inner_dest) == STRICT_LOW_PART
13935 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == SUBREG
13936 || GET_CODE (inner_dest) == ZERO_EXTRACT);
13937 inner_dest = XEXP (inner_dest, 0))
13940 /* Verify that it was the set, and not a clobber that
13941 modified the register.
13943 CC0 targets must be careful to maintain setter/user
13944 pairs. If we cannot delete the setter due to side
13945 effects, mark the user with an UNUSED note instead
13946 of deleting it. */
13948 if (set != 0 && ! side_effects_p (SET_SRC (set))
13949 && rtx_equal_p (XEXP (note, 0), inner_dest)
13950 && (!HAVE_cc0
13951 || (! reg_mentioned_p (cc0_rtx, SET_SRC (set))
13952 || ((cc0_setter = prev_cc0_setter (tem_insn)) != NULL
13953 && sets_cc0_p (PATTERN (cc0_setter)) > 0))))
13955 /* Move the notes and links of TEM_INSN elsewhere.
13956 This might delete other dead insns recursively.
13957 First set the pattern to something that won't use
13958 any register. */
13959 rtx old_notes = REG_NOTES (tem_insn);
13961 PATTERN (tem_insn) = pc_rtx;
13962 REG_NOTES (tem_insn) = NULL;
13964 distribute_notes (old_notes, tem_insn, tem_insn, NULL,
13965 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
13966 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (tem_insn));
13968 SET_INSN_DELETED (tem_insn);
13969 if (tem_insn == i2)
13970 i2 = NULL;
13972 /* Delete the setter too. */
13973 if (cc0_setter)
13975 PATTERN (cc0_setter) = pc_rtx;
13976 old_notes = REG_NOTES (cc0_setter);
13977 REG_NOTES (cc0_setter) = NULL;
13979 distribute_notes (old_notes, cc0_setter,
13980 cc0_setter, NULL,
13981 NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX);
13982 distribute_links (LOG_LINKS (cc0_setter));
13984 SET_INSN_DELETED (cc0_setter);
13985 if (cc0_setter == i2)
13986 i2 = NULL;
13989 else
13991 PUT_REG_NOTE_KIND (note, REG_UNUSED);
13993 /* If there isn't already a REG_UNUSED note, put one
13994 here. Do not place a REG_DEAD note, even if
13995 the register is also used here; that would not
13996 match the algorithm used in lifetime analysis
13997 and can cause the consistency check in the
13998 scheduler to fail. */
13999 if (! find_regno_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED,
14000 REGNO (XEXP (note, 0))))
14001 place = tem_insn;
14002 break;
14005 else if (reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (tem_insn))
14006 || (CALL_P (tem_insn)
14007 && find_reg_fusage (tem_insn, USE, XEXP (note, 0))))
14009 place = tem_insn;
14011 /* If we are doing a 3->2 combination, and we have a
14012 register which formerly died in i3 and was not used
14013 by i2, which now no longer dies in i3 and is used in
14014 i2 but does not die in i2, and place is between i2
14015 and i3, then we may need to move a link from place to
14016 i2. */
14017 if (i2 && DF_INSN_LUID (place) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
14018 && from_insn
14019 && DF_INSN_LUID (from_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (i2)
14020 && reg_referenced_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (i2)))
14022 struct insn_link *links = LOG_LINKS (place);
14023 LOG_LINKS (place) = NULL;
14024 distribute_links (links);
14026 break;
14029 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
14030 break;
14035 /* If the register is set or already dead at PLACE, we needn't do
14036 anything with this note if it is still a REG_DEAD note.
14037 We check here if it is set at all, not if is it totally replaced,
14038 which is what `dead_or_set_p' checks, so also check for it being
14039 set partially. */
14041 if (place && REG_NOTE_KIND (note) == REG_DEAD)
14043 unsigned int regno = REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
14044 reg_stat_type *rsp = &reg_stat[regno];
14046 if (dead_or_set_p (place, XEXP (note, 0))
14047 || reg_bitfield_target_p (XEXP (note, 0), PATTERN (place)))
14049 /* Unless the register previously died in PLACE, clear
14050 last_death. [I no longer understand why this is
14051 being done.] */
14052 if (rsp->last_death != place)
14053 rsp->last_death = 0;
14054 place = 0;
14056 else
14057 rsp->last_death = place;
14059 /* If this is a death note for a hard reg that is occupying
14060 multiple registers, ensure that we are still using all
14061 parts of the object. If we find a piece of the object
14062 that is unused, we must arrange for an appropriate REG_DEAD
14063 note to be added for it. However, we can't just emit a USE
14064 and tag the note to it, since the register might actually
14065 be dead; so we recourse, and the recursive call then finds
14066 the previous insn that used this register. */
14068 if (place && REG_NREGS (XEXP (note, 0)) > 1)
14070 unsigned int endregno = END_REGNO (XEXP (note, 0));
14071 bool all_used = true;
14072 unsigned int i;
14074 for (i = regno; i < endregno; i++)
14075 if ((! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
14076 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
14077 || dead_or_set_regno_p (place, i))
14079 all_used = false;
14080 break;
14083 if (! all_used)
14085 /* Put only REG_DEAD notes for pieces that are
14086 not already dead or set. */
14088 for (i = regno; i < endregno;
14089 i += hard_regno_nregs[i][reg_raw_mode[i]])
14091 rtx piece = regno_reg_rtx[i];
14092 basic_block bb = this_basic_block;
14094 if (! dead_or_set_p (place, piece)
14095 && ! reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
14096 PATTERN (place)))
14098 rtx new_note = alloc_reg_note (REG_DEAD, piece,
14099 NULL_RTX);
14101 distribute_notes (new_note, place, place,
14102 NULL, NULL_RTX, NULL_RTX,
14103 NULL_RTX);
14105 else if (! refers_to_regno_p (i, PATTERN (place))
14106 && ! find_regno_fusage (place, USE, i))
14107 for (tem_insn = PREV_INSN (place); ;
14108 tem_insn = PREV_INSN (tem_insn))
14110 if (!NONDEBUG_INSN_P (tem_insn))
14112 if (tem_insn == BB_HEAD (bb))
14113 break;
14114 continue;
14116 if (dead_or_set_p (tem_insn, piece)
14117 || reg_bitfield_target_p (piece,
14118 PATTERN (tem_insn)))
14120 add_reg_note (tem_insn, REG_UNUSED, piece);
14121 break;
14126 place = 0;
14130 break;
14132 default:
14133 /* Any other notes should not be present at this point in the
14134 compilation. */
14135 gcc_unreachable ();
14138 if (place)
14140 XEXP (note, 1) = REG_NOTES (place);
14141 REG_NOTES (place) = note;
14144 if (place2)
14145 add_shallow_copy_of_reg_note (place2, note);
14149 /* Similarly to above, distribute the LOG_LINKS that used to be present on
14150 I3, I2, and I1 to new locations. This is also called to add a link
14151 pointing at I3 when I3's destination is changed. */
14153 static void
14154 distribute_links (struct insn_link *links)
14156 struct insn_link *link, *next_link;
14158 for (link = links; link; link = next_link)
14160 rtx_insn *place = 0;
14161 rtx_insn *insn;
14162 rtx set, reg;
14164 next_link = link->next;
14166 /* If the insn that this link points to is a NOTE, ignore it. */
14167 if (NOTE_P (link->insn))
14168 continue;
14170 set = 0;
14171 rtx pat = PATTERN (link->insn);
14172 if (GET_CODE (pat) == SET)
14173 set = pat;
14174 else if (GET_CODE (pat) == PARALLEL)
14176 int i;
14177 for (i = 0; i < XVECLEN (pat, 0); i++)
14179 set = XVECEXP (pat, 0, i);
14180 if (GET_CODE (set) != SET)
14181 continue;
14183 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14184 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14185 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14186 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14187 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14189 if (!REG_P (reg))
14190 continue;
14192 if (REGNO (reg) == link->regno)
14193 break;
14195 if (i == XVECLEN (pat, 0))
14196 continue;
14198 else
14199 continue;
14201 reg = SET_DEST (set);
14203 while (GET_CODE (reg) == ZERO_EXTRACT
14204 || GET_CODE (reg) == STRICT_LOW_PART
14205 || GET_CODE (reg) == SUBREG)
14206 reg = XEXP (reg, 0);
14208 /* A LOG_LINK is defined as being placed on the first insn that uses
14209 a register and points to the insn that sets the register. Start
14210 searching at the next insn after the target of the link and stop
14211 when we reach a set of the register or the end of the basic block.
14213 Note that this correctly handles the link that used to point from
14214 I3 to I2. Also note that not much searching is typically done here
14215 since most links don't point very far away. */
14217 for (insn = NEXT_INSN (link->insn);
14218 (insn && (this_basic_block->next_bb == EXIT_BLOCK_PTR_FOR_FN (cfun)
14219 || BB_HEAD (this_basic_block->next_bb) != insn));
14220 insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
14221 if (DEBUG_INSN_P (insn))
14222 continue;
14223 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14225 if (reg_referenced_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
14226 place = insn;
14227 break;
14229 else if (CALL_P (insn)
14230 && find_reg_fusage (insn, USE, reg))
14232 place = insn;
14233 break;
14235 else if (INSN_P (insn) && reg_set_p (reg, insn))
14236 break;
14238 /* If we found a place to put the link, place it there unless there
14239 is already a link to the same insn as LINK at that point. */
14241 if (place)
14243 struct insn_link *link2;
14245 FOR_EACH_LOG_LINK (link2, place)
14246 if (link2->insn == link->insn && link2->regno == link->regno)
14247 break;
14249 if (link2 == NULL)
14251 link->next = LOG_LINKS (place);
14252 LOG_LINKS (place) = link;
14254 /* Set added_links_insn to the earliest insn we added a
14255 link to. */
14256 if (added_links_insn == 0
14257 || DF_INSN_LUID (added_links_insn) > DF_INSN_LUID (place))
14258 added_links_insn = place;
14264 /* Check for any register or memory mentioned in EQUIV that is not
14265 mentioned in EXPR. This is used to restrict EQUIV to "specializations"
14266 of EXPR where some registers may have been replaced by constants. */
14268 static bool
14269 unmentioned_reg_p (rtx equiv, rtx expr)
14271 subrtx_iterator::array_type array;
14272 FOR_EACH_SUBRTX (iter, array, equiv, NONCONST)
14274 const_rtx x = *iter;
14275 if ((REG_P (x) || MEM_P (x))
14276 && !reg_mentioned_p (x, expr))
14277 return true;
14279 return false;
14282 DEBUG_FUNCTION void
14283 dump_combine_stats (FILE *file)
14285 fprintf
14286 (file,
14287 ";; Combiner statistics: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n\n",
14288 combine_attempts, combine_merges, combine_extras, combine_successes);
14291 void
14292 dump_combine_total_stats (FILE *file)
14294 fprintf
14295 (file,
14296 "\n;; Combiner totals: %d attempts, %d substitutions (%d requiring new space),\n;; %d successes.\n",
14297 total_attempts, total_merges, total_extras, total_successes);
14300 /* Try combining insns through substitution. */
14301 static unsigned int
14302 rest_of_handle_combine (void)
14304 int rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine;
14306 df_set_flags (DF_LR_RUN_DCE + DF_DEFER_INSN_RESCAN);
14307 df_note_add_problem ();
14308 df_analyze ();
14310 regstat_init_n_sets_and_refs ();
14311 reg_n_sets_max = max_reg_num ();
14313 rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine
14314 = combine_instructions (get_insns (), max_reg_num ());
14316 /* Combining insns may have turned an indirect jump into a
14317 direct jump. Rebuild the JUMP_LABEL fields of jumping
14318 instructions. */
14319 if (rebuild_jump_labels_after_combine)
14321 timevar_push (TV_JUMP);
14322 rebuild_jump_labels (get_insns ());
14323 cleanup_cfg (0);
14324 timevar_pop (TV_JUMP);
14327 regstat_free_n_sets_and_refs ();
14328 return 0;
14331 namespace {
14333 const pass_data pass_data_combine =
14335 RTL_PASS, /* type */
14336 "combine", /* name */
14337 OPTGROUP_NONE, /* optinfo_flags */
14338 TV_COMBINE, /* tv_id */
14339 PROP_cfglayout, /* properties_required */
14340 0, /* properties_provided */
14341 0, /* properties_destroyed */
14342 0, /* todo_flags_start */
14343 TODO_df_finish, /* todo_flags_finish */
14346 class pass_combine : public rtl_opt_pass
14348 public:
14349 pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14350 : rtl_opt_pass (pass_data_combine, ctxt)
14353 /* opt_pass methods: */
14354 virtual bool gate (function *) { return (optimize > 0); }
14355 virtual unsigned int execute (function *)
14357 return rest_of_handle_combine ();
14360 }; // class pass_combine
14362 } // anon namespace
14364 rtl_opt_pass *
14365 make_pass_combine (gcc::context *ctxt)
14367 return new pass_combine (ctxt);